Barnes' Notes on the Bible · Daniel 第2章

註釋閱讀最佳化

分章註釋

Daniel 第 2 章

서론

Daniel 2 Introduction

開啟正文

第一節 本章的真實性

針對本章真實性和可信性的反對意見,為數不多,也不重要。

一、由 Bertholdt 所提出的第一個反對意見(Com. pp. 192, 193),實質上是這樣的:「若這裡的記載是真實的,那麼倘若尼布甲尼撒在這樣輕微而愚昧的場合(Daniel 2:5)就判定這麼多人死刑,古代的史冊便找不出一個比他更徹底的暴君了。據說,這種殘忍與我們所知尼布甲尼撒的一般品格完全不符,全然不可置信。又有人進一步說,雖然東方素來信靠夢,解夢的職務也是尊榮的職務,但沒有人會這樣不講理,也不可能這樣不講理,以致要求解夢者在夢已被遺忘時把夢本身也說出來。據說,解夢者正當的職分是解釋夢,而不是說出夢的內容。」

對這個看來頗有幾分道理的反對意見,可以這樣回覆:

(1) 古代人對「夢」極為倚重,希伯來人和異教世界都是如此。法老的例子必會立刻浮現於人心;不用說,各地的人都倚靠夢,並懇切地探究它們,想知它們是否「可能」是與靈界交通、揭示未來之事的指定途徑。因此,對於這個異教君王尼布甲尼撒對自己所作的夢懷著記載所說的那種掛慮這一假定,沒有可反對之處。還可以補充說,這夢本身作為一個夢並無任何不可能之處,因為它具有心靈那些神秘運作的一切特徵;而且,若神曾藉夢傳達自己的旨意,或以這方式顯明未來的事件,那麼設想他會藉此把將來的事傳達給當時位居地上列帝之首、作那將囊括世界歷史多個世紀的頭一個國之王的他,並無荒謬之處。

(2) 設想一個夢會從清晰的記憶中消逝,或設想夢既已消逝,心裡仍會因對它模糊的記憶或印象而煩擾不安,這並非不可能。這在我們如今的夢中常常發生:我們隱約記得自己作了一個愉快或可怕的夢,卻完全無法回想起夢的本身。這也常常發生在我們「巴不得」能追回那個夢的時候,但我們無論怎樣努力,都無法把夢清晰的面貌召回心頭。

(3) 尼布甲尼撒對占星家所提的要求——要他們先回想那夢,然後解釋它——實在沒有甚麼不合理、荒謬或專橫之處。毫無疑問,他們若把夢提示出來,他便能記起;至少他能記得足夠清楚,足以防止他們欺騙他:因為類似的事在我們自己心靈的運作中不斷發生。當我們忘了一個故事或一段史事,雖然自己無法回想起來,但一旦有人向我們複述,我們便能清晰地記起,並能察覺那正是原來那段敘述,因為它與我們對它的一切印象吻合。再者,雖然人們並不認為解夢者的職分包括在夢消逝後把它「召回」,但尼布甲尼撒的推理是正確的:他們若能「解釋」夢,就當推定他們也能說出夢的內容。後者所需的敏識並不多於前者;而且他們若如自稱的那樣,是在諸神感動之下解夢,那麼推定他們在同樣的感動之下也能說出夢的內容,便是公平合理的。比較 Daniel 2:5 的註釋。因此,從尼布甲尼撒的要求中有任何想像的荒謬之處,都不能對本章的真實性構成反對。這要求不但完全符合本案一切合理的推理原則,也符合一個慣於在凡事上要求絕對服從的專制君王所會有的表現。

(4) 這裡論到尼布甲尼撒的威嚇(Daniel 2:5),與歷史所保存的他品格的一般特徵相符。他具有最高程度的殘忍和嚴酷的元素,尤其是當他的意志沒有立刻被順從時。要證明這一點,只需提他對西底家王的殘忍對待:耶路撒冷被攻取時,「他們就拿住王,帶他到利比拉、巴比倫王那裡審判他。他們在西底家眼前殺了他的眾子,又剜了西底家的眼睛,用銅鍊鎖著他,帶到巴比倫」(2 Kings 25:6-7);又可比較 2 Kings 25:18-21 所記,他殺戮護衛長尼布撒拉旦所擄獲、帶到巴比倫王面前的那一大群人的記載。這些人都是奉尼布甲尼撒本人的命令被冷血殺害的。這些事實充分說明,他在盛怒之下,若占星家不立刻順從他的意思,他會毫不猶豫地以死相脅。比較 Jeremiah 39:5 及以下;Jeremiah 52:9-11。實情是,尼布甲尼撒雖有一些良好的品質,也「按他的方式」敬虔,卻具備東方專制君主的一切慣常特徵。他是一個性情強烈的人,一個在貫徹專橫、堅決、頑固的意志時絕不猶豫的人。

二、Bertholdt 所提的第二個反對意見值得一提,其實質是:這記載帶有後人之手的痕跡,目的是要賦予但以理更高的尊榮,使他的作為顯得更奇妙:pp. 62, 63, 193-196。Bertholdt 的設想是:原先的記載只是尼布甲尼撒要求解夢者解釋夢的意義,而本書作者為了顯示但以理的偉大,在事情發生許久之後,添加了尼布甲尼撒要求他們把「夢」本身也說出來、連同「解釋」一併交代的情節,而但以理的超凡之處,就在於他能立刻做到這一點。

然而,這個反對意見既然沒有任何歷史根據,而且自始至終純屬揣測,就無需再多加討論。這揣測毫無所得;它沒有解決任何疑難;也根本沒有甚麼疑難「需要」靠這種設想來化解。我們所持有的這段敘述,如前所見,沒有內在的不可能性,其中也沒有任何與尼布甲尼撒眾所周知的品格相悖之處。

三、值得注意的第三個針對本章真實性的反對意見,由 Luderwald(p. 40 及以下)和 Bleek(p. 280)提出:這整段敘事與法老之夢及約瑟在埃及宮廷高升的記載極為相似,顯然是由那裏編造或抄襲而來。

對此我們可以這樣回覆:

(a) 若兩者中有一件確曾發生,設想它發生在巴比倫的但以理身上,並不比發生在埃及的約瑟身上更不可能;而且作為各自獨立的歷史來看,兩者沒有一件是不可能的。

(b) 兩案之間的差異之多,足以表明其一並非抄襲自另一。誠然,它們在若干情節上相同:——埃及王和巴比倫王各自作了一個夢;約瑟和但以理都能解釋那夢;他們二人都把這能力歸之於神而非自己;他們二人都因能解夢而蒙高升。但在其他一切事上,他們都不相同。夢的本身、場合、解釋、結果、對未來事件的關係——在這些以及無數別的事上,二者完全不同。還可以補充:若其一真是抄襲自另一,那麼大概會有某些不經意的暗指,藉此可知一位作者手頭有另一位的記載,並且是在照它編寫自己的敘事。但事實上,歷史中再沒有哪兩份記載,比約瑟在埃及的記載和但以理在巴比倫的記載,帶有更多獨立而原創的真實事件敘述的印記了。

四、針對本章記載的第四個反對意見,來自所謂「年代學」上的錯誤。對此的討論,見 Daniel 2:1 的註釋。

第二節 本章分析

本章的內容如下:

一、尼布甲尼撒的夢(Daniel 2:1)。按照古人的共同信念,他視之為神的資訊。這夢的性質也深深印在他的心上,儘管其清晰的面貌和細節已從他心中消失。

二、尼布甲尼撒要求迦勒底人使他回想起那夢,並講解其意義(Daniel 2:2-9)。他吩咐那些以作這類解釋為業的人來到他面前,說出那夢及其意義。但看來他們所自命的,充其量不過是在夢已知曉時加以解釋;因此他們恭請王先把夢說出來,好叫他們加以解釋。王在盛怒之下以死相脅,若他們不先回想出那夢、再說出其解釋;同時又應許豐厚的賞賜,若他們能做到。這一切既是在神的指示之下,為要傳達關於未來事件的重要資訊,於是那夢便被安排為遺忘,徹底挫敗迦勒底人的法術,並給但以理機會把夢和它的解釋顯明出來,從而高抬一位出自先知之地的人,並表明未來之事的顯明,不是靠那些假冒解夢者的技巧,而是唯有靠真神所感動、特派承擔這目的的人。

三、占星家和迦勒底人承認自己無能為力(Daniel 2:10-11)。他們承認自己作不到所要求的。無論後果如何,他們連「嘗試」回想一個已被遺忘的夢都不能。而且,由於我們自己雖然可能無法清晰回想這樣的夢,但別人一說出來,我們便能輕易「認出」它;我們也不會被別人硬要我們相信是那個真夢的任何其他說法所欺騙;同樣,術士們看出,想把自家編造的故事冒充真夢矇騙王是絕望的,因此他們承認無力遵從王的要求。

四、處死他們的諭令(Daniel 2:12-13)。在這道諭令中,但以理和與他一同在宮廷受訓的三位同伴(Daniel 1)也被牽連在內,不是因為他們沒有順從王的要求——因為有最充分的證據表明,這事根本沒有提交給他們——而是因為他們屬於智慧人或謀士這一總類,君王素來指望這類人解明將來事件的徵兆。

五、但以理得知諭令及其緣由後,便到王那裏,請求寬限執行判決(Daniel 2:14-16)。看來他享有隨時覲見王的特權。我們可以推想,他陳明這事其實並未提交給他,雖然他被牽連在總判決之內;而且王既因那夢如此不安,如此急切想知道其意義,又看得如此清楚——若諭令執行而牽連但以理和他的同伴,回想並明白這夢的「一切」盼望便都斷絕——那麼他隨時準備抓住「任何」盼望,無論多麼微薄,只要能使他得知那異象的意義。因此他願意饒過但以理,暫緩執行諭令。

六、在這些緊張而嚴肅的處境中,但以理和他的同伴們專心禱告(Daniel 2:17-18)。他們的性命垂危,而且這案子除非神直接介入,便無法獲救。他們沒有任何憑人力查明王之夢的能力,然而要救他們的性命,那夢就必須被顯明。他們知道,唯有神能把它傳達給他們;因此也唯有他能救他們脫離死亡;在這困惑的處境中,他們使用了神一切朋友都享有的特權——立刻把他們的事帶到他的寶座前。

七、那奧祕在夜間的異象中向但以理顯明,他便發出一段合宜的讚美之歌(Daniel 2:19-23)。這場合需要這樣的感恩表達,而但以理對神所說的話,也完全配得上這場合。

八、如今道路已經鋪好,但以理可以向王說明那夢和它的解釋了。於是他被帶到王面前,並明確地否認自己有任何能力回想那夢或說明其意義(Daniel 2:24-30)。

九、夢及其解釋的陳述(Daniel 2:31-45)。

十、對尼布甲尼撒的影響(Daniel 2:46-49)。他認出了那夢;承認唯有真神才能把它顯明;並提升但以理至顯赫的尊榮。但以理在自己得尊榮之時,沒有忘記他年輕時的賢良同伴(Daniel 1),如今既已高升,也為他們謀求榮譽的職位(Daniel 2:49)。

英文原文

Section I.-- Authenticity of the Chapter

The objections to the authenticity and credibility of this chapter are not numerous or important.

I. The first that is alleged, by Bertholdt (Com. pp. 192, 193), is substantially this: "that if the account here is true, the records of ancient times could not exhibit a more finished tyrant than Nebuchadnezzar was, if he doomed so many persons to death, on so slight and foolish an occasion, Daniel 2:5. This cruelty, it is said, is wholly contrary to the general character of Nebuchadnezzar as it is reported to us, and wholly incredible. It is further said, that, though it was common in the East to trust in dreams, and though the office of interpreting them was an honorable office, yet no one was so unreasonable, or could be, as to require the interpreter to reveal the dream itself when it was forgotten. The proper office of the interpreter, it is said, was to interpret the dream, not to tell what the dream was."

To this objection, which seems to have considerable plausibility, it may be replied:

(1) Much reliance was placed on "dreams" in ancient times, alike among the Hebrews and in the pagan world. The case of Pharaoh will at once occur to the mind; and it need not be said that men everywhere relied on dreams, and inquired earnestly respecting them, whether they "might" not be the appointed means of communication with the spiritual world, and of disclosing what was to occur in the future. There can be no objection, therefore, to the supposition that this pagan monarch, Nebuchadnezzar, felt all the solicitude which he is reported to have done respecting the dream which he had. It may be further added, that in the dream itself there is nothing improbable as a dream, for it has all the characteristics of those mysterious operations of the mind; and, if God ever communicated his will by a dream, or made known future events in this way, there is no absurdity in supposing that he would thus communicate what was to come, to him who was at that time at the head of the empires of the earth, and who was the king over the first of those kingdoms which were to embrace the world's history for so many ages.

(2) There is no improbability in supposing that a dream would vanish from the distinct recollection, or that if it had vanished, the mind would be troubled by some vague recollection or impression in regard to it. This often occurs in our dreams now, as in the indistinct recollection that we have had a pleasant or a frightful dream, when we are wholly unable to recal the dream itself. This often occurs, too, when we would be "glad" to recover the dream if we could, but when no effort that we can make will recal its distinct features to our minds.

(3) There was, really, nothing that was unreasonable, absurd, or tyrannical in the demand which Nebuchadnezzar made on the astrologers, that they should recal the dream itself, and then interpret it. Doubtless he could recollect it if they would suggest it, or at least he could so far recollect it as to prevent their imposing on him: for something like this constantly occurs in the operation of our own minds. When we have forgotten a story, or a piece of history, though we could not ourselves recal it, yet when it is repeated to us, we can then distinctly recollect it, and can perceive that that is the same narrative, for it agrees with all our impressions in regard to it. Furthermore, though it was not understood to be a part of the office of an interpreter of dreams to "recal" the dream if it had vanished from the mind, yet Nebuchadnezzar reasoned correctly, that if they could "interpret" the dream they ought to be presumed to be able to tell what it was. The one required no more sagacity than the other: and if they were, as they pretended to be, under the inspiration of the gods in interpreting a dream, it was fair to presume that, under the same inspiration, they could tell what it was. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:5. No objection, then, can lie against the authenticity of this chapter from any supposed absurdity in the demand of Nebuchadnezzar. It was not only strictly in accordance with all the just principles of reasoning in the case, but was in accordance with what might be expected from an arbitrary monarch who was accustomed to exact obedience in all things.

(4) what is here said of the threatening of Nebuchadnezzar Daniel 2:5, accords with the general traits of his character as history has preserved them. He had in him the elements of cruelty and severity of the highest order, especially when his will was not immediately complied with. In proof of this, we need only refer to his cruel treatment of the king Zedekiah, when Jerusalem was taken: "So they took the king, and brought him to the king of Babylon to Riblah: and they gave judgment upon him. And they slew the sons of Zedekiah before his eyes, and put out the eyes of Zedekiah, and bound him with fetters of brass, and brought him to Babylon," 2 Kings 25:6-7 : compare also, in 2 Kings 25:18-21, the account of his slaying the large number of persons that were taken by Nebuzar-adan, captain of the guard, and brought by him to the king in Babylon. These were slain in cold blood by order of Nebuchadnezzar himself. These facts make it every way probable that, in a fit of passion, he would not hesitate to threaten the astrologers with death if they did not comply at once with his will. Compare Jeremiah 39:5, following; Jeremiah 52:9-11. The truth was, that though Nebuchadnezzar had some good qualities, and was religious "in his way," yet he had all the usual characteristics of an Oriental despot. He was a man of strong passions, and was a man who would never hesitate in carrying out the purposes of an arbitrary, a determined, and a stubborn will.

II. A second objection made by Bertholdt, which may demand a moment's notice, is, substantially, that the account bears the mark of a later hand, for the purpose of conferring a higher honor on Daniel, and making what he did appear the more wonderful: pp. 62, 63, 193-196. The supposition of Bertholdt is, that the original account was merely that Nebuchadnezzar required of the interpreter to explain the sense of the dream, but that, in order to show the greatness of Daniel, the author of this book, long after the affair occurred, added the circumstance that Nebuchadnezzar required of them to make the "dream" known as well as the "interpretation," and that the great superiority of Daniel was shown by his being able at once to do this.

As this objection, however, is not based on any historical grounds, and as it is throughout mere conjecture, it is not necessary to notice it further. Nothing is gained by the conjecture; no difficulty is relieved by it; nor is there any real difficulty "to be" relieved by any such supposition. The narrative, as we have it, has, as we have seen, no intrinsic improbability, nor is there anything in it which is contrary to the well-known character of Nebuchadnezzar.

III. A third objection to the authenticity of the chapter, which deserves to be noticed, is urged by Luderwald, p. 40, following, and Bleek, p. 280, that this whole narrative has a strong resemblance to the account of the dreams of Pharaoh, and the promotion of Joseph at the court of Egypt, and was apparently made up from that, or copied from it.

But to this we may reply,

(a) that, if either happened, there is no more improbability in supposing that it should happen to Daniel in Babylon than to Joseph in Egypt; and, taken as separate and independent histories, neither of them is improbable.

(b) There is so much diversity in the two cases as to show that the one is not copied from the other. They agree, indeed, in several circumstances: - in the fact that the king of Egypt and the king of Babylon had each a dream; in the fact that Joseph and Daniel were enabled to interpret the dream; in the fact that they both ascribed the ability to do this, not to themselves, but to God; and in the fact that they were both raised to honor, as a consequence of their being able to interpret the dream. But in nothing else do they agree. The dreams themselves; the occasion; the explanation; the result; the bearing on future events - in these, and in numerous other things, they differ entirely. It may be added also, that if the one had been copied from the other, it is probable that there would have been some undesigned allusion by which it could be known that the writer of the one had the other before him, and that he was framing his own narrative from that. But, as a matter of fact, there are no two records in history that have more the marks of being independent and original narratives of real transactions, than the account of Joseph in Egypt, and of Daniel in Babylon.

IV. A fourth objection to the account in this chapter arises from an alleged error in "chronology." For a consideration of this, see the notes at Daniel 2:1.

Section II.-- Analysis of the Chapter

The subjects of this chapter are the following:

I. The dream of Nebuchadnezzar, Daniel 2:1. In accordance with the common belief among the ancients, he regarded this as a Divine message. The dream, too, was of such a character as to make a deep impression on his mind, though its distinct features and details had gone from him.

II. The demand of Nebuchadnezzar that the Chaldeans should recal the dream to his recollection, and expound its meaning, Daniel 2:2-9. He ordered those whose business it was professedly to give such interpretations, to come into his presence, and to make known the dream and its meaning. But it would seem that their pretensions went no further than to explain a dream when it was known, and hence, they asked respectfully that the king would state the dream in order that they might explain it. The king, in angel threatened death, if they did not first recal the dream, and then make known the interpretation, promising at the same time ample rewards if they were able to do this. As all this, under Divine direction, was designed to communicate important information of future events, it was so ordered that the dream should be forgotten, thus entirely confounding the art of the Chaldeans, and giving an opportunity to Daniei to make the dream and its interpretation known, thus exalting a man from the land of the prophets, and showing that it was not by the skill of the pretended interpreters of dreams that future events could be made known, but that it was only by those who were inspired for that purpose by the true God.

III. The acknowledged failure of the power of the astrologers and Chaldeans, Daniel 2:10-11. They admitted that they could not do what was demanded of them. Whatever might be the consequence, they could not even "attempt" to recal a forgotten dream. And as, though we may be unable to recal such a dream distinctly ourselves, we could easily "recognize" it if it were stated to us; and as we could not be imposed on by something else that anyone should undertake to make us believe was the real dream, the magicians saw that it was hopeless to attempt to palm a story of their own invention on him, as if that were the real dream, and they therefore acknowledged their inability to comply with the demand of the king.

IV. The decree that they should die, Daniel 2:12-13. In this decree, Daniel and his three friends who had been trained with him at court Daniel 1 were involved, not because they had failed to comply with the demand of the king, for there is the fullest evidence that the subject had not been laid before them, but because they came under the general class of wise men, or counselors, to whom the monarch looked to explain the prognostics of coming events.

V. Daniel, when apprised of the decree, and the cause of it, went to the king and requested a respite in the execution of the sentence, Daniel 2:14-16. It would seem that he had the privilege of access to the king at pleasure. We may presume that he stated that the thing had not in fact been laid before him, though he had become involved in the general sentence, and it is no unreasonable supposition that the king was so much troubled with the dream, that he was so anxious to know its signification, and that he saw so clearly that if the decree was executed, involving Daniel and his friends, "all" hope of recalling and understanding it would be lost, that he was ready to grasp at "any" hope, however slender, of being made acquainted with the meaning of the vision. He was willing, therefore, that Daniel should be spared, and that the execution of the decree should be suspended.

VI. In these interesting and solemn circumstances, Daniel and his friends gave themselves to prayer, Daniel 2:17-18. Their lives were in danger, and the case was such that they could not be rescued but by a direct Divine inter position. There was no power which they had of ascertaining by any human means what was the dream of the monarch, and yet it was indispensable, in order to save their lives, that the dream should be made known. God only, they knew, could communicate it to them, and he only, therefore, could save them from death; and in these circumstances of perplexity they availed themselves of the privilege which all the friends of God have - of carrying their cause at once before his throne.

VII. The secret was revealed to Daniel in a night vision, and he gave utterance to an appropriate song of praise, Daniel 2:19-23. The occasion was one which demanded such an expression of thanksgiving, and that which Daniel addressed to God was every way worthy of the occasion.

VIII. The way was now prepared for Daniel to make known to the king the dream and the interpretation. Accordingly he was brought before the king, and he distinctly disclaimed any power of himself to recal the dream, or to make known its signification, Daniel 2:24-30.

IX. The statement of the dream and the interpretation, Daniel 2:31-45.

X. The effect on Nebuchadnezzar, Daniel 2:46-49. He recognized the dream; acknowledged that it was only the true God who could have made it known; and promoted Daniel to distinguished honor. In his own honors, Daniel did not forget the virtuous companions of his youth Daniel 1, and sought for them, now that he was elevated, posts of honorable employment also, Daniel 2:49.

1

Daniel 2:1

開啟正文

尼布甲尼撒在位第二年——這句話裏有一個表面上的年代難題,曾使註釋家頗感困惑。它主要出於兩個原因。

(1) Jeremiah 25:1 說,尼布甲尼撒作王的第一年相當於猶大王約雅敬的第四年;而被擄之事發生在約雅敬在位第三年(Daniel 1:1),那麼這裏的時間就該是尼布甲尼撒在位的「第四」年,而不是第二年。

(2) 我們從 Daniel 1:5、Daniel 1:18 知道,但以理和他的三個朋友為預備朝見君王而受訓,已在巴比倫住了三年;而整段敘述使我們設想,但以理被列在智慧人之中乃是在這「之後」(比較 Daniel 2:13-14),因此若假定被擄發生於尼布甲尼撒作王的第一年,這夢的時間便落在他作王的第四年。這難題又因以下事實而加重:尼布甲尼撒上來圍攻耶路撒冷時被稱為「王」,而且他顯然不是以在位君王副手的身分、也不是作別人麾下迦勒底大軍的將軍而去。見 2 Kings 24:1、2 Kings 24:11。對這難題已有人提出各種解法,但真正的解法大概乃是:尼布甲尼撒曾有一段時間與他父親那波帕拉薩爾共同執政;他雖然得了「王」的稱號,這裏的計年卻是從他開始單獨作王時算起,這一年乃是他獨佔王位的第二個年頭。

Berosus 說,他父親那波帕拉薩爾年老體弱,把一部分軍隊交給他兒子尼布甲尼撒;尼布甲尼撒在幼發拉底河的迦基米施(Circesium)擊潰埃及大軍,把尼哥趕出亞洲。這位得勝的王子隨即直趨耶路撒冷,約雅敬向他投降;這就是七十年被擄的開始。見 Jahn 的《History of the Hebrew Commonwealth》,頁134。那波帕拉薩爾大約在那之後兩年去世,尼布甲尼撒繼承王位。兩人共同執政的時期為兩年;因此,他單獨作王的第二年便是他全部在位的第四年;照哪一種算法都合宜,也都不會被誤解。別的解法也有人採用,但這一個既解決了全部難題,又以事實為根據,便無須提及它們。比較 Stuart 教授論但以理書的《Excursus》一和二。(見 Barnes 的但以理書附錄一及附錄二。)

尼布甲尼撒作了夢——這裏用的是複數,雖然所提的夢只有一個,所指的大概也只有一個,因為尼布甲尼撒自己論到它時說:「我作了一個夢」(Daniel 2:3)。拉丁通俗譯本和希臘文譯本也都是單數。這大概是一種流行的用法,就像人說「我昨夜作了一些奇怪的夢」,而心裏所指的可能只是一個夢。——Bush 教授。在古時神藉以顯明未來事件的方法中,「夢」是最常見的方法之一。見 Daniel 1:17 的註釋;以賽亞書導論第七節(2);比較 Genesis 20:3、Genesis 20:6;Genesis 31:11;Genesis 37:5-6;Genesis 40:5;Genesis 41:7、Genesis 41:25;1 Kings 3:5;Numbers 12:6;Joel 2:28;Job 33:14-16。相信天上的旨意藉夢傳達給人,這信念在古時通行於全世界。因此荷馬《伊利亞特》卷一第63行有那句動人的話——καὶ γάρ τ' ὄναρ ἐκ Διός ἐστιν(kai gar t' onar ek Dios estin),「夢是出於宙斯的」。照樣,在《伊利亞特》卷二的開頭,他把宙斯的旨意描寫為藉着 Ὄνείρος(Oneiros)即「夢」傳給阿伽門農。

第歐根尼·拉爾修(Diogenes Laertius)也提到蘇格拉底的一個夢,藉著它蘇格拉底預言自己的死將在三天後發生。傳達神旨的這一方法,不僅用於眾先知,也用於與宗教無分的人、甚至惡人,如法老、亞比米勒、尼布甲尼撒、埃及的酒政和膳長等。然而在每一個這樣的事例中,都必須如我們眼前的事例一樣,請真先知來幫助解夢;惟有經過這樣的解釋,它才在確定的未來預言之列。神以這方式傳達其旨意的一個「目的」,看來是要把作夢之人的注意力固定在所論的題目上,預備他領受神所選擇向他傳達的信息。因此,不能懷疑的是:法老和尼布甲尼撒相信夢揭示未來之事,又因這夢心裏焦慮不安,這使他們比起用任何別的方式傳達神旨,更能預備好領受約瑟和但以理論到未來的話。

他們毫不懷疑曾有關乎未來的重要信息傳給他們,也急於想知道那是甚麼。因此,他們預備好迎接任何在他們看來可信的解釋;這樣,真神的僕人便得着一條別無他途可尋的、通到他們心裏的進路。夢怎樣被規定得足以「被知道」是未來之事的預告,我們如今無法查明。神能在睡眠中進到人的心裏、並以這方式傳達祂的旨意,這是「可能的」,無人能懷疑。就其被用於這目的的範圍而論,它是一個安全而確實的方法,這由亞比米勒(Genesis 20:3、Genesis 20:6)、約瑟和他的弟兄們(Genesis 37:5-6)、法老(Genesis 41:7、Genesis 41:25)、以及酒政和膳長(Genesis 40:5)等事例中如此作出的預言之結果所證明。然而,不能由此推論說,今日對夢還可以有同樣的信賴、或任何的信賴;因為即使沒有別的反對理由,單是沒有蒙授權解釋睡中心靈遊蕩的解釋者這一事實,就已足夠。神如今用別的方式把祂的真理傳達到人的心靈裏。

他的心煩亂——既因那夢的不尋常性質,也因他無疑感到那夢涉及一些關乎他的國和未來世代的重要真理。見 Daniel 2:31-36。這裏譯作「煩亂」的希伯來字(פעם pâ‛am),本義是「擊打、敲擊、搗碎」;在尼法爾(Niph.)中意為被震動、被搖撼,在希特帕爾(Hithpa.)中意為被攪動、煩亂。這字的確切含義是如打鐵砧般的擊打,繼而指任何沉重的打擊、或任何造成震動的事物。這「動詞」只出現於下列各處:Judges 13:25(譯作「感動」);Psalm 67:4(5);Genesis 41:8;Daniel 2:1、Daniel 2:3(譯作「煩亂」)。「名詞」則經常出現。「他的睡眠離他而去。」希伯來文是 עליו נהיתה שׁנתו shenâthô nı̂heyethâh ‛ālâyv。

按字面是「他的睡在他身上」。希臘文譯本作「他的睡離了他」,即離開了他。通俗拉丁譯本作「他的睡逃去(fugit)」。然而希伯來文是否容許這種譯法,殊屬可疑。大概字面的譯法才是正確的,如此希伯來文 על(‛al)「在……之上」的意思得以保留。那麼其含義便是:這奇異的景象是在他沉「睡」中出現的。它是一個「夢」,而不是「敞開的異象」。它是感官在靜止中被鎖閉時從心靈面前經過的一類景象,而不是眾先知在清醒時蒙准看見未來異象時擺在他們心靈面前的那一類。比較 Numbers 24:4、Numbers 24:16。這些字眼並無一處暗示臨到尼布甲尼撒的睡眠本身有甚麼超自然之處;其意思只是,這一切都在他熟「睡」時發生。然而 Stuart 教授譯作「他的睡眠離棄了他」,Gesenius 也這樣譯。Winer 譯作「他的睡從他那裏去了」。但在我看來,更自然的意思還是字面翻譯所顯明的:這事是以夢的方式、在酣睡的狀態中發生的。

英文原文

And in the second year of the reign of Nebuchadnezzar - There is an apparent chronological difficulty in this statement which has given some perplexity to expositors. It arises mainly from two sources.

(1) That in Jeremiah 25:1, it is said that the first year of the reign of Nebuchadnezzar corresponded with the fourth year of Jehoiakim, king of Judah, and as the captivity was in the third year of the reign of Jehoiakim Daniel 1:1, the time here would be the "fourth" year of the reign of Nebuchadnezzar, instead of the second.

(2) That we learn from Daniel 1:5, Daniel 1:18, that Daniel and his three friends had been in Babylon already three years, under a process of training preparatory to their being presented at court, and as the whole narrative leads us to suppose that it was "after" this that Daniel was regarded as enrolled among the wise men (compare Daniel 2:13-14), on the supposition that the captivity occurred in the first year of the reign of Nebuchadnezzar, this would bring the time of the dream into the fourth year of his reign. This difficulty is somewhat increased from the fact that when Nebuchadnezzar went up to besiege Jerusalem he is called "king," and it is evident that he did not go as a lieutenant of the reigning monarch; or as a general of the Chaldean forces under the direction of another. See 2 Kings 24:1, 2 Kings 24:11. Various solutions of this difficulty have been proposed, but the true one probably is, that Nebuchadnezzar reigned some time conjointly with his father, Nabopolassar, and, though the title "king" was given to him, yet the reckoning here is dated from the time when he began to reign alone, and that this was the year of his sole occupancy of the throne.

Berosus states that his father, Nabopolassar, was aged and infirm, and that he gave up a part of his army to his son Nebuchadnezzar, who defeated the Egyptian host at Carchemish (Circesium) on the Euphrates, and drove Necho out of Asia. The victorious prince then marched directly to Jerusalem, and Jehoiakim surrendered to him; and this was the beginning of the seventy years, captivity. See "Jahn's History of the Hebrew Commonwealth," p. 134. Nabopolassar probably died about two years after that, and Nebuchadnezzar succeeded to the throne. The period of their reigning together was two years, and of course the second year of his single reign would be the fourth of his entire reign; and a reckoning from either would be proper, and would not be misunderstood. Other modes of solution have been adopted, but as this meets the whole difficulty, and is founded on truth, it is unnecessary to refer to them. Compare Prof. Stuart, on Daniel, Excursus I. and Excursus II.((See Barnes' Appendix I and Appendix II to Daniel)

Nebuchadnezzar dreamed dreams - The plural is here used, though there is but one dream mentioned, and probably but one is referred to, for Nebuchadnezzar, when speaking of it himself Daniel 2:3, says, "I have dreamed a dream." In the Latin Vulgate, and in the Greek, it is also in the singular. It is probable that this is a popular use of words, as if one should say, "I had strange dreams last night," though perhaps but a single dream was intended. - Prof. Bush. Among the methods by which God made known future events in ancient times, that by "dreams" was one of the most common. See the notes at Daniel 1:17; Introduction to Isaiah, Section 7. (2); compare Genesis 20:3, Genesis 20:6; Genesis 31:11; Genesis 37:5-6; Genesis 40:5; Genesis 41:7, Genesis 41:25; 1 Kings 3:5; Numbers 12:6; Joel 2:28; Job 33:14-16. The belief that the will of heaven was communicated to men by means of dreams, was prevalent throughout the world in ancient times. Hence, the striking expression in Homer, Iliad i. 63 - καὶ γάρ τ ̓ ὄναρ ἐκ Διός ἐστιν kai gar t' onar ek Dios estin, "the dream is of Jove." So in the commencement of his second Iliad, he represents the will of Jupiter as conveyed to Agamemnon by Ὄνείρος Oneiros, or "the dream."

So Diogenes Laertius makes mention of a dream of Socrates, by which he foretold his death as to happen in three days. This method of communicating the Divine will was adopted, not only in reference to the prophets, but also to those who were strangers to religion, and even to wicked men, as in the case of Pharaoh, Abimelech, Nebuchadnezzar, the butler and baker in Egypt, etc. In every such instance, however, it was necessary, as in the case before us, to call in the aid of a true prophet to interpret the dream; and it was only when thus interpreted that it took its place among the certain predictions of the future. One "object" of communicating the Divine will in this manner, seems to have been to fix the attention of the person who had the dream on the subject, and to prepare him to receive the communication which God had chosen to make to him. Thus it cannot be doubted that by the belief in dreams entertained by Pharaoh and Nebuchadnezzar, as disclosing future events, and by the anxiety of mind which they experienced m regard to the dreams, they were better prepared to receive the communications of Joseph and Daniel in reference to the future than they could have been by any other method of making known the Divine will.

They had no doubt that some important communication had been made to them respecting the future, and they were anxious to know what it was. They were prepared, therefore, to welcome any explanation which commended itself to them as true, and in this way the servants of the true God had a means of access to their hearts which they could have found in no other way. By what laws it was so regulated that a dream should be "known" to be a preintimation of coming events, we have now no means of ascertaining. That it is "possible" for God to have access to the mind in sleep, and to communicate his will in this manner, no one can doubt. That it was, so far as employed for that purpose, a safe and certain way, is demonstrated by the results of the predictions thus made in the case of Abimelech, Genesis 20:3, Genesis 20:6; of Joseph and his brethren, Genesis 37:5-6; of Pharaoh, Genesis 41:7, Genesis 41:25; and of the butler and baker, Genesis 40:5. It is not, however, to be inferred that the same reliance, or that any reliance, is now to be placed on dreams, for were there no other consideration against such reliance, it would be sufficient that there is no authorized interpreter of the wanderings of the mind in sleep. God now communicates his truth to the souls of men in other ways.

Wherewith his spirit was troubled - Alike by the unusual nature of the dream, and by the impression which he undoubtedly had that it referred to some important truths pertaining to his kingdom and to future times. See Daniel 2:31-36 The Hebrew word here rendered "troubled" (פעם pâ‛am) means, properly, to "strike, to beat, to pound;" then, in Niph., to be moved, or agitated; and also in Hithpa., to be agitated, or troubled. The proper signification of the word is that of striking as on an anvil, and then it refers to any severe stroke, or anything which produces agitation. The "verb" occurs only in the following places: Judges 13:25, where it is rendered "move;" and Psalm 67:4, (5); Genesis 41:8; Daniel 2:1, Daniel 2:3, where it is rendered "troubled." The "noun" is of frequent occurrence. "And his sleep brake from him." Hebrew עליו נהיתה שׁנתו shenâthô nı̂heyethâh ‛ālâyv.

Literally, "His sleep was upon him." The Greek is, "his sleep was from him;" i. e., left him. The Vulgate, "his sleep fled (fugit) from him." But it may be doubted whether the Hebrew will bear this construction. Probably the literal construction is the true one, by which the sense of the Hebrew - על ‛al "upon" - will be retained. The meaning then would be, that this remarkable representation occurred when he was "in" a profound sleep. It was a "dream," and not "an open vision." It was such a representation as passes before the mind when the senses are locked in repose, and not such as was made to pass before the minds of the prophets when they were permitted to see visions of the future, though awake. Compare Numbers 24:4, Numbers 24:16. There is nothing in the words which conveys the idea that there was anything preternatural in the sleep that had come upon Nebuchadnezzar, but the thought is, that all this occurred when he "was" sound asleep. Prof. Stuart, however, renders this, "his sleep failed him," and so does also Gesenius. Winer renders it, "his sleep went away from him." But it seems to me that the more natural idea is what occurs in the literal translation of the words, that this occurred as a dream, in a state of profound repose.

2

Daniel 2:2

開啟正文

王吩咐人——即當他醒來的時候。譯作「於是」的那個虛詞,並不表示這事隨即發生。王醒來時心緒煩亂;他深信自己領受了一次重要的屬天曉諭;然而他連那夢也無法清楚憶起,便決意把那些以解讀未來徵兆為業的人召到自己面前來。

術士、用法術的——這些名稱與Daniel 1:20裏的相同。見該處的註釋。

行邪術的——希伯來文為מכשׁפים(mekashepı̂ym)。武加大譯本作malefici,即「行邪術的」;希臘文作φαρμακεύς(pharmakeus);敘利亞文作「魔術師」。這個希伯來字出於字根כשׁף(kâshaph),在Pi'el形中意為施行法術、使用法術套語或咒語、喃喃念誦;它所指的,是沉迷法術之人施行其欺瞞手法所用的種種伎倆。這個字所含的特殊意念,看來是在這種場合使用了某種形式的祈禱,因為這字在敘利亞文中意為祈禱或敬拜。這類人在施行咒術時,大概曾求助於偶像神明。這個字僅見於以下經文:一次作「動詞」,在2 Chronicles 33:6譯作「用法術」;作「分詞」時,在Exodus 7:11; Daniel 2:2; Malachi 3:5譯作「行邪術的」,在Exodus 22:18 (17); Deuteronomy 18:10譯作「行邪術的女人」。名詞(כשׁף kashâph與כשׁפים keshâpı̂ym)用於以下經文,總是指法術或巫術:Jeremiah 27:9; 2 Kings 9:22; Isaiah 47:9; Micah 5:12 (11); Nahum 3:4。要確切指明這個字與其他涉及同一大主題的字之間的用法分別,或許不易,但它似乎意味着使用了某種形式的「祈禱」或「呼求」。這裏所指的人,並不宣稱憑自己固有的技能解讀未來之事的徵兆,而是宣稱憑諸神的幫助來解釋。

迦勒底人——見Daniel 1:4的註釋。迦勒底人看來只是組成巴比倫全體的部族或民族之一(比較Isaiah 23:13的註釋),而在這時期,他們似乎特別專注於祕術與隱祕學科的踐行。這項列舉中所提的其他人,大概並非迦勒底人。這些人之中若有麻葛(Magians),他們乃是瑪代人(見Daniel 1:20的註釋),而且其他各類占卜者也很可能出自別的民族。尼布甲尼撒的用意,是要把普天下凡以技藝與知識著稱的人物都聚集到自己的宮廷(見Daniel 1的分析),而迦勒底的智慧人便受任推行這一計畫。迦勒底人如此專注於這些祕術,又因這些技藝如此聞名,以致在希臘和羅馬作家當中,這名稱竟被用來指稱一切在這門學問上自稱具有非凡能力的人。

Diodorus Siculus(lib. ii.)論到巴比倫的迦勒底人說:「他們在那裏擔任的職分,與埃及的祭司相同;他們終身獻身於對神的敬拜,專心從事哲學,並從占星術尋求他們最高的榮耀。」Cicero也評述道(De Divin., p. 3):「迦勒底人如此稱名,不是出於他們的技藝,而是出於他們的民族;據信他們藉着對星辰經久的觀測,研出了一門學問,能預測每一個人將遭遇何事,以及他生於何種命運。」Juvenal也留下了這樣的話(Sat. vi., verses 552-554):"Chaldaeis sed major erit fiducia; quidquid dixerit astrologus, credent a fonte relatum Ammonis."——「但他們最信靠的是迦勒底人;無論占星家宣告甚麼,他們都必當作(朱庇特)阿蒙所賜的回應而領受。」Horace也提到他那時代以法術或占卜之術著稱的「巴比倫人」:

"nec Babylonios,

tentaris numeros." — Car. lib. i.; xi.

整個迦勒底民族都專務這些技藝,這是不太可能的;但他們作為一個民族,因這類知識變得如此著名,以致在國外這便成了他們最為人知的特徵。(另見Barnes的但以理書附錄)

要他們將王的夢告訴王——即把那夢是甚麼告訴他,並解明其含義。比較Genesis 41:24; Judges 14:12; 1 Kings 10:3。君王召請解夢的人來解明夢的含義,乃是常事,這從希羅多德(Herodotus)的記載可以看出。阿斯提阿格斯(Astyages)登基時,有一個女兒名叫曼丹妮(Mandane)。她作了一個在他看來極其奇特的夢,他便召了「麻葛」(magi)來;希羅多德說,他們的解釋令他「極其驚恐」。他受這夢與其解釋的影響如此之深,以致他對女兒婚事的決定全然改變。——第1卷,107節。又如,女兒出嫁之後,希羅多德說(第1卷,第108節):「阿斯提阿格斯又見了一個異象。他看見一株葡萄樹從他女兒身上長出來,遮滿了全亞西亞。這一次他也請教了那些解夢的人;結果是,當他女兒產期將近時,他便把她從波斯召了來。她一到,他便嚴密看守,意欲除掉她的孩子。因為麻葛已宣告,那異象表明他女兒的孩子將要取代他登上王位。」阿斯提阿格斯為防範這事,在古列(Cyrus)一出生,便召了他所信任的哈爾帕戈斯(Harpagus)來,命他把那嬰孩帶到自己家中處死。希羅多德的這些段落表明,這裏所記巴比倫王要求術士和占星家幫助解夢的事,決非罕見。

英文原文

Then the king commanded - That is, when he awoke. The particle rendered "then," does not imply that this occurred immediately. When he awoke, his mind was agitated; he was impressed with the belief that he had had an important Divine communication; but he could not even recal the dream distinctly, and he resolved to summon to his presence those whose business it was to interpret what were regarded as prognostics of the future.

The magicians, and the astrologers - These are the same words which occur in Daniel 1:20. See the note at that place.

And the sorcerers - Hebrew מכשׁפים mekashepı̂ym. Vulgate, malefici - sorcerers. Greek, φαρμακεύς pharmakeus Syriac, "magician." The Hebrew word is derived from כשׁף kâshaph - meaning, in Piel, to practice magic; to use magic formulas, or incantations; to mutter; and it refers to the various arts by which those who were addicted to magic practiced their deceptions. The particular idea in this word would seem to be, that on such occasions some forms of prayers were used, for the word in Syriac means to offer prayers, or to worship. Probably the aid of idol gods was invoked by such persons when they practiced incantations. The word is found only in the following places: once as a "verb," 2 Chronicles 33:6, and rendered "used witchcraft;" and as a "participle," rendered "sorcerers," in Exodus 7:11; Daniel 2:2; Malachi 3:5; and "witch," in Exodus 22:18 (17); Deuteronomy 18:10. The noun (כשׁף kashâph and כשׁפים keshâpı̂ym) is used in the following places, always with reference to sorcery or witchcraft: Jeremiah 27:9; 2 Kings 9:22; Isaiah 47:9; Micah 5:12 (11); Nahum 3:4. It may not be easy to specify the exact sense in which this word is used as distinguished from the others which relate to the same general subject, but it would seem to be that some form of "prayer" or "invocation" was employed. The persons referred to did not profess to interpret the prognostics of future events by any original skill of their own, but by the aid of the gods.

And the Chaldeans - See the notes at Daniel 1:4. The Chaldeans appear to have been but one of the tribes or nations that made up the community at Babylon (compare the notes at Isaiah 23:13), and it would seem that at this time they were particularly devoted to the practice of occult arts, and secret sciences. It is not probable that the other persons referred to in this enumeration were Chaldeans. The Magians, if any of these were employed, were Medians (see the notes at Daniel 1:20), and it is not improbable that the other classes of diviners might have been from other nations. The purpose of Nebuchadnezzar was to assemble at his court whatever was remarkable throughout the world for skill and knowledge (see analysis of Daniel 1), and the wise men of the Chaldeans were employed in carrying out that design. The Chaldeans were so much devoted to these secret arts, and became so celebrated for them, that the name came, among the Greek and Roman writers, to be used to denote all those who laid claim to extraordinary powers in this department.

Diodorus Siculus (lib. ii.) says of the Chaldeans in Babylon, that "they sustain the same office there that the priests do in Egypt, for being devoted to the worship of God through their whole lives, they give themselves to philosophy, and seek from astrology their highest glory." Cicero also remarks (De Divin., p. 3), that "the Chaldeans, so named, not from their art, but their nation, are supposed, by a prolonged observation of the stars, to have wrought out a science by which could be predicted what was to happen to every individual, and to what fate he was born." Juvenal likewise (Sat. vi., verses 552-554), has this passage: "Chaldaeis sed major erit fiducia; quidquid dixerit astrologus, credent a fonte relatum Ammonis. - But their chief dependence is upon the Chaldeans; whatever an astrologer declares, they will receive as a response of (Jupiter) Ammon." Horace refers to the "Babylonians" as distinguished in his time for the arts of magic, or divination:

"nec Babylonios,

tentaris numeros." - Car. lib. i.; xi.

It is not probable that the whole nation of Chaldeans was devoted to these arts, but as a people they became so celebrated in this kind of knowledge that it was their best known characteristic abroad. (See also Barnes' Appendix to Daniel)

For to show the king his dreams - To show him what the dream was, and to explain its import. Compare Genesis 41:24; Judges 14:12; 1 Kings 10:3. That it was common for kings to call in the aid of interpreters to explain the import of dreams, appears from Herodotus. When Astyages ascended the throne, he had a daughter whose name was Mandane. She had a dream which seemed to him so remarkable that he called in the "magi," whose interpretation, Herodotus remarks, was of such a nature that it "terrified him exceedingly." He was so much influenced by the dream and the interpretation, that it produced an entire change in his determination respecting the marriage of his daughter. - Book i., 107: So again, after the marriage of his daughter, Herodotus says (book i., cviii.): "Astyages had another vision. A vine appeared to spring from his daughter which overspread all Asia. On this occasion, also, he consulted his interpreters; the result was, that he sent for his daughter from Persia, when the time of her delivery approached. On her arrival, he kept a strict watch over her, intending to destroy her child. The magi had declared the vision to intimate that the child of his daughter should supplant him on the throne." Astyages, to guard against this, as soon as Cyrus was born, sent for Harpagus, a person in whom he had confidence, and commanded him to take the child to his own house, and put him to death. These passages in Herodotus show that what is here related of the king of Babylon, demanding the aid of magicians and astrologers to interpret his dreams, was by no means an uncommon occurrence.

3

Daniel 2:3

開啟正文

王對他們說:我做了一夢,心裏煩亂,要知道這是甚麼夢——意思顯然是,他想知道關於這夢的一切;就是把那夢是甚麼清楚地追憶起來,並明白它的含義。他被這樣一個奇異的夢所激動;正如 Jerome 所言,他大概對那夢的內容仍存着模糊浮動的印象——正如我們對一個曾激盪心懷、卻無法追回其清晰完整形象的夢常有的那種印象——他想要把那夢清楚地追憶起來,並確切知道它的含義。見 Daniel 2:1。

英文原文

And the king said unto them, I have dreamed a dream, and my spirit was troubled to know the dream - That is, clearly, to know all about it; to recollect distinctly what it was, and to understand what it meant. He was agitated by so remarkable a dream; he probably had, as Jerome remarks, a shadowy and floating impression of what the dream was - such as we often have of a dream that has agitated out minds, but of which we cannot recal the distinct and full image; and he desired to recal that distinctly, and to know exactly what it meant. See Daniel 2:1.

4

Daniel 2:4

開啟正文

迦勒底人對王說——意思或是:迦勒底人因為是其中最顯要的,便代表占卜的和行法術的全體說話(見 Daniel 1:20; Daniel 2:2 的註釋);或是這名稱用來指占卜者的全體,意即這請求是他們全體提出的。

用亞蘭的言語——原文作 ארמית('ărâmı̂yt),即「亞蘭語」。希臘文作 Συριστὶ(Suristi),即「敘利亞語」;武加大譯本也是如此。敘利亞語譯本保留了原字。這個字的意思是亞蘭語,所指的就是稱為東亞蘭語的語言——一個涵蓋迦勒底語、敘利亞語以及美索不達米亞通行諸語的統稱。見 Daniel 1:4 的註釋。這是王和他臣民的日常用語,迦勒底人向王進言時自然會使用它。本書作者在此提到這一點,也許是要解釋他自己為何用這語言來講解那夢。然而這語言的使用並不限於記述術士所說的話,而是一直延續到第七章結束。比較導論第IV節 III。這裏所用的語言,就是通常所稱的迦勒底語。它以與希伯來文相同的文字寫成,其間的差異如同一種方言與另一種方言的差異。被擄中的猶太人無疑很懂得這語言,大概在歸回本國之後仍使用它。

願王萬歲——這是對君王說話時十分常見的說法。見 1 Samuel 10:24; 1 Kings 1:25(欄外註); Daniel 3:9; Daniel 5:10。這說法至今仍很流行,如「吾王萬歲」、「Vive l'empereur」、「Vive le roi」等語。它建基於這樣的觀念:長壽當視為福分,而祝人長壽,是我們表達善意的最好方式。在此,這不過是慣常的尊敬與臣服之辭,表明他們衷心願君王安康。他們願意作任何事來促進王的幸福,使他的生命和統治延續。他們使用這話尤其恰當,因為他們即將提出一個相當不尋常的請求,而這請求「可能」被視為不敬之舉——暗示王在要求他們解夢時既沒有告訴他們夢是甚麼,就沒有把他們本當公平獲得、用以解明此事的一切憑據給他們。

請將那夢告訴僕人,僕人就可以講解——他們就未來所作的主張,顯然只是能「解釋」那些被視為未來之徵兆的東西;並不是能召回已被遺忘的事,甚至也不是能「編造」出可視為未來先兆的東西。這實質上是古代一切占星家、占鳥者和占卜者所主張的。夢、飛鳥的行蹤、祭牲內臟的狀況、星辰的方位、流星以及天上的異象,都被認為是神明對未來之事的暗示;而那些自稱能占卜未來的人,其職事不過是解釋這些東西。因此,當王要求他們把那夢本身召回他的腦海時,這是要求一件他們的行業範圍之外的事,他們視之為不公。對那樣的能力,他們從未假裝擁有。若有人問:既然他們不過是騙子和冒充者,而王又已忘記自己實際所夢見的,他們為何不「編造」一些東西,就說「那」是他的夢?我們可以回答:

(1) 並無確實的證據表明,他們對自己聲稱能作的事並不真誠;因為我們不應假定一切自稱占卜者和占星家的人都是偽君子和故意的欺騙者。在世界的那個時期,藉着夢和星辰的方位等並不能知道未來,這一點尚未確定。夢確是未來得以顯明的途徑之一;而至於能否從星辰的方位等得知將來的事,在當時仍是懸而未決的問題。連 Lord Bacon 也主張,占星術這門學問不應被「棄絕」,而應被「改良」。

(2) 即使占星家們有意欺騙王,他們把自己杜撰的東西冒充為王的夢而得逞的可能性也微乎其微。我們也許無法清晰記起一個夢,但對它——對它的輪廓,或其中某些印象深刻卻互不連貫的情節——仍保有足夠的印象,足以知道它「不是」甚麼。若有人把它說出來,我們或許立刻就能認出;若有人想用一個杜撰的夢冒充我們的夢來欺騙我們,我們必立刻看出「那」並非我們所夢見的。

英文原文

Then spake the Chaldeans to the king - The meaning is, either that the Chaldeans spoke in the name of the entire company of the soothsayers and magicians (see the notes, Daniel 1:20; Daniel 2:2), because they were the most prominent among them, or the name is used to denote the collective body of soothsayers, meaning that this request was made by the entire company.

In Syriac - In the original - ארמית 'ărâmı̂yt - in "Aramean." Greek, Συριστὶ Suristi - "in Syriac." So the Vulgate. The Syriac retains the original word. The word means Aramean, and the reference is to that language which is known as East Aramean - a general term embracing the Chaldee, the Syriac, and the languages which were spoken in Mesopotamia. See the notes at Daniel 1:4. This was the vernacular tongue of the king and of his subjects, and was that in which the Chaldeans would naturally address him. It is referred to here by the author of this book, perhaps to explain the reason why he himself makes use of this language in explaining the dream. The use of this, however, is not confined to the statement of what the magicians said, but is continued to the close of the seventh chapter. Compare the Intro. Section IV. III. The language used is what is commonly called Chaldee. It is written in the same character as the Hebrew, and differs from that as one dialect differs from another. It was, doubtless, well understood by the Jews in their captivity, and was probably spoken by them after their return to their own land.

O king, live for ever - This is a form of speech quite common in addressing monarchs. See 1 Samuel 10:24; 1 Kings 1:25 (margin); Daniel 3:9; Daniel 5:10. The expression is prevalent still, as in the phrases, "Long live the king," "Vive l' empereur," "Vive le roi," etc. It is founded on the idea that long life is to be regarded as a blessing, and that we can in no way express our good wishes for anyone better than to wish him length of days. In this place, it was merely the usual expression of respect and homage, showing their earnest wish for the welfare of the monarch. They were willing to do anything to promote his happiness, and the continuance of his life and reign. It was especially proper for them to use this language, as they wore about to make a rather unusual request, which "might" be construed as an act of disrespect, implying that the king had not given them all the means which it was equitable for them to have in explaining the matter, by requiring them to interpret the dream when he had not told them what it was.

Tell thy servants the dream, and we will show the interpretation - The claim which they set up in regard to the future was evidently only that of "explaining" what were regarded as the prognostics of future events. It was not that of being able to recal what is forgotten, or even to "originate" what might be regarded preintimations of what is to happen. This was substantially the claim which was asserted by all the astrologers, augurs, and soothsayers of ancient times. Dreams, the flight of birds, the aspect of the entrails of animals slain for sacrifice, the positions of the stars, meteors, and uncommon appearances in the heavens, were supposed to be intimations made by the gods of what was to occur in future times, and the business of those who claimed the power of divining the future was merely to interpret these things. When the king, therefore, required that they should recal the dream itself to his own mind, it was a claim to something which was not involved in their profession, and which they regarded as unjust. To that power they made no pretensions. If it be asked why, as they were mere jugglers and pretenders, they did not "invent" something and state "that" as his dream, since he had forgotten what his dream actually was, we may reply,

(1) that there is no certain evidence that they were not sincere in what they professed themselves able to do - for we are not to suppose that all who claimed to be soothsayers and astrologers were hypocrites and intentional deceivers. It was not at that period of the world certainly determined that nothing could be ascertained respecting the future by dreams, and by the positions of the stars, etc. Dreams "were" among the methods by which the future was made known; and whether the knowledge of what is to come could be obtained from the positions of the stars, etc., was a question which was at that time unsettled Even Lord Bacon maintained that the science of astrology was not to be "rejected," but to be "reformed."

(2) If the astrologers had been disposed to attempt to deceive the king, there is no probability that they could have succeeded in palming an invention of their own on him as his own dream. We may not be able distinctly to recollect a dream, but we have a sufficient impression of it - of its outlines - or of some striking, though disconnected, things in it, to know what it is "not." We might instantly recognize it if stated to us; we should see at once, if anyone should attempt to deceive us by palming an invented dream on us, that "that" was not what we had dreamed.

5

Daniel 2:5

開啟正文

王回答迦勒底人說:夢我已經忘了——武加大譯本作「Sermo recessit a me」,即「這話已離我而去」。希臘文譯本亦同:Ὁ λόγος ἀπ ̓ ἐμοῦ ἀπέστη(Ho logos ap' emou apestē)。Luther 作「Es ist mir entfallen」,即「它已從我失落」,或說已離我而去。Coverdale 作「它已離我而去」。譯作「夢」的迦勒底文 מלתה(mı̂llethâh),本義為「話、言論、講論」——即某種「被說出來的」東西;其後如 דבר(dâbâr)與希臘文的 ῥῆμα(rēma)一樣,指一件「事情」。此處所指,是當前所論的事項,即那夢與其講解。合理的解釋是:王已忘記了那夢;即使他對它還存留「任何」記憶,也只不過是足以令他驚恐的不完整輪廓。譯作「已經忘了」的 אזדא('azeddâ'),僅見於此處與 Daniel 2:8,一般認為與意為「去、離開」的 אזל('ăzal)同義。Gesenius 將整句譯為「這話已從我而出;即我所說的已經確立,無法收回」;Bush 教授(in loc.)力主這才是正確的解釋,John D. Michaelis 與 Dathe 也偏好這一解釋。Aben Ezra、C. B. Michaelis、Winer、Hengstenberg 與 Stuart 教授則採納略為相近的句法,認為其意為「我的諭令是堅定的、穩固的」;即他們若不提供那夢的講解,就必被剪除。這樣,何為正確解釋的問題,便繫於兩種句法之間:或是如我們的譯本所言,那夢已離他而去——即他已忘記了它;或是一道諭令或命令已從他發出,即他們若不能講解那夢,便必被除滅。在我看來,前者顯然才是正確的解釋。

(1)這是自然的句法,與原文字義最為吻合。מלה(millâh)一詞與 דבר(dâbâr)及 ῥῆμα(rēma)同樣用以指「事情」,而迦勒底文動詞 אזד('ăzad)自然而固有的意義是「去、離開」,這是無人可以懷疑的。比較希伯來文(אזל 'âzal):Deuteronomy 32:36,「他見他們的能力已然消逝」;1 Samuel 9:7,「我們囊中的食物都吃盡了」;Job 14:11,「海中的水絕盡」;以及迦勒底文(אזל 'âzal):Ezra 4:23,「他們就急忙往耶路撒冷去」;Ezra 5:8,「我們往猶大省去」;並比較 Daniel 2:17、Daniel 2:24;Daniel 6:18 (19), 19(20)。

(2)這一解釋得到耶柔米(Jerome)的武加大譯本和希臘文譯本的支持。

(3)當時並未見有這樣的命令從王那裏發出,直到他們來到王面前,王才頒布這樣的諭令。即使如 Gesenius 與 Zickler(Chaldaismus Dan. Proph.)所主張,這字是陰性現在分詞而非過去式動詞,它照樣可以指那「夢」離他而去,一如指那命令或諭令。我們可以設想王這樣說:「這件事正離我而去,我無法再把它召回。」

(4)術士們也是這樣理解的,而王並未試圖糾正他們對他意思的領會。因此,在 Daniel 2:7,他們說:「請王將夢告訴僕人,僕人就可以講解。」這表明他們明白那夢已離王而去,而且在未獲告知那夢是甚麼之前,他們不能被期望去講解其含義。

(5)並不需要假設王自己仍記得那夢,只是想試探他們;也就是說,並不需要假設他為了考驗他們的能力而說了蓄意的謊言。尼布甲尼撒是殘酷而嚴苛的君主,這樣的事與他的品格未必不符;但我們不應無謂地把殘忍和暴虐加在任何人身上,除非證據清楚得無法迴避,否則不應如此。況且,提出這樣的試探,是極不可能的事。那既無需要,也違背當時人在這類事上根深蒂固的信念。這些人受聘於宮廷,其目的之一正是解說未來的徵兆。他們是受信任的;他們之所以留任,正「因為」受到信任。並沒有跡象顯示巴比倫君主曾有任何理由懷疑他們自詡的能力;那麼,他為何在「這一次」竟決意使他們受這樣不尋常、而且顯然不公正的試驗呢?

基於這些理由,在我看來顯然:我們通行的譯本已給出這段經文的正確含義,其意是:那夢確實已從他那裏遠去,以致他無法複述;然而他對其凶兆性質和駭人輪廓所存的印象,仍足以使他的心中充滿驚恐。至於 Bertholdt 從這段經文的這一觀點引出、針對本章真實性的異議——即任何人都不致無理到因別人無法憶起他的夢而定他們的死罪,因為恢復夢境本不屬於他們的職分(Commentary i. p. 192)——可以回應說:尼布甲尼撒的品格,正使但以理在此所述之事絕非不可信。關於他,2 Kings 25:7 記着說:「在西底家眼前殺了他的眾子,並且剜了西底家的眼睛,用銅鍊鎖着他,帶到巴比倫去。」比較 2 Kings 25:18-21;Jeremiah 39:5及以下;Jeremiah 52:9-11。亦見 Daniel 4:17,他在那裏被稱為「極卑微的人」。比較 Hengstenberg, "Die Authentie des Daniel," pp. 79-81。關於這異議,見本章導論第 I 部 I。

你們若不將夢和夢的講解告訴我——無論對王是否真的忘記了那夢這問題有何看法,毫無疑問,他要求他們說出那夢是甚麼,然後加以講解。這要求大概既不尋常,在某種意義上也不合理,因為它本不屬於他們的職分。然而就另一意義而言,它並非不合理:倘若他們真的與諸神相通,並有資格解說未來的事,那麼可以設想他們也能恢復這已被遺忘的夢。諸神若賜他們能力解說將「來」的事,也同樣能輕易賜他們能力憶起「過去」的事。

就必被凌遲——欄外註作「作成」。迦勒底文的意思是「你們必被作成碎片」;這是指許多古代民族通行的一種刑罰方式。比較 1 Samuel 15:33:「撒母耳在吉甲、在耶和華面前將亞甲砍碎。」據傳 Orpheus 被色雷斯的婦女撕成碎片;Bessus 也奉亞歷山大大帝之命被切成碎塊。

你們的房屋必成為糞堆——比較 2 Kings 10:27。這說法表明:他們的房屋不再作優雅舒適的宅第,而被用於最卑賤的用途,遭受各樣的羞辱與玷污。這裏的用語與東方人常用的說法一致。他們對所憎惡的對象咒以各樣的侮辱和可憎之事,用穢物塗抹他們所輕蔑或憎惡的對象,也不罕見。因此,哈里發奧瑪爾率撒拉森軍隊攻取耶路撒冷、蹂躪該城大部分之後,為表明全體穆斯林的憎惡,並表示此地從此被視為萬物的渣滓和污穢,他命人把糞便鋪在聖所的遺址上。——Bush 教授。希臘文譯本作「你們的房屋必被搶掠」;武加大譯本作「你們的房屋必被充公」。但這些譯法全屬任意。這裏所威脅的刑罰看來嚴厲,或許有人會傾向於說:一位君主竟容許自己使用這樣激烈的言辭、發出這樣嚴酷的威嚇,是不大可能的,尤其當術士們尚未顯出無力講解那夢,也沒有給出任何令人擔憂他們無法做到的理由之時。但我們當記得:

(1)王殘酷而專斷的品格(見上文所引的參考經文);

(2)東方專制政體的性質——君主慣於憑死亡刑罰要求一切命令都得遵行、一切意願都得即時滿足;

(3)他的心因那夢而大為激動的事實;以及

(4)他確信那夢預示了某種關乎他國度的凶兆,因此這是一個必須用盡一切威嚇之力、用盡一切豐厚賞賜之望的情況,好促使他們竭盡所能,並平息他心中的騷亂。

英文原文

The king answered and said to the Chaldeans, The thing is gone from me - The Vulgate renders this, "Sermo recessit a me" - "The word is departed from me." So the Greek, Ὁ λόγος ἀπ ̓ ἐμοῦ ἀπέστη Ho logos ap' emou apestē. Luther, "Es ist mir entfallen" - "It has fallen away from me," or has departed from me. Coverdale, "It is gone from me." The Chaldee word rendered "the thing" - מלתה mı̂llethâh - means, properly, "a word, saying, discourse" - something which is "spoken;" then, like דבר dâbâr and the Greek ῥῆμα rēma, a "thing." The reference here is to the matter under consideration, to wit, the dream and its meaning. The fair interpretation is, that he had forgotten the dream, and that if he retained "any" recollection of it, it was only such an imperfect outline as to alarm him. The word rendered "is gone" - אזדא 'azeddâ' - which occurs only here and in Daniel 2:8, is supposed to be the same as אזל 'ăzal - "to go away, to depart." Gesenius renders the whole phrase, "The word has gone out from me; i. e., what I have said is ratified, and cannot be recalled;" and Prof. Bush (in loc.) contends that this is the true interpretation, and this also is the interpretation preferred by John D. Michaelis, and Dathe. A construction somewhat similar is adopted by Aben Ezra, C. B. Michaelis, Winer, Hengstenberg, and Prof. Stuart, that it means, "My decree is firm, or steadfast;" to wit, that if they did not furnish an interpretation of the dream, they should be cut off. The question as to the true interpretation, then, is between two constructions: whether it means, as in our version, that the dream had departed from him - that is, that he had forgotten it - or, that a decree or command had gone from him, that if they could not interpret the dream they should be destroyed. That the former is the correct interpretation seems to me to be evident.

(1) It is the natural construction, and accords best with the meaning of the original words. Thus no one can doubt that the word מלה millâh, and the words דבר dâbâr and ῥῆμα rēma, are used in the sense of "thing," and that the natural and proper meaning of the Chaldee verb אזד 'ăzad is, to "go away, depart." Compare the Hebrew (אזל 'âzal) in Deuteronomy 32:36, "He seeth that their power is gone;" 1 Samuel 9:7, "The bread is spent in our vessels;" Job 14:11, "The waters fail from the sea;" and the Chaldee (אזל 'ăzal) in Ezra 4:23, "They went up in haste to Jerusalem;" Ezra 5:8, "We went into the province of Judea;" and Daniel 2:17, Daniel 2:24; Daniel 6:18 (19), 19(20).

(2) This interpretation is sustained by the Vulgate of Jerome, and by the Greek.

(3) It does not appear that any such command had at that time gone forth from the king, and it was only when they came before him that he promulgated such an order. Even though the word, as Gesenins and Zickler (Chaldaismus Dan. Proph.) maintain, is a feminine participle present, instead of a verb in the preterit, still it would then as well apply to the "dream" departing from him, as the command or edict. We may suppose the king to say, "The thing leaves me; I cannot recal it."

(4) It was so understood by the magicians, and the king did not attempt to correct their apprehension of what he meant. Thus, in Daniel 2:7, they say, "Let the king tell his servants the dream, and we will show the interpretation thereof." This shows that they understood that the dream had gone from him, and that they could not be expected to interpret its meaning until they were apprised what it was.

(5) It is not necessary to suppose that the king retained the memory of the dream himself, and that he meant merely to try them; that is, that he told them a deliberate falsehood, in order to put their ability to the test. Nebuchadnezzar was a cruel and severe monarch, and such a thing would not have been entirely inconsistent with his character; but we should not needlessly charge cruelty and tyranny on any man, nor should we do it unless the evidence is so clear that we cannot avoid it. Besides, that such a test should be proposed is in the highest degree improbable. There was no need of it; and it was contrary to the established belief in such matters. These men were retained at court, among other reasons, for the very purpose of explaining the prognostics of the future. There was confidence in them; and they were retained "because" there was confidence in them. It does not appear that the Babylonian monarch had had any reason to distrust their ability as to what they professed; and why should he, therefore, on "this" occasion resolve to put them to so unusual, and obviously so unjust a trial?

For these reasons, it seems clear to me that our common version has given the correct sense of this passage, and that the meaning is, that the dream had actually so far departed from him that he could not repeat it, though he retained such an impression of its portentous nature, and of its appalling outline, as to fill his mind with alarm. As to the objection derived from this view of the passage by Bertholdt to the authenticity of this chapter, that it is wholly improbable that any man would be so unreasonable as to doom others to punishment because they could not recal his dream, since it entered not into their profession to be able to do it (Commentary i. p. 192), it may be remarked, that the character of Nebuchadnezzar was such as to make what is stated here by Daniel by no means improbable. Thus it is said respecting him 2 Kings 25:7, "And they slew the sons of Zedekiah 'before his eyes,' and put out the eyes of Zedekiah, and bound him with fetters of brass, and carried him to Babylon." Compare 2 Kings 25:18-21; Jeremiah 39:5, following; Jeremiah 52:9-11. See also Daniel 4:17, where he is called "the basest of men." Compare Hengstenberg, "Die Authentie des Daniel," pp. 79-81. On this objection, see Introduction to the chapter, Section I.I.

If ye will not make known, unto me the dream, with the interpretation thereof - Whatever may be thought as to the question whether he had actually forgotten the dream, there can be no doubt that he demanded that they should state what it was, and then explain it. This demand was probably as unusual as it was in one sense unreasonable, since it did not fall fairly within their profession. Yet it was not unreasonable in this sense, that if they really had communication with the gods, and were qualified to explain future events, it might be supposed that they would be enabled to recal this forgotten dream. If the gods gave them power to explain what was to "come," they could as easily enable them to recal "the past."

Ye shall be cut in pieces - Margin, "made." The Chaldee is, "Ye shall be made into pieces; "referring to a mode of punishment that was common to many ancient nations. Compare 1 Samuel 15:33 : "And Samuel hewed Agag in pieces before the Lord in Gilgal." Thus Orpheus is said to have been torn in pieces by the Thracian women; and Bessus was cut in pieces by order of Alexander the Great.

And your houses shall be made a dunghill - Compare 2 Kings 10:27. This is an expression denoting that their houses, instead of being elegant or comfortable mansions, should be devoted to the vilest of uses, and subjected to all kinds of dishonor and defilement. The language here used is in accordance with what is commonly employed by Orientals. They imprecate all sorts of indignities and abominations on the objects of their dislike, and it is not uncommon for them to smear over with filth what is the object of their contempt or abhorrenee. Thus when the caliph Omar took Jerusalem, at the head of the Saracen army, after ravaging the greater part of the city, he caused dung to be spread over the site of the sanctuary, in token of the abhorrence of all Mussulmans, and of its being henceforth regarded as the refuse and offscouring of all things. - Prof. Bush. The Greek renders this, "And your houses shall be plundered;" the Vulgate, "And your houses shall be confiscated." But these renderings are entirely arbitrary. This may seem to be a harsh punishment which was threatened, and some may, perhaps, be disposed to say that it is improbable that a monarch would allow himself to use such intemperate language, and to make use of so severe a threatening, especially when the magicians had as yet shown no inability to interpret the dream, and had given no reasons to apprehend that they would be unable to do it. But we are to remember

(1) the cruel and arbitrary character of the king (see the references above);

(2) the nature of an Oriental despotism, in which a monarch is acccustomed to require all his commands to be obeyed, and his wishes gratified promptly, on pain of death;

(3) the fact that his mind was greatly excited by the dream; and

(4) that he was certain that something portentous to his kingdom had been prefigured by the dream, and that this was a case in which all the force of threatening, and all the prospect of splendid reward, should be used, that they might be induced to tax their powers to the utmost, and allay the tumults of his mind.

6

Daniel 2:6

開啟正文

但你們若將夢告訴我——即如果你們說出那夢是甚麼。

並夢的講解——它有甚麼含義。也就是說,他們要如此陳述那夢,使尼布甲尼撒能認出它來;又要作出如此的講解,使王的心承認它是真實的。在最後這一點上,他無疑大倚靠他們履行這職務時所表現的智慧;但同樣清楚的是,那講解也必須被視為「恰當的」講解,或從夢中能「正當地」推出的講解。因此,當但以理說明那講解時,王立刻看出它與夢的一切細節吻合,承認它是正確的。照樣,當但以理向伯沙撒解釋牆上的文字時,王也承認其公正,並以尊榮加給他(Daniel 5:29)。又如何當約瑟解釋法老的夢時,法老立即看出那解釋的貼切,承認它是正確的(Genesis 41:39-45);照樣,在上面提到的(Daniel 2:2 的註釋)阿斯提阿格斯(Astyages)論其女兒之夢的事上(Herod. 1, cvii.; cviii.),他也立即看出瑪格斯(Magi)術士所提的夢之講解與夢相符,便相應採取了措施。

就必從我這裏得贈品和賞賜,並大尊榮——意在訴諸他們最高的盼望,好盡可能引導他們說出夢的含義。他沒有指明具體的賞賜,只作一般的應許;其明顯的意思是:在那種情形下,他必賜下像他那樣的君主所當賜的。這種情形下慣常的賞賜足以激勵人竭盡全力,這從他在但以理說出那夢時所賜的尊榮(Daniel 2:48),以及伯沙撒因但以理講解牆上文字而賜給他的賞賜(Daniel 5:29),可以得見:「伯沙撒下令,人就把紫袍給但以理穿上,把金鍊給他戴在頸項上,又傳令使他在國中位列第三。」比較 Esther 5:11; Esther 6:7-9。

英文原文

But if ye show the dream - If you show what the dream was.

And the interpretation thereof - What it signifies. That is, they were so to state the dream that Nebuchadnezzar would recognize it; and they were to give such an explanation of it as would commend itself to his mind as the true one. On this last point he would doubtless rely much on their supposed wisdom in performing this duty, but it would seem clear, also, that it was necessary that the interpretation should be seen to be a "fair" interpretation, or such as would be "fairly" implied in the dream. Thus, when Daniel made known the interpretation, he saw at once that it met all the features of the dream, and he admitted it to be correct. So also when Daniel explained the handwriting on the wall to Belshazzar, he admitted the justness of it, and loaded him with honors, Daniel 5:29. So when Joseph explained the dreams of Pharaoh, he at once saw the appropriateness of the explanation, and admitted it to be correct Genesis 41:39-45; and so in the case above referred to (notes on Daniel 2:2), of Astyages respecting the dreams of his daughter (Herod. 1, cvii.; cviii.), he at once saw that the interpretation of the dreams proposed by the Magi accorded with the dreams, and took his measures accordingly.

Ye shall receive of me gifts, and rewards, and great honor - Intending to appeal to their highest hopes to induce them, if possible, to disclose the meaning of the dream. He specifics no particular rewards, but makes the promise general; and the evident meaning is, that, in such a case, he would bestow what it became a monarch like him to give. That the usual rewards in such a case were such as were adapted to stimulate to the most vigorous exertions of their powers, may be seen from the honor which he conferred on Daniel when he made known the dream Daniel 2:48, and from the rewards which Belshazzar conferred on Daniel for making known the interpretation of the writing on the wall Daniel 5:29 : "Then commanded Belshazzar, and they clothed Daniel with scarlet, and put a chain of gold about his neck, and made a proclamation concerning him, that he should be the third ruler in the kingdom." Compare Esther 5:11; Esther 6:7-9.

7

Daniel 2:7

開啟正文

他們第二次對王說:「請王將夢告訴僕人,僕人就可以講解。」——無論在甚麼情況下,這都絕不是一個不合理的請求,在他們的處境中尤其如此。顯然,他們並沒有自詡能召回一個已被遺忘的夢;他們在這事上所能自詡的範圍,看來只在於能夠「講解」那些通常被視為未來事件之徵兆的事物。

英文原文

They answered again, and said, Let the king tell his servants the dream, and we will show the interpretation of it - Certainly not an unreasonable request, in any circumstances, and especially in theirs. They did not profess, evidently, to be able to recal a dream that was forgotten, but the extent of their profession on this subject appears to have been, that they were able to "explain" what was commonly regarded as a prognostic of a future event.

8

Daniel 2:8

開啟正文

王回答說:「我准知道你們是故意遲延」——欄外註作「購取」(buy)。迦勒底詞 זבנין(zâbenı̂yn,出自 זבן zeban)意為為自己取得、買、獲得、置辦。希臘文作 ἐξαγοράζετε(exagorazete)——即「你們救贖時間」;武加大譯本 quod tempus redimitis 亦同。其意是:他們看出無法遵行王的要求,而他們請王說出那夢(Daniel 2:7),不過是拖延的藉口,指望其間或能想出甚麼法子安撫王,或避開他所威嚇的忿怒。我們自然可以設想,他們或許盼望王經過反思會較為平靜,而且,即使他們「可能」無法追回那夢並加以講解,人們也會看出,期待或強求這事原是不合理的。王似乎料到他們心中有這類念頭,便指控他們懷有這樣的圖謀。王的論證大概如下:「能正確講解夢的人,既能說出夢的講解,也同樣能說出夢本身是甚麼,因為這一件與那一件同樣都是神默示的結果;人若在一件事上可望得神的幫助,在另一件事上為何不能?所以,你們既不能追回那夢,顯然也不能講解它;你們要求知道它,唯一的目的便是要盡量推延所威嚇之刑罰的執行,並在可能時完全逃脫。」他們所說的話,很可能多於 Daniel 2:7 所記的那簡單請求。他們自然會加以發揮,設法表明王在這事上的要求何等無理;而他們的論證,也正好給了王在此指控他們的口實。

因為你們知道那夢我已經忘了——按 Daniel 2:5 所提出的解釋,「那夢」即指「夢」。其意是:「你們知道我已忘了它。這一點我已明言斷定。因此,再無希望把它追回;你們唯一的目的必是要爭取時間。遷延毫無所得,這事便可以立時定奪,你們的行為可被視為承認自己不能履行所求,刑罰也可以毫不遲延地執行。」據我看來,這樣的理解,比設想他的意思是「一道判決已從他發出——他們若不能追回並講解那夢,就必被處死」更為通順。

英文原文

The king answered and said, I know of certainty that ye would gain the time - Margin, "buy." The Chaldee word זבנין zâbenı̂yn (from זבן zeban) means, to get for oneself, buy, gain, procure. Greek, ἐξαγοράζετε exagorazete - "that ye redeem time;" and so the Vulgate - quod tempus redimitis. The idea is, that they saw that they could not comply with his requisition, and that their asking him Daniel 2:7 to state the dream was only a pretext for delay, in the hope that in the interval some device might be hit on by them to appease him, or to avert his threatened indignation. It would be natural to suppose that they might hope that on reflection he would become more calm, and that, although they "might" not be able to recal the dream and explain it, yet it would be seen to be unreasonable to expect or demand it. The king seems to have supposed that some such thoughts were passing through their minds, and he charges on them such a project. The argument of the king seems to have been something like this: "They who can explain a dream correctly can as well tell what it is as what its interpretation is, for the one is as much the result of Divine influence as the other; and if men can hope for Divine help in the one case, why not in the other? As you cannot, therefore, recal the dream, it is plain that you cannot interpret it; and your only object in demanding to know it is, that you may ward off as long as possible the execution of the threatened sentence, and, if practicable, escape it altogether." It is not improbable that what they said was more than the simple request recorded in Daniel 2:7. They would naturally enlarge on it, by attempting to show how unreasonable was the demand of the king in the case, and their arguments would give a fair pretext for what he here charges on them.

Because ye see the thing is gone from me - According to the interpretation proposed in Daniel 2:5, the "dream." The meaning is, "You see that I have forgotten it. I have made a positive statement on that point. There can be no hope, therefore, that it can be recalled, and it is clear that your only object must be to gain time. Nothing can be gained by delay, and the matter may therefore be determined at once, and your conduct be construed as a confession that you cannot perform what is required, and the sentence proceed without delay." This makes better sense, it seems to me, than to suppose that he means that a sentence had gone forth from him that if they could not recal and interpret it they should be put to death.

9

Daniel 2:9

開啟正文

你們若不將夢告訴我,只有一法待你們——意即:你們必同受一樣的命運。你們都要被凌遲,你們的房屋必成為糞堆(Daniel 2:5)。你們中間無論哪一等的人、哪一個人,都不會蒙恩寬待。看來當時的想法是:責任不僅落在全體身上,也落在各人身上;把他們每一個人都視為有義務解明這事,乃是合理的。既然義務上不承認有差別,罪責上也就沒有差別。然而應當說明,這裏存在解釋上的分歧。Gesenius 和另一些學者把譯作「法」的詞——דת dâth——譯作「謀略、計劃、目的」,認為經文的意思是「這才是你們唯一的謀略或計劃」,即編造謊言、爭取時間。Stuart 教授便把這節譯作:「你們若不將夢告訴我,你們的目的只有一個:你們已經商定,要趁時勢改變以前,在我面前說虛謊欺詐的話。所以要把夢告訴我,這樣我便知道你們能將夢的講解告訴我。」然而原文本詞最常用於法律或法令的意義。見 Deuteronomy 33:2;Esther 1:8, 1:13, 1:15, 1:19;Esther 2:8;Esther 3:8, 3:14-15;Esther 4:3, 4:8, 4:11, 4:16;Esther 8:13-14, 8:17;Esther 9:1, 9:13-14;似乎沒有必要偏離通行的譯法。這譯法所含的意思與事實相符,也與希臘文、拉丁文和敘利亞文譯本一致。

因為你們預備了謊言亂語向我說——意即:「你們在要求我把夢說出來這件事上(Daniel 2:4、Daniel 2:7),並在要求把夢告訴你們、好叫你們可以講解它的這件事上,已經這樣行了。我要從你們無法回想那夢這一點,知道你們一直扮演着虛謊欺詐的角色,知道你們的一切主張都是假的。這樣,你們要我說出夢來的願望,就必顯明不過是託辭,是拖延的詭計,好叫你們延擱刑罰的執行,指望得以全然脫身。」

要等候時勢改變——意即等到新的局面出現:或是王的意向改變、怒氣平息,或是政權更迭。王心中這樣想是很自然的,因為事情既已拖延,他們的處境不可能更「壞」,卻有可能變「好」——因為任何變化都可能於他們有利。雙方之間似乎並沒有多大信任或感情。王懷疑他們受不良動機支配,而他們也確實沒有強烈的理由依戀王。可比較 Daniel 2:21 與 Daniel 7:25 的註釋。

英文原文

But if ye will not make known unto me the dream, there is but one decree for you - That is, you shall share the same fate. You shall all be cut to pieces, and your houses reduced to ruin, Daniel 2:5. There shall be no favor shown to any class of you, or to any individual among you. It seems to have been supposed that the responsibility rested on them individually as well as collectively, and that it would be right to hold each and every one of them bound to explain the matter. As no difference of obligation was recognized, there would be no difference of criminality. It should be said, however, that there is a difference of interpretation here. Gesenius, and some others, render the word translated "decree" - דת dâth - "counsel, plan, purpose," and suppose that it means, "this only is your counsel, or plan;" that is, to prepare lying words, and to gain time. So Prof. Stuart renders the verse, "If ye will not make known to me the dream, one thing is your purpose, both a false and deceitful word have ye agreed to utter before me, until the time shall have changed; therefore tell me the dream, and then I shall know that you can show me the interpretation thereof." The original word, however, is most commonly used in the sense of law or decree. See Deuteronomy 33:2; Esther 1:8, Esther 1:13, Esther 1:15, Esther 1:19; Esther 2:8; Esther 3:8, Esther 3:14-15; Esther 4:3, Esther 4:8, Esther 4:11, Esther 4:16; Esther 8:13-14, Esther 8:17; Esther 9:1, Esther 9:13-14; and there seems to be no necessity for departing from the common translation. It contains a sense according to the truth in the case, and is in accordance with the Greek, Latin, and Syriac versions.

For ye have prepared lying and corrupt words to speak before me - That is, "You have done this in asking me to state the dream Daniel 2:4, Daniel 2:7, and in the demand that the dream should be made known to you, in order that you may interpret it. I shall know by your inability to recal the dream that you have been acting a false and deceitful part, and that your pretensions were all false. Your wish, therefore, to have me state the dream will be shown to be a mere pretence, an artifice for delay, that you might put off the execution of the sentence with the hope of escaping altogether."

Till the time be changed - That is, until a new state of things shall occur; either until his purpose might change, and his anger should subside or until there should be a change of government: It was natural for such thoughts to pass through the mind of the king, since, as matters could be no "worse" for them if the subject was delayed, there was a possibility that they might be "better" - for any change would be likely to be an advantage. There does not appear to have been any great confidence or affection on either side. The king suspected that they were influenced by bad motives, and they certainly had no strong reasons for attachment to him. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:21, and Daniel 7:25.

10

Daniel 2:10

開啟正文

迦勒底人在王面前回答說——也許「迦勒底人」之所以出面回答,是因為他們最受恩寵,在這類事上通常也最受人信賴。見 Daniel 2:2 的註釋。在這樣的場合,那些被認為「若有人能解這夢、就非他們莫屬」、平日又最受倚重的人,多半會被推到前面,由他們宣告自己無力承擔這事。

世上沒有人能將王所問的事說出來——迦勒底文作 על־יבשׁתא(ʿal-yabeshethâʾ),意即「在乾地上」。可比較 Genesis 1:10。這話的意思是:這事完全超出人的能力範圍。凡行占卜之術的人,從沒有人聲稱自己能做到這一步。他們無疑認為,世上所能產生最精通此術的名家,都已薈萃於巴比倫宮廷聚集的智慧人之中;倘若連他們也失敗了,便可推斷其餘所有的人也必失敗。因此,這乃是他們對此事無能為力的一次斷然承認;不過,他們仍想減輕這屈辱性認罪的衝擊,或許還想安撫王的怒氣,於是斷言這事全然出於人的能力之外,誰也不能指望做成王所要求的這事。

因為沒有君王、大臣、掌權的向術士,或用法術的,或迦勒底人問過這樣的事——意即:從來沒有人提出過類似的要求。事情如此明顯,人無力作這樣的啟示又如此確鑿,以致任何位分的君王都從未發出過這樣的請求。他們無疑是想使王確信這要求太不合理,不必堅持。他們態度急切,因為性命繫於此,並且自認公義站在自己一邊。

英文原文

The Chaldeans answered before the king, and said - Perhaps the "Chaldeans" answered because they were the highest in favor, and were those in whom most confidence was usually reposed in such matters. See the notes at Daniel 2:2. On such an occasion, those would be likely to be put forward to announce their inability to do this who would be supposed to be able to interpret the dream, if any could, and on whom most reliance was usually placed.

There is not a man upon the earth that can show the king's matter - Chaldee, על־יבשׁתא ‛al-yabeshethâ' - "upon the dry ground." Compare Genesis 1:10. The meaning is, that the thing was utterly beyond the power of man. It was what none who practiced the arts of divining laid claim to. They doubtless supposed that as great proficients in that art as the world could produce might be found among the wise men assembled at the court of Babylon, and if they failed, they inferred that all others would fail. This was, therefore, a decided confession of their inability in the matter; but they meant to break the force of that mortifying confession, and perhaps to appease the wrath of the king, by affirming that the thing was wholly beyond the human powers, and that no one could be expected to do what was demanded.

Therefore" there is "no king, lord, nor ruler, that asked such things - No one has ever made a similar demand. The matter is so clear, the incompetency of man to make such a disclosure is so manifest, that no potentate of any rank ever made such a request. They designed, undoubtedly, to convince the king that the request was so unreasonable that he would not insist on it. They were urgent, for their life depended on it, and they apprehended that they had justice on their side.

11

Daniel 2:11

開啟正文

王所問的事甚難——迦勒底文作 יקירה(yaqqı̂yrâh),意為「精選的、貴重的、昂貴的」,繼而指「沉重、艱難、困難」。希臘文作 βαρύς(barus)。武加大譯本作「gravis」——沉重、重大。其觀念不是說王所要求的事「罕見」或「很少被提出」——雖然那也屬實——而是說它艱難到超出人的能力。在這樣的場合,他們大概不會說這要求絕對不公或無理。他們所用的措辭帶着敬意,同時卻暗示:照王所提出的方式,沒有人能指望解開這問題。

除了不與世人同居的神明,沒有人在王面前能說出來——這顯然是真的:這樣的事若非有神的幫助,就無法揭示。由此看來,這些人似乎並不聲稱自己受了靈感,或與諸神有交通;至少,他們並不聲稱受至高神的靈感,而是倚靠自己天生的敏識、對預表未來事件之種種現象長期細心的研究,或許還倚靠他們因當時所理解的學問而得的祕術。這裏的「神明」一詞——אלהין(ʾĕlâhı̂yn),與希伯來文 אלהים(ʾĕlohı̂ym)相同——是複數形式,但可以指真神,正如希伯來文的 אלהים 常常那樣。我們決不能肯定他們是有意用複數,也不能肯定他們是在說一項公認的真理,即巴比倫所敬拜的神明並不與人同住。

無疑,當時流行的意見是:諸神確實與人同住;聖殿是他們的居所;他們常常在人中間顯現,並參與人間的事務。但也有一個很早便存在的觀念:至高的神已退出人間事務,把世界的治理交給居間的存有(internuncii)——鬼魔或愛安(aeons):就是能力遠超世人、且不斷摻與人間事務的存有。然而他們的能力雖大,卻是有限的。那麼,迦勒底人在這裏用 אלהין(ʾĕlâhı̂yn)一詞,會不會正是指至高的神,意在說明這事唯獨屬於祂;任何次等的神明都無能力作王所要求的這樣一件事;而至高的神既不住在人中間,試圖解明這事便毫無指望?這樣理解,結果就傳達一個更高的真理,也更動人心魄地顯明加於但以理的尊榮。「不與世人同居」這短語,意思是「不與人同住——即在人的肉身之中」。

若假定這話是指至高的神,這無疑符合當時流行的見解:無論次等的神明何等頻繁地向人顯現、取人的形狀,至高的神卻是遙遠的,決不以這種方式在地上安居。因此,他們無從指望從那位唯一能解開這樣奧祕者得到任何啟示。所以,這話可以視為他們對所論問題全然失敗的坦白承認。他們承認「他們」自己無力解答這問題,又表明作成這事的能力不能從次等神明給人的幫助獲得,而指望那遠離人間事務的至高神介入,也是徒然的。這是公開承認他們的技藝在一場極重要的試驗中失敗了;如此便鋪好了路,要顯明但以理在真神的教導之下,能作成完全超出人類一切能力的事。

試驗已公平地作過了。迦勒底國中最有智慧的人都已被徵詢。那些在這類急難時被倚仗的人;那些自稱能解明未來事件徵兆的人;那些聚集在世上最宏偉重要的宮廷——異教權勢的正中心——的人;那些畢生獻身於這類探究、而且若地上有人能作、就當算他們能作的人——如今都公開承認他們的技藝失效,並表明這事全無指望。

英文原文

And it is a rare thing that the king requireth - Chaldee, יקירה yaqqı̂yrâh - meaning, "choice, valuable, costly;" then, "heavy, hard, difficult." Greek, βαρύς barus. Vulgate, "gravis - heavy, weighty." The idea is not so much that the thing demanded by the king was "uncommon" or "rarely made" - though that was true, as that it was so difficult as to be beyond the human powers. They would not have been likely on such an occasion to say that the requirement was absolutely unjust or unreasonable. The term which they used was respectful, and yet it implied that no man could have any hope of solving the question as it was proposed by him.

And there is none other that can show it before the king except the gods, whose dwelling is not with flesh - This was clearly true, that a matter of that kind could not be disclosed except by Divine assistance. It would seem from this that these persons did not claim to be inspired, or to have communication with the gods; or, at least, that they did not claim to be inspired by the Supreme God, but that they relied on their own natural sagacity, and their careful and long study of the meaning of those occurrences which prefigured future events, and perhaps on the mystic arts derived from their acquaintance with science as then understood. The word "gods" here - אלהין 'ĕlâhı̂yn, the same as the Hebrew אלהים 'ĕlohı̂ym - is in the plural number, but might be applied to the true God, as the Hebrew אלהים 'ĕlohı̂ym often is. It is by no means certain that they meant to use this in the plural, or to say that it was an admitted truth that the gods worshipped in Babylon did not dwell with people.

It was, undoubtedly, the common opinion that they did; that the temples were their abode; and that they frequently appeared among men, and took part in human affairs. But it was a very early opinion that the Supreme God was withdrawn from human affairs, and had committed the government of the world to intermediate beings - internuncii - demons, or aeons: beings of power far superior to that of men, who constantly mingled in human affairs. Their power, however, though great, was limited; and may not the Chaldeans here by the word אלהין 'ĕlâhı̂yn - have meant to refer to the Supreme God, and to say that this was a case which pertained to him alone; that no inferior divinity could be competent to do such a thing as he demanded; and that as the Supreme God did not dwell among men it was hopeless to attempt to explain the matter? Thus understood, the result will convey a higher truth, and will show more impressively the honor put on Daniel. The phrase, "whose dwelling is not with flesh," means "with men - in human bodies."

On the supposition that this refers to the Supreme God, this undoubtedty accords with the prevailing sentiment of those times, that however often the inferior divinities might appear to men, and assume human forms, yet the Supreme God was far removed, and never thus took up his abode on the earth. They could hope, therefore, for no communication from Him who alone would be competent to the solution, of such a secret as this. This may be regarded, therefore, as a frank confession of their entire failure in the matter under consideration. They acknowledged that "they" themselves were not competent to the solution of the question, and they expressed the opinion that the ability to do it could not be obtained from the help which the inferior gods rendered to men, and that it was hopeless to expect the Supreme God - far withdrawn from human affairs - to interpose. It was a public acknowledgment that their art failed on a most important trial, and thus the way was prepared to show that Daniel, under the teaching of the true God, was able to accomplish what was wholly beyond all human power.

The trial had been fairly made. The wisest men of the Chaldean realm had been applied to. They on whom reliance had been placed in such emergencies; they who professed to be able to explain the prognostics of future events; they who had been assembled at the most important and magnificent court of the world - the very center of Pagan power; they who had devoted their lives to investigations of this nature, and who might be supposed to be competent to such a work, if any on earth could, now openly acknowledged that their art failed them, and expressed the conviction that there was no resource in the case.

12

Daniel 2:12

開啟正文

因此,王發怒——因為他們未能解明那交託給他們的問題。誠然,他的忿怒是不義的,因為他們的職分並不包含承諾解明他所要求的這類事;但他的暴怒並非不自然。他的心驚惶不安。他相信夢中所見的預示着某些重大的事變;而他既是專制的君主,不慣於抑制自己的忿怒,也不慣於追究激起他怒氣之事是否確實公道,那麼他決意向一切妄稱通曉占卜之術的人施行報復,便不是不自然的事。

氣忿忿地大發烈怒——意即被激動至極度的忿怒。迦勒底文作「大為震怒」。這不是冷靜而堅定地要執行其威嚇的決意,而是帶着高度激動的決意。

吩咐滅絕巴比倫所有的哲士——即一切妄稱有這類智慧的人,一切屬於人所共知的「哲士」或「智者」名目之下的人。他曾把這一等人召到面前來(Daniel 2:2);他曾要求他們解明他的夢;他們中間為首的迦勒底人已經向他聲明,他們無法把王的夢重述出來(Daniel 2:10-11);他以為在這樣的事上凡可倚靠的人既都失敗了,便決意把他們當作騙子剷除。

但以理這時身在何處,不得而知。不過從某些原因看來,他似乎沒有與其他人一同被召到王面前,大概是因為他雖已顯明自己卓越地蒙賦智慧(Daniel 1:20),卻尚未妄稱有這類知識,也未列入瑪格斯(Magi)或迦勒底人之中。然而,「巴比倫所有的哲士」都要被殺的諭旨一頒出,人便想起他曾顯明的智慧與知識(Daniel 1:18-20),而行刑的人以為他和他的同伴也包含在那概括的命令之內。這裏的「巴比倫」一詞究竟指巴比倫城,還是指整個王國,沒有確定的方法可以判明。然而,考慮到東方專制政體的特性,以及絕對君主在盛怒之中常陷入的殘酷,假定這命令包括全國,並非沒有可能——不過這一類人大多數大概都在首都。

英文原文

For this cause the king was angry - Because they failed in explaining the subject which had been referred to them. It is true that his anger was unjust, for their profession did not imply that they would undertake to explain what he demanded, but his wrath was not unnatural. His mind was alarmed, and he was troubled. He believed that what he had seen in his dream foreboded some important events, and, as an arbitrary sovereign, unaccustomed to restrain his anger or to inquire into the exact jusrice of matters which excited Iris indignation, it was not unnatural that he should resolve to wreak his vengeance on all who made any pretensions to the arts of divining.

And very furious - Wrought up to the highest degree of passion. Chaldee, "Much enraged." It was not a calm and settled purpose to execute his threat, but a purpose attended with a high degree of excitement.

And commanded to destroy all the wise men of Babylon - That is, all who made pretensions to this kind of wisdom; all who came under the wellknown denomination of "wise men," or "sages." He had called that class before him Daniel 2:2; he had demanded of them an explanation of his dream; he had been assured by the leading men among them, the Chaldeans Daniel 2:10-11, that they could not recall his dream; and, as he supposed that all who could be relied on in such a case had failed, he resolved to cut them off as impostors.

Where Daniel was at this time is not known. It would seem, however, that from some reason he had not been summoned before the king with the others, probably because, although he had shown himself to be eminently endowed with wisdom Daniel 1:20, he had not yet made any pretensions to this kind of knowledge, and was not numbered with the Magi, or Chaldeans. When, however, the decree went forth that "all" the "wise men of Babylon" should be slain, the exhibition of wisdom and knowledge made by him Daniel 1:18-20 was recollected, and the executioners of the sentence supposed that tie and his companions were included in the general instructions. Whether the word "Babylon" here relates to the city of Babylon, or to the whole realm, there is no certain way of determining. Considering, however, the character of Oriental despotisms, and the cruelty to which absolute sovereigns have usually been transported in their passion, there would be no improbability in supposing that the command included the whole realm, though it is probable that most of this class would be found in the capital.

13

Daniel 2:13

開啟正文

於是命令發出,要殺滅哲士——這裏的原文可以容納一個略有不同的譯法,意思是「命令發出,哲士就被殺了」;就是說,判決的執行實際上已經開始。武加大譯本正是如此:Et egressa sententia, sapientes interficiebantur。希臘譯本也是如此:καὶ οἱ σοφοί ἀπεκτέννοντο kai hoi sophoi apektennonto——「哲士就被殺了」。在我看來,這似乎是更可能的解釋,也更切合上下文。這樣,經義便是:他們實際上已開始執行命令,在推行這血腥工作的過程中,他們搜尋但以理和他的同伴;而藉着他對亞略(Arioch)的影響,判決的執行才得以止住。

人就尋找但以理和他的同伴,要殺他們——即他那三位同伴(Daniel 1:6);他們大概不在那些被召入宮解釋這事的人當中。倘若起初就徵詢過他們,這命令的頒布本可避免;但這似乎是天意的安排,要讓這些智士的能力受到最公平的試驗,並容讓事態發展到危急的關頭,以顯明所成就的事完全出於人力以外。

英文原文

And the decree went forth that the wise men should be slain - The original here will bear a somewhat different translation, meaning, "the decree went forth, "and" the wise men were slain;" that is, the execution of the sentence was actually commenced. So the Vulgate: Et egressa sententia, sapientes interficiebantur. So also the Greek version: καὶ οἱ σοφοί ἀπεκτέννοντο kai hoi sophoi apektennonto - "and the wise men were slain." This seems to me to be the more probable interpretation, and better to suit the connection. Then it would mean that they had actually begun to execute the decree, and that in the prosecution of their bloody work they sought out Daniel and his companions, and that by his influence with Arioch the execution of the sentence was arrested.

And they sought Daniel and his fellows to be slain - His three companions Daniel 1:6, who probably had not been among those who were summoned to court to explain the matter. Had they been consulted at first, the issuing of the decree would have been prevented, but it seems to have been the design of Providence to give the fairest trial of the ability of these sages, and to allow matters to come to a crisis, in order to show that what was done was wholly beyond human power.

14

Daniel 2:14

開啟正文

但以理遂回答——邊註作「回覆」。原文直譯為「回覆了謀略與智慧」,意即他回了一個滿有智慧的答覆。亞略大概已將王的諭令傳達給但以理,並告訴他,他也包括在這諭令之內,必須準備受死。

婉言——即「智慧的謀略」。他在所說的話上顯出極大的審慎與明辨。他向亞略提出了一個建議;這建議若蒙採納,既能攔阻對眾哲士判決的執行,又能保全王心目中的目的。這回答確切的性質為何,經文並未說明。然而大概是他求能得以陳明那夢,並且他把這事向亞略說得如此可信,以致亞略有意容他一試。顯然,除非亞略看來極有可能但以理能解除王的焦慮,否則他總不會同意攔阻判決的執行。他知道王的「主要」目的是要得著他夢的講解,又看出這目的決不會因這嚴厲諭令的執行而更有把握達成,並且知道但以理在朝廷曾大蒙恩眷(Daniel 1:19-21),他似乎就願意承擔幾分責任,容許但以理親自向王陳情。

對亞略——王的護衛長——邊註作「行刑者之首、屠宰夫、或總提督」。希臘文作 ἀρχιμαγείρῳ τοῦ βασιλέως archimageirō tou basileōs——王的御廚總長。武加大譯本(Vulgate)將此譯作:「那時但以理就亞略的律法與判決求問,他是王家軍隊的統領。」譯作「護衛」的迦勒底文字是 טבחיא ṭabâchayâ。這字出於 טבח ṭâbach,意為宰殺;宰殺牲畜;繼而指殺人戮人。因此,這「名詞」意為宰殺者或屠戮者;廚子;行刑官,即奉君王之意、或按合法判決殺人的人。此處這字無疑是指奉派出去執行這判決的亞略;然而我們不應把他看作單純的行刑者,或如我們看待劊子手那樣,因為王無疑會將這判決交託給一位有體面、甚或高位的人。大概王侍衛中的一位主要軍官,會受託執行這樣的判決。在 1 Samuel 8:13,這字譯作「作飯」。這字未見於他處。他並非「單純」的行刑者,這從下一節所給他的頭銜顯然可見,那裏他稱為「王的護衛長」。

已出去滅絕……的——他已前去執行那諭令,而諭令的執行業已開始。

英文原文

Then Daniel answered - Margin, "returned." The original literally is, "returned counsel and wisdom," meaning, that he returned an answer which was replete with wisdom. It would seem probable that Arioch had communicated to Daniel the decree of the king, and had stated to him that he was involved in that decree, and must prepare to die.

Counsel and wisdom - That is, "wise counsel." He evinced great prudence and discretion in what he said. He made such a suggestion to Arioch as, if acted on, would stay the execution of the sentence against all the wise men, and would secure the object which the king had in view. What was the exact nature of this answer is not mentioned. It is probable, however, that it was that he might be enabled to disclose the dream, and that he made this so plausible to Arioch, that he was disposed to allow him to make the trial. It is evident that Arioch would not have consented to arrest the execution of the sentence, unless it had appeared to him to be in the highest degree probable that he would be able to relieve the anxiety of the king. Knowing that the "main" object of the king was to obtain the interpretation of his dream, and seeing that this object was not any the more likely to be secured by the execution of this stern decree, and knowing the high favor with which Daniel had been received at court Daniel 1:19-21, he seems to have been willing to assume some measure of responsibility, and to allow Daniel to make his own representation to the king.

To Arioch the captain of the king's guard - Margin, "chief of the executioners, or slaughter-men, or chief marshal." Greek, ἀρχιμαγείρῳ τοῦ βασιλέως archimageirō tou basileōs - chief cook of the king. The Vulgate renders this," Then Daniel inquired respecting the law and the sentence of Arioch, the commander of the royal army." The Chaldee word rendered "guard" is טבחיא ṭabâchayâ'. It is derived from טבח ṭâbach, to slaughter; to kill animals; and then to kill or slay men. The "noun," then, means a slaughterer or slayer; a cook; an executioner, or one who kills men at the will of a sovereign, or by due sentence of law. There can be no doubt that the word here refers to Arioch, as sent out to execute this sentence; yet we are not to regard hint as a mere executioner, or as we would a hangman, for undoubtedly the king would entrust this sentence to one who was of respectable, if not of high rank. It is probable that one of the principal officers of his body-guard would be entrusted with the execution of such a sentence. In 1 Samuel 8:13, the word is rendered "cooks." It does not elsewhere occur. That he was not a "mere" executioner is apparent from the title given him in the next verse, where he is called "the king's captain."

Which was gone forth to slay ... - He had gone to execute the decree, and its execution had already commenced.

15

Daniel 2:15

開啟正文

他回答對王的護衛長亞略說——「護衛長」一詞——與 Daniel 2:14 所出現的詞不同,即 שׁליטא shallı̂yṭa'——指有統治權柄的人;有權有能力的人,並且只用於居尊榮和重任之位的人。關於 שׁלט shālaṭ 一詞作「統治」之義的用法,見 Nehemiah 5:15;Ecclesiastes 2:19;Ecclesiastes 6:2;Ecclesiastes 8:9;Esther 9:1;Psalm 119:133。這裏所用的詞,與 Daniel 2:10 所出現的相同,該處譯作「掌權的」。它在此無疑指一位有階級的官員,所指的職任,比「劊子手」一詞所指的更為尊榮。然而關於這幾節(Daniel 2:14-15)應當說明:在東方,劊子手的職分絕不被視為可恥的職分。它被託付給地位崇高的人;甚至貴族也以為榮,並常這樣誇口,說他們的先祖中曾有人這樣受託執行君王的命令。Hanway 與 AbdulKerim 都說,這職分帶來尊榮與地位。Tournefort 說,在喬治亞,「劊子手十分富有,有身份的人從事這職業;與世界其他地方大不相同,在那國這使一個家族得着榮銜。他們誇耀說,他們的先祖中有許多曾作劊子手;其根據的觀念是:沒有比公義更可羨慕的,也沒有比參與執行法律更光榮的」。見 Rosenmuller, Morgenland, 1079。

王的命令為何這樣緊急呢?——言下之意是,為解開這奧祕,尚未用盡一切所能作的努力。意思是說,這樣性質的諭令,既牽連如此多人於毀滅,若非先採取一切可能的防備、先盡一切可能的努力尋找能以揭示王所求之事的人,就不應由王發出。但以理曾在宮中蒙恩受榮(Daniel 1:19-20),又受過信任,如今竟發出這樣一道命令,範圍如此廣泛,連他和他的同伴也包括在內,而他們並沒有作任何該招王不悅的事;這對但以理來說,確實是理所當然的詫異之事。

於是亞略將這事告訴但以理——即關於那夢的陳述、王的煩惱、召見術士的諮詢、他們無法解明那夢,以及把一切自稱有智慧的人處死的嚴命。顯然,但以理在此之前並未獲悉這些事。

英文原文

He answered and said to Arioch the king's captain - The word "captain" - a different word from what occurs in Daniel 2:14, שׁליטא shallı̂yṭa' - denotes one who has rule or dominion; one who is powerful or mighty; and it would be applied only to one who sustained a post of honor and responsibility. See the use of the word שׁלט shālaṭ, as meaning "to rule," in Nehemiah 5:15; Ecclesiastes 2:19; Ecclesiastes 6:2; Ecclesiastes 8:9; Esther 9:1; Psalm 119:133. The word here used is the same which occurs in Daniel 2:10, where it is rendered "ruler." It doubtless denotes here an officer of rank, and designates one of more honorable employment than would be denoted by the word "executioner." It should be said on these verses Daniel 2:14-15, however, that the office of executioner in the East was by no means regarded as a dishonorable office. It was entrusted to those high in rank, and even nobles considered it an honor, and often boasted of it as such, that among their ancestors there were those who had in this way been entrusted with executing the commands of their sovereign. Hanway and AbdulKerim both say that this office conferred honor and rank. Tournefort says, that in Georgia "the executioners are very rich, and men of standing undertake this employment; far different from what occurs in other parts of the world, in that country this gives to a family a title of honor. They boast that among their ancestors there were many who were executioners; and this they base on the sentiment, that nothing is more desirable than justice, and that nothing can be more honorable than to be engaged in administering the laws." See Rosenmuller, Morgenland, 1079.

Why is the decree so hasty from the king? - Implying that all the effort had not been made which it was possible to make to solve the mystery. The idea is, that a decree of such a nature, involving so many in ruin, ought not to have proceeded from the king without having taken all possible precautions, and having made all possible efforts to find those who might be able to disclose what the king desired. It was to Daniel a just matter of surprise that, after the favor and honor with which he had been received at court Daniel 1:19-20, and the confidence which had been reposed in him, a command like this should have been issued. so comprehensive as to embrace him and his friends, when they had done nothing to deserve the displeasure of the king.

Then Arioch made the thing known to Daniel - The statement respecting the dream; the trouble of the king; the consultation of the magicians; their inability to explain the dream, and the positive command to put all the pretenders to wisdom to death. It is clear that Daniel had not before been informed of these things.

16

Daniel 2:16

開啟正文

於是但以理進去……——或是親自去,或是藉着某位朋友的中介。這話所指的,也許並不是他真的進到君王面前,而是他進入王宮,藉着某位能接近君王之宮廷高官的居間效力,求王給他時間,好將夢的講解告訴王。從 Daniel 2:24-25 看,情形倒更像是:他首次與王直接會面,是在那事於夜間異象中向他顯明之後;他若立即冒然進入王面前,幾乎不符合既定的東方慣例。藉着某位能面見王的人呈上請求,就能滿足這案例的一切情況。

求王寬限——他沒有說明他為何想要時間,儘管他這樣作的理由十分明顯。他要把這事帶到神面前,並要他的同伴一同懇切祈求,使那夢和夢的講解向他顯明。這請求蒙了應允。迦勒底人連作查詢的時間也得不到(Daniel 2:8),而但以理竟蒙這樣的恩待——尤其在刑罰已開始執行之後——這似乎令人驚奇;但我們當記得:

(1)王會記起他先前有充分理由向但以理所顯的恩惠,並記起他看他為大有智慧這事實(Daniel 1:19-20)。

(2)但以理並沒有像迦勒底人那樣,要求王先把夢告訴他才肯講解;他顯然打算把整件事揭示出來。

(3)王不能不想到,但以理尚未被諮詢過;他既顯然包括在那總體的判決之內,如今讓他得一次公平的機會,也是合理。

(4)王想明白那夢的心情如此迫切,以致只要能解除他的困惑,他樂意抓住「任何」盼望;並且

(5)設想這位君王的心思或曾受神的感動,使他樂意行這樣一件簡單的公正之舉,好叫人看見並承認整件事都有神的手在其中,這設想並非不當。

英文原文

Then Daniel went in ... - Either by himself, or through the medium of some friend. Perhaps all that is meant is not that he actually went into the presence of the monarch, but that he went into the palace, and through the interposition of some high officer of court who had access to the sovereign, desired of him that he would give him time, and that he would make it known. It would rather appear, from Daniel 2:24-25, that the first direct audience which he had with the king was after the thing was made known to him in a night vision, and it would scarcely accord with established Oriental usages that he should go immediately and unceremoniously into the royal presence. A petition, presented through some one who had access to the king, would meet all the circumstances of the case.

That he would give him time - He did not specify "why" he desired time, though the reason why he did it is plain enough. He wished to lay the matter before God, and to engage his friends in earnest prayer that the dream and the interpretation might be made known to him. This request was granted to him. It may seem remarkable, as no time was allowed to the Chaldeans that they might make inquiry Daniel 2:8, that such a favor should have been granted to Daniel, especially after the execution of the sentence had been commenced; but we are to remember

(1) that the king would recollect the favor which he had already shown Daniel on good grounds, and the fact that he regarded him as endowed with great wisdom, Daniel 1:19-20.

(2) Daniel did not ask, as the Chaldeans did, that the king should tell the dream before he undertook to explain it, but he proposed evidently to unfold the whole matter.

(3) It could not but occur to the king that Daniel had not yet been consulted, and that it was but reasonable that he should have a fair trial now, since it appeared that he was involved in the general sentence.

(4) The anxiety of the king to understand the dream was so great that he was willing to grasp at "any" hope in order that his perplexities might be relieved; and

(5) It is not improper to suppose that there may have been a Divine influence on the mind of this monarch, making' him willing to do so simple an act of justice as this, in order that it might be seen and acknowledged that the hand of God was in the whole matter.

17

Daniel 2:17

開啟正文

但以理回他的居所——雖然沒有明說,但他顯然已經得到了所求的。基於上述理由,王無疑樂意給他一個公平的機會,試他揭示這奧秘的能力。

將事情告訴哈拿尼雅……——把整件事告訴他們:關於那夢的困惑、迦勒底人解夢的失敗、王的諭旨,以及他自己向王提出的請求。他們的性命都遭威脅,所以知道這事是他們共同的利益所在。

英文原文

Then Daniel went to his house - It is quite evident that he had obtained the object of his request, though this is not expressly mentioned. The king was undoubtedly, for the reasons above stated, willing that he should have a fair opportunity to try his skill in disclosing the mysterious secret.

And made the thing known to Hananiah ... - Made the whole matter known - the perplexity respecting the dream; the failure of the Chaldeans to interpret it; the decree; and his own petition to the king. They had a common interest in knowing it, as their lives were all endangered.

18

Daniel 2:18

開啟正文

要他們為這奧祕祈求天上的神施憐憫——即求神施憐憫,向他們揭示這奧祕,使他們的性命得以保全。旁註照迦勒底文作「從天上的神面前」。如今一切都繫於神。人的技能顯然已經用盡,人所有的任何能力都無可倚靠。迦勒底人的技藝失敗了;但以理既因這失敗、也因自己內心的催促,此時必然看出惟一的盼望在乎神,而祂在這事上的恩眷,惟有藉禱告才能獲得。他的三位朋友在這結局上利害相同;而「聯合」的祈禱在神面前有特別的能力,乃是宗教的早期原則,也是歷代安排中都有的(比較 Matthew 18:19);因此,請他的朋友們與他一同向那惟一能賜下此恩的主祈求,既自然又合宜。這是敬虔者自然而最後的憑藉,為一切人在困惑與危難之時所能做、也所應做的事樹立了榜樣。

使但以理和他的同伴不致滅亡——旁註作「或作他們不使但以理滅亡」。旁註的讀法最合迦勒底文,不過意思實質相同。「同伴」一詞與前文譯作「夥伴」的是同一個字。

和巴比倫其餘的哲士——看來那諭旨必會在迦勒底人、占卜的等人身上執行。其實,沒有理由說諭旨不應在他們身上執行:他們既已承認無力遵行王的命令,那麼但以理如今無論成就甚麼,也不能解釋為對他們有利、成為不向他們執行諭旨的理由。因此,雖然那法令看似嚴酷,人們仍料想它必落在他們身上;我們也可以推想事情大概確實如此。他們能免於共同命運的惟一盼望,在於相信他們所事奉的神如今必為他們介入。

英文原文

That they would desire mercies of the God of heaven concerning this secret - That they would implore of God that he would show his mercy to them in revealing this secret, that their lives might be spared. In the margin, as in the Chaldee, this is "from before the God of heaven." All depended now on God. It was clear that human skill was exhausted, and that no reliance could be placed on any ability which man possessed. The art of the Chaldeans had failed, and Daniel, as well by this failure as by the promptings of his own feelings, must now have perceived that the only hope was in God, and that his favor in the case was to be obtained only by prayer. As his three friends were equally interested in the issue, and as it was an early principle of religion, and one found in all dispensations (compare Matthew 18:19), that "united" prayer has special power with God, it was natural and proper to call on his friends to join with him in asking this favor from Him who alone could grant it. It was the natural and the last resource of piety, furnishing an example of what all may do, and should do, in times of perplexity and danger.

That Daniel and his fellows should not perish - Margin, "or, they should not destroy Daniel." The leading in the margin is most in accordance with the Chaldee, though the sense is substantially the same. The word "fellows" is the same which is before rendered "companions."

With the rest of the wise men of Babylon - It seems to have been certain that the decree would be executed on the Chaldeans, soothsayers, etc. And, indeed, there was no reason "why" the decree should not be executed. They had confessed their inability to comply with the king's command, and whatever Daniel could now do could not be construed in their favor as furnishing any reason why the decree should not be executed on them. It was presumed, therefore, that the law, severe as it seemed to be, would be carried into effect on them, and we may suppose that this was probably done. The only hope of their escaping from the common lot was in the belief that the God whom they served would now interpose in their behalf.

19

Daniel 2:19

開啟正文

這奧祕的事就顯明……——即那夢和夢的講解。那原先「隱藏」的事被揭示了。我們可以設想,這是在經過充分時間的禱告之後發生的。

在夜間的異象中——即夜間向他顯現的景象;但他當時是睡著還是醒著,經文並未說明。比較 Daniel 1:17; Isaiah 1:1; Job 4:13; Job 33:15 的註釋。

但以理便稱頌天上的神——他因這奧祕的揭示,性命和同伴的性命得以保全,而如此顯著的尊榮又歸給那位惟一能啟示將來之事的神自己;他為此迸發感恩頌讚,再沒有比這更自然的事了。

英文原文

Then was the secret revealed ... - To wit, the dream and the interpretation. The thing which had been "hidden" was disclosed. We may suppose that this occurred after a suitable time had been given to prayer.

In a night vision - A representation made to him at night, but whether when he was asleep or awake does not appear. Compare the notes at Daniel 1:17; Isaiah 1:1; Job 4:13; Job 33:15.

Then Daniel blessed the God of heaven - Nothing would be more natural than that he should burst forth in a song of grateful praise for disclosing a secret by means of which his life, and the lives of his companions, would be preserved, and by which such signal honor would redound to God himself, as alone able to reveal coming events.

20

Daniel 2:20

開啟正文

但以理說——聖經中「回答」一詞,常實質上作「說」「講」用。它並不總像我們的用法那樣指回答別人所說的話,而常用於開始一段發言之時,好像在回答情況中「可能」會被提出的話,或表示情況引出了這番話。這裏的意思是:但以理彷彿回應神所顯的恩慈,以合宜的頌讚言辭抒發他的感受。

神的名是應當稱頌的,從亙古直到永遠——即願神受稱頌——在聖經中,「名」常用以指其本人。聖經慣於在重大啟示之後、或大憐憫之中向神發出頌讚。可比較過紅海之後摩西的歌(Exodus 15)、西西拉覆滅之後底波拉的歌(Judges 5)、以及 Isaiah 12:1-6。

因為智慧能力都屬乎他——這兩樣都在這事的經過中奇妙地顯明出來,因此頌讚之歌便以此起首:「智慧」,在於如今賜給但以理,使他能揭示這奧祕——那時人的一切技能都已失效;「能力」,在於夢和講解所指示的帝國變遷中即將顯明。比較 Jeremiah 32:19:「謀事有大略,行事有大能。」

英文原文

Daniel answered and said - The word "answer," in the Scriptures, often occurs substantially in the sense of "speak" or "say." It does not always denote a reply to something that has been said by another, as it does with us, but is often used when a speech is commenced, as if one were replying to something that "might" be said in the case, or as meaning that the circumstances in the case gave rise to the remark. Here the meaning is, that Daniel responded, as it were, to the goodness which God had manifested, and gave utterance to his feelings in appropriate expressions of praise.

Blessed be the name of God forever and ever - That is, blessed be God - the "name," in the Scriptures, being often used to denote the person himself. It is common in the Bible to utter ascriptions of praise to God in view of important revelations, or in view of great mercies. Compare the song of Moses after the passage of the Red Sea, Exodus 15; the song of Deborah after the overthrow of Sisera, Judges 5; Isaiah 12:1-6.

For wisdom, and might are his - Both these were manifested in a remarkable manner in the circumstances of this case, and therefore these were the beginnings of the song of praise: "wisdom," as now imparted to Daniel, enabling him to disclose this secret, when all human skill had failed; and "might," as about to be evinced in the changes of empire indicated by the dream and the interpretation. Compare Jeremiah 32:19, "Great in counsel, and mighty in work."

21

Daniel 2:21

開啟正文

他改變時候、日期——目的是宣告神對世間一切變遷的普遍掌管。這話無疑是因帝國的變革而發:但以理如今從夢的含義看出,這些變革將在神手下發生。既預見了像的不同部分所代表、直延至遙遠將來的這些巨大變化(Daniel 2:36-45),但以理便把地上發生的「一切」變革歸於神的掌管。「時候」「日期」二詞並無本質的分別;迦勒底文二詞指既定或指定的時期,「所派定、所設立、所決定」的時候之觀念兼含於二者。時候日期不受偶然支配,乃為既定的法則所限定;而制定這些法則的神,有能力改變它們;這些法則之下發生的一切變化,也都出於祂的作為。因此,日夜、春夏、秋冬、陰晴、健康疾病、童年青年、壯年老年之間的變化,都在祂掌管之下。這些變化既循一定法則,可視為「所派定」「所設立」的;而法則本身及其所生的循環,也都在祂掌管之下。帝國的變革也是如此:祂憑護理的安排,成就祂看為至善的變革;在這一切之中,都當看見祂高舉的手。「日期」「時候」二詞在但以理書中屢見,有時具特殊意義(見 Daniel 7:12, Daniel 7:25 的註釋),但這裏似乎取其通常而概括的意義,表明地上發生的「一切」變革都受祂掌管。

他廢王、立王——祂對地上一切君王擁有絕對的權柄,要立誰登位就立誰,何時樂意就何時廢黜。這無疑是但以理從夢的講解所蒙的啟示中得到的提示,也構成他這段頌讚的基礎。他那時看見(比較 Daniel 2:37-45),神手下將有極重大的王國變革;他深深感受這些將臨的巨變,便作出這概括的宣告:隨己意行這事,乃是神的特權。尼布甲尼撒曾感悟並承認這一點,他說:「至高者在人的國中掌權,憑自己的意旨將國賜與誰」(Daniel 4:17);「在天上的萬軍和世上的居民中,他都憑自己的意旨行事,無人能攔住他手,或問他說,你作甚麼呢?」(Daniel 4:32, Daniel 4:35)。聖經常把這權柄歸於神,作為祂至尊至大的明證:「因為高舉非從東,非從西,也非從南而來;惟有神斷定,他使這人降卑,使那人升高」(Psalm 75:6-7)。比較 1 Samuel 2:7-8。祂曾如此聲言對西拿基立擁有絕對的支配權,要隨己意使用他懲罰希伯來民族(Isaiah 10:5-7);也如此支配古列,要藉他對巴比倫施行旨意、領百姓歸回故土(Isaiah 45:1 及以下)。並見 Isaiah 46:10-11。這樣,地上的一切君王都可視為在祂掌管之下;若能全然明白神的計劃,就必發現每一位都是奉神的指示受任,為推進神計劃的成全而擔當某一重要部分。一部能顯明神對每一位登位君王的確切旨意、並顯明神在那特定時刻立「他」登位所要成就之確切目標的人類歷史,將比迄今寫成的一切歷史都更重要、更寶貴。對許多君王——如古列、西拿基立、彼拉多、亨利八世、愛德華六世、薩克森選帝侯——我們能看出他們為何恰在那時活著、作王;無疑,對每一個曾登上王座的人,神在展開祂偉大計劃的過程中,都有某種重要目的要成就。

他將智慧賜與智慧人……——祂是一切真智慧真知識的源頭。聖經常把這歸於神。比較 Proverbs 2:6-7:

「因為耶和華賜人智慧, 知識和聰明都由他口而出。 他為正直人存留真智慧, 他為行為純正的人作盾牌。」

並見 1 Kings 3:9-12; Exodus 31:3。神自稱是一切智慧知識之源。祂起初造了每一個人的心智,使它成為如今這樣;祂在它面前開啟知識的門徑;祂賜它清明的知覺;祂保守它的功能不致錯亂;祂能使人生發意念、引導聯想的法則、把人心固定於重要的思想、並在它面前展開新而可貴的真理視野。正如(若能寫成歷史便會發現)神立每一位君王登位,都是針對祂偉大計劃發展中的某一重要目的;照樣大概也會發現:每一部天才的巨著、每一項工藝的發明、每一次科學的發現,也都在同樣的目的之下受祂掌管。祂恰在那樣的發現或發明成為必需之時,造出那偉大的心智,又藉世事的進程使世界為之預備好;於是那發現或發明,恰恰發生在就全局而言最為可取的時刻。

英文原文

And he changeth the times and the seasons - The object of this is to assert the general control of God in reference to all changes which occur. The assertion is made, undoubtedly, in view of the revolutions in empire which Daniel now saw, from the signification of the dream, were to take place under the Divine hand. Foreseeing now these vast changes denoted by different parts of the image Daniel 2:36-45, stretching into far-distant times, Daniel was led to ascribe to God the control over "all" the revolutions which occur on earth. There is no essential difference between the words "times" and "seasons." The words in Chaldee denote stated or appointed seasons; and the idea of times "appointed, set, determined," enters into both. Times and seasons are not under the control of chance, but are bounded by established laws; and yet God, who appointed these laws, has power to change them, and all the changes which occur under those laws are produced by his agency. Thus the changes which occur in regard to day and night, spring and summer, autumn and winter, clouds and sunshine, health and sickness, childhood and youth, manhood and age, are under his control. Such changes, being in accordance with certain laws, may be regarded as "appointed," or "set," and yet the laws and the revolutions consequent on them are all under his control. So in regard to the revolutions of empire. By the arrangements of his providence he secures such revolutions as he shall see it to be best should occur, and in all of them his high hand should be regarded. The words "seasons" and "times" are of frequent occurrence in Daniel, and are sometimes used in a peculiar sense (see the notes at Daniel 7:12, Daniel 7:25), but they seem here to be employed in their usual and general signification, to denote that "all" the revolutions which occur on earth are under his control.

He removeth kings, and setteth up kings - He has absolute control over all the sovereigns of the earth, to place on the throne whom he will, and to remove them when he pleases. This was doubtless suggested to Daniel, and was made the foundation of this portion of his hymn of praise, from what he was permitted to see in the disclosures made to him in the interpretation of the dream. He then saw (compare Daniel 2:37-45) that there would be most important revolutions of kingdoms under the hand of God, and being deeply impressed with these great prospective changes, he makes this general statement, that it was the prerogative of God to do this at pleasure. Nebuchadnezzar was brought to feel this, and to recognize it, when he said Daniel 4:17, "The Most High ruleth in the kingdom of men, and giveth it to whomsoever he will;" "he doeth according to his will in the army of heaven, and among the inhabitants of the earth: none can stay his hand, or say unto him, What doest thou?"

Daniel 4:32, Daniel 4:35. This claim is often asserted for God in the Scriptures as a proof of his supremacy and greatness. "For promotion cometh neither from the east, nor from the west, nor from the south: but God is the judge; he putteth down one, and setteth up another," Psalm 75:6-7. Compare 1 Samuel 2:7-8. Thus he claimed absolute control over Sennacherib to employ him at his pleasure in executing his purposes of punishment on the Hebrew nation Isaiah 10:5-7, and thus over Cyrus to execute his purposes on Babylon, and to restore his people to their land, Isaiah 45:1, following See also Isaiah 46:10-11. In this manner, all the kings of the earth may be regarded as under his control; and if the Divine plan were fully understood it would be found that each one has received his appointment under the Divine direction, to accomplish some important part in carrying forward the Divine plans to their fulfillment. A history of human affairs, showing the exact purpose of God in regard to each ruler who has occupied a throne, and the exact object which God designed to accomplish by placing "him" on the throne at the time when he did, would be a far more important and valuable history than any which has been written. Of many such rulers, like Cyrus, Sennacherib, Pilate, Henry VIII, Edward VI, and the Elector of Saxony, we can see the reason why they lived and reigned when they did; and doubtless God has had some important end to accomplish in the development of his great plans in the case of every one who has ever occupied a throne.

He giveth wisdom unto the wise ... - He is the source of all true wisdom and knowledge. This is often claimed for God in the Scriptures. Compare Proverbs 2:6-7 :

"For the Lord giveth wisdom;

Out of his mouth cometh knowledge and understanding.

He layeth up sound wisdom for the righteous;

He is a buckler to them that walk uprightly."

See also 1 Kings 3:9-12; Exodus 31:3. God claims to be the source of all wisdom and knowledge. He originally formed each human intellect, and made it what it is; he opens before it the paths of knowledge; he gives to it clearness of perception; he preserves its powers so that they do not become deranged; he has power to make suggestions, to direct the laws of association, to fix the mind on important thoughts, and to open before it new and interesting views of truth. And as it would be found, if the history could be written, that God has placed each monarch on the throne with a distinct reference to some important purpose in the development of his great plans, so probably it would be seen that each important work of genius which has been written; each invention in the arts; and each discovery in science has been, for a similar purpose, under his control. He has created the great intellect just at the time when it was needful that such a discovery or invention should be made, and having prepared the world for it by the course of events, the discovery or invention has occurred just at the time when, on the whole, it was most desirable that it should.

22

Daniel 2:22

開啟正文

他顯明深奧隱祕的事——指過於深奧、非人自身之力所能測透,且在被他顯明之前隱藏隱蔽的事。這裏所說的比前一節的宣告更進一步,涉及另一類知識。前節所論,是就其本義並不超出人類智力所能及(在無超自然之助時)的那類知識,並斷言即使那時,一切的發現發明也當溯源於神;這裏所論,則是全然超出人力自然範圍、必須有超自然影響的那類知識——如迦勒底人和占卜者所聲稱能揭示的那類事。這裏斷言的是:當人類最高的智慧顯明不足以應急需時,神能揭示那些人們渴望明白的深奧真理。概括而言,這指藉啟示而顯明的真理——人的本能若無外助便永不能發現的真理。

他知道暗中所有的——即人看來隱於黑暗、似無光照及的事。這不僅可指在夜間實際的黑暗中向人隱藏的事,也可指一切奧祕、一切超出人類探究範圍的事、一切屬於不可見世界的事。宇宙中極大部分目前全然超出人類探究的範圍,對人自然是黑暗的。

與光明同居——譯作「居」的字(שׁרא,sherēl)本義是解開、解縛、解答,如難題(Daniel 5:16);繼而用於旅人解下牲口的負載以過夜,於是有投宿、住宿、居住之意。因此這裏的意思是:光明與神同住;光明在那裏,如同在其本位;祂居於光明之中;祂四圍盡是光明;光明發出時從祂而去,收聚時其本位在於祂那裏。比較 Job 38:19-20:

「光明的居所從何而至? 黑暗的本位在於何處? 你能帶到本境, 能看明其室之路嗎?」

見該處的註釋。並比較 1 Timothy 6:16:「住在人不能靠近的光裏」;1 John 1:5:「神就是光,在他毫無黑暗」。

英文原文

He revealeth the deep and secret things - Things which are too profound for man to fathom by his own power, and which are concealed or hidden until he makes them known. What is said here is an advance on what was affirmed in the previous verse, and relates to another kind of knowledge. "That" related to such knowledge as was not properly beyond the grasp of the human intellect when unaided in any supernatural manner, and affirmed that even then all discoveries and inventions are to be traced to God; "this" refers to a species of knowledge which lies beyond any natural compass of the human powers, and in which a supernatural influence is needed - such things as the Chaldeans and astrologers claimed the power of disclosing. The assertion here is, that when the highest human wisdom showed itself insufficient for the exigency, God was able to disclose those deep truths which it was desirable for man to understand. Applied generally, this refers to the truths made known by revelation - truths which man could never have discovered by his unaided powers.

He knoweth what is in the darkness - What appears to man to be involved in darkness, and on which no light seems to shine. This may refer not only to what is concealed from man in the literal darkness of night, but to all that is mysterious; all that lies beyond the range of human inquiry; all that pertains to unseen worlds. An immensely large portion of the universe lies wholly beyond the range of human investigation at present, and is, of course, dark to man.

And the light dwelleth with him - The word rendered "dwelleth" (שׁרא sherēl) means, properly, to loose, to unbind, to solve, as e. g., hard questions, Daniel 5:16; and is then applied to travelers who unbind the loads of their beasts to put up for the night, and then it comes to mean to put up for the night, to lodge, to dwell. Hence, the meaning is, that the light abides with God; it is there as in its appropriate dwelling-place; he is in the midst of it: all is light about him; light when it is sent out goes from him; when it is gathered together, its appropriate place is with him. Compare Job 38:19-20 :

"Where is the way where light dwelleth?

And as for darkness, where is the place thereof?

That thou shouldest take it to the bound thereof,

And that thou shouldest know the paths to the house thereof?"

See the note at that passage. Compare also 1 Timothy 6:16 : "Dwelling in the light which no man can approach unto." 1 John 1:5 : "God is light, and in him is no darkness at all."

23

Daniel 2:23

開啟正文

我列祖的神啊,我感謝你、讚美你——這裏的「列祖」,但以理無疑指猶太全族,而非他個別的祖先。「列祖的神」一語的意思是:祂作過他們的保護者,視他們為自己的子民,又賜給他們極大的恩惠。這裏感恩的特殊緣由是:那位曾在本國屢次藉眾先知向希伯來人顯明自己的神,如今竟屈尊向這民族的一員——雖是異鄯之地的俘虜——行同樣的事。這樣的恩寵因此更顯寶貴,因為它表明希伯來人雖遠離生身之地,並未蒙忘記;雖在被擄之中,仍可盼望神恩慈的介入。

你賜我智慧才能——「智慧」一詞無疑指他如今蒙賜的能力,能說明那夢的性質和含義,使他所得到的智慧遠超過最初受託解夢的那些自命之士。「才能」一詞(迦勒底文作力量——גבוּרתא,gebûrethâ)大概與「智慧」並無實質分別;它指解夢的「能力」,暗示這任務超乎人天生的才能。

因你將王的事向我們顯明——即向他和他的朋友們顯明。他把自己與朋友們相連,因為雖然這特別向他顯明,但他們既曾與他同心祈求奧祕的揭示、又同擔危難,他便視之為實際上顯明給他們眾人的。

英文原文

I thank thee, and praise thee, O thou God of my fathers - By his "fathers" here, Daniel refers doubtless to the Jewish people in general, and not to his own particular ancestors. The meaning of the phrase "God of my fathers" is, that he had been their protector; had regarded them as his people; had conferred on them great favors. The particular ground of thanksgiving here is, that the same God who had so often revealed himself to the Hebrew people by the prophets in their own land, had now condescended to do the same thing to one of their nation, though a captive in a strange country. The favor thus bestowed had an increased value, from the fact that it showed that the Hebrew people were not forgotten, though far from the land of their birth, and that, though in captivity, they might still hope for the benign interposition of God.

Who hast given me wisdom and might - The word "wisdom" here undoubtedly refers to the ability which had now been given him to declare the nature and purport of the dream, imparting to him a degree of wisdom far superior to those pretenders to whom the matter had been at first submitted. The word "might" (Chaldee, strength - גבוּרתא gebûrethâ') does not probably differ materially from "wisdom." It means "ability" to interpret the dream - implying that it was a task beyond natural human ability.

For thou hast now made known unto us the king's matter - That is, it had been made known to him and his friends. He joins himself with them, for, although it was particularly made known to him, yet, as they had united with him in prayer that the secret might be disclosed, and as they shared common dangers, he regarded it as in fact made known to them all.

24

Daniel 2:24

開啟正文

於是但以理進去見亞略——既然這事如今已向他顯明,他便打算把它呈到王面前。這當然不是直接去作,而是藉着亞略——那奉命執行誅殺巴比倫哲士之諭旨的官員。那官員自然能面見王;請求停止行刑,也宜由他轉達。迦勒底文 דנה כל־קבל(kôl-qebēl denâh),本義是「因這一切的事」或「因這一切的緣故」——這是慣常把虛詞寫得完足而重疊的筆法,類似德文的 alldieweil 或英文複合詞「forasmuch as(既然因)」。意思是:顧及事情的全部,他要把這事呈到王面前。

不要滅絕巴比倫的哲士——即「停止對他們的行刑。他們雖未能提供所求的講解,但如今既然可以給出,就沒有理由再施這樣的嚴酷。」定罪的根據是他們不能解夢;行刑既牽連但以理和他的朋友,而如今他既能提供所需的講解,定罪的理由便歸於消滅——但以理認為,完全停止行刑乃單純公義的問題。

求王領我到王面前——從這話看來,但以理並不認為自己可以隨意面見王,也不願失禮地闖到王面前。本節印證了對 Daniel 2:16 的解釋,並極大提高了這樣的可能性:就這件事而言,這是他第一次親自到王面前。

英文原文

Therefore Daniel went in, unto Arioch - In view of the fact that the matter was now disclosed to him, he proposed to lay it before the king. This of course, he did not do directly, but through Arioch, who was entrusted with the execution of the decree to slay the wise men of Babylon. That officer would naturally have access to the king, and it was proper that a proposal to arrest the execution of the sentence should be made through his instrumentality. The Chaldee דנה כל־קבל kôl-qebēl denâh is, properly, "on this whole account " - or, "on this whole account because" - in accordance with the usually full and pleonastic mode of writing particles, Similar to the German "alldieweil," or the compound English "forasmuch as." The meaning is, that in view of the whole matter, he sought to lay the case before the king.

Destroy not the wise men of Babylon - That is, "Stay the execution of the sentence on them. Though they have failed to furnish the interpretation demanded, yet, as it can now be given, there is no occasion for the exercise of this severity." The ground of the sentence was that they could not interpret the dream. As the execution of the sentence involved Daniel and his friends, and as the reason why it was passed at all would now cease by his being able to furnish the required explanation, Daniel felt that it was a matter of mere justice that the execution of the sentence should cease altogether.

Bring me in before the king - It would seem from this that Daniel did not regard himself as having free access to the king, and he would not unceremoniously intrude himself into his presence. This verse confirms the interpretation given of Daniel 2:16, and makes it in the highest degree probable that this was the first occasion on which he was personally before the king in reference to this matter.

25

Daniel 2:25

開啟正文

亞略就急忙將但以理領到王面前——這裏的迦勒底字含有「急促忙亂」之意,如一個情緒激動或惶恐戰兢之人,出自 בהל(bâhal)——顫抖、驚惶。此處的惶急,或由以下兩個原因之一、或二者兼而有之:(1)因大奧祕已經揭曉而狂喜;(2)因流血或可止住、如今也許不必再對哲士行刑而喜。

我在被擄的猶大人中……遇見了一人——旁註照迦勒底文作「我遇見了一人」。不應設想亞略知道但以理曾向王求寬限行刑之事(Daniel 2:16);就經文所見,他是自行負責暫停行刑的。他既不知有此安排,又只看見自己在這事上的作用,自然進去向王奏報,把它當作全然新奇的事,並不提行刑曾有任何延誤。他竟願意延緩行刑,使但以理有機會顯明他能否揭示這奧祕——這是極不尋常的情形,看似神的介入。這事的全部情形似乎表明,亞略並非性情殘酷之人,而是盡可能設法避免流血。

……的——旁註照迦勒底文作「被擄之民中」。這裏的「猶大」大概指「國土」而非「人民」,意即他屬於那從猶大地擄來的人。

他必將夢的講解告訴王——從整個敘述看,亞略顯然極信任但以理。他所能有的「憑據」,只能是但以理「自稱」能作這事;但他如此信任他,毫不懷疑他必能作成。

英文原文

Then Arioch brought in Daniel before the king in haste - The Chaldee word used here implies "in tumultuous haste," as of one who was violently excited, or in a state of trepidation, from בהל bâhal - "to tremble, to be in trepidation." The trepidation in this case may have arisen from one or both of two causes:

(1) exultation, or joy, that the great secret was discovered; or

(2) joy that the effusion of blood might be stayed, and that there might be now no necessity to continue the execution of the sentence against the wise men.

I have found a man - Margin, as in Chaldee, "That I have found a man It is not to be supposed that Arioch had known anything of the application which Daniel had made to the king to delay the execution of the sentence Daniel 2:16, and, for anything that appears, he had suspended that execution on his own responsibility. Ignorant as he was, therefore, of any such arrangement, and viewing only his own agency in the matter, it was natural for him to go in and announce this as something entirely new to the king, and without suggesting that the execution of the sentence had been at all delayed. It was a most remarkable circumstance, and one which looks like a Divine interposition, that he should have been disposed to delay the execution of the sentence at all, so that Daniel could have an opportunity of showing whether he could not divulge the secret. All the circumstances of the case seem to imply that Arioch was not a man of a cruel disposition, but was disposed, as far as possible, to prevent the effusion of blood.

Of the captives of Judah - Margin, as in Chaldee, "of the children of the captivity." The word "Judah" here probably refers to the "country" rather than to the "people," and means that he was among those who had been brought from the land of Judah.

That will make known unto the king the interpretation - It is clear, from the whole narrative, that Arioch had great confidence in Daniel. All the "evidence" which he could halve that he would be able to make this known, must have been from the fact that Daniel "professed" to be able to do it; but such was his confidence in him that he had no doubt that he would be able to do it.

26

Daniel 2:26

開啟正文

王問稱為伯提沙撒的但以理說——見 Daniel 1:7 的註釋。這「王」可能以這名字稱呼他,這次召見中大概也如此。看來這正是他在巴比倫為人知曉的名字——一名暗示尊榮與體面的名字,因為它是加給那被認為蒙巴比倫主神眷愛之人的。

你能將夢告訴我嗎——難題的頭一關,是要憶述「夢的本身」;因此這是王提出的第一個問題。他若不能憶述那夢,事情當然便到此為止,法律也必循例執行。

英文原文

The king answered, and said to Daniel, whose name was Belteshazzar - See the notes at Daniel 1:7. The "king" may have addressed him by this name, and probably did during this interview. This was the name, it would seem, by which he was known in Babylon - a name which implied honor and respectability, as being conferred on one whom it was supposed the principal Babylonian divinity favored.

Art thou able to make known unto me the dream? - One of the first points in the difficulty was to recal "the dream itself," and hence, this was the first inquiry which the king presented. If he could not recal that, of course the matter was at an end, and the law would be suffered to take its course.

27

Daniel 2:27

開啟正文

但以理在王面前回答說,王所問的奧祕事,哲士……不能指示王——但以理視為定案無疑:解答不能指望於迦勒底的智士。國中頂尖的人才已經請教過而失敗了;因此顯然無望靠人的技能解此難題。不但如此,但以理似乎還暗示:這事按其必然,本就超出人力之外。無論是憶回已被遺忘的夢,還是解釋這樣一個奇特之夢的實際「含義」,整件事都在人的能力之上。

哲士、占卜的……——這些字見 Daniel 1:20 的註釋。除譯作「占卜的」的 גזרין(gâzerı̂yn)外,這些字全見於那一節。這字出於 גזר(gezar)——「切割、剪除」,繼而「決定、判定」;故用於決定或判定人命運者,即「藉人出生時星辰的位置排算命盤、以種種推算占卜之術預言個人休咎命數的人」。見格塞尼烏斯《以賽亞書註釋》2:349-356,第四節「論迦勒底人及其占星術」;他在555頁附有一圖,展示占星家行術時如何把天「切」成「分」區。比較賀拉斯《歌集》I.xi.2 的 numeri Babylonii(巴比倫數)一語。希臘文作 γαζαρηνῶν(gazarēnōn)——迦勒底字的希臘字母音寫。這是希臘譯本作者未嘗翻譯的字之一——這樣的字為數不少;然而它們並非無用,因為它們有助於說明:希伯來文與迦勒底文在加注元音符號之前是如何發音的。

英文原文

Daniel answered in the presence of the king, and said, The secret which the king hath demanded, cannot the wise men ... show unto the king - Daniel regarded it as a settled and indisputable point that the solution could not be hoped for from the Chaldean sages. The highest talent which the realm could furnish had been applied to, and had failed. It was clear, therefore, that there was no hope that the difficulty would be removed by human skill. Besides this, Daniel would seem also to intimate that the thing, from the necessity of the case, was beyond the compass of the human powers. Alike in reference to the question whether a forgotten dream could be recalled, and to the actual "signification" of a dream so remarkable as this, the whole matter was beyond the ability of man.

The wise men, the astrologers ... - On these words, see the notes at Daniel 1:20. All these words occur in that verse, except גזרין gâzerı̂yn - rendered "soothsayers." This is derived from גזר gezar - "to cut, to cut off;" and then "to decide, to determine;" and it is thus applied to those who decide or determine the fates or destiny of men; that is, those who "by casting nativities from the place of the stars at one's birth, and by various arts of computing and divining, foretold the fortunes and destinies of individuals." See Gesenius, "Com. z. Isa." 2:349-356, Section 4, Von den Chaldern und deren Astrologie. On p. 555, he has given a figure, showing how the heavens were "cut up," or "divided," by astrologers in the practice of their art. Compare the phrase numeri Babylonii, in Hor. "Carm." I. xi. 2. The Greek is γαζαρηνῶν gazarēnōn - the Chaldee word in Greek letters. This is one of the words - not very few in number - which the authors of the Greek version did not attempt to translate. Such words, however, are not useless, as they serve to throw light on the question how the Hebrew and Chaldee were pronounced before the vowel points were affixed to those languages.

28

Daniel 2:28

開啟正文

只有一位在天上的神,能顯明奧祕的事——這夢與其解釋所涉一切的主要目的之一,是把君王的心引向真神、使祂的至尊得承認。因此事情如此安排:那些最負智慧之名、被視為天寵者,不得不承認自己全然不能解這奧祕。如此便鋪好道路,顯明那「能」作這事的必是真神,配受敬拜讚美。君王的心既經這樣預備,如今便由這位雖為俘虜的敬虔希伯來青年,引向這如此重大的真理。他所受的全部訓練、他的謙遜與敬虔,都合力使他把自己在如此難題中或將顯出的任何技能,單單歸於真神;在世界最宏偉的宮廷中,這青年把當時在位最強大君王的思想引向真神的存在與完全——我們幾乎想像不出比這更崇高的默想對象。

他顯明給尼布甲尼撒王——旁註作「已顯明」。正文的譯法更準確:神尚末實際把這些事顯明給王;祂已給了將成之事的暗示,但王尚未蒙許明白其含義。

日後必有的事——希臘文 ἐπ ̓ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν(ep' eschatōn tōn hēmerōn)——「在末後的日子」;武加大作 in novissimis temporibus——「在最後的時期」;迦勒底文 יומיא באחרית(be'achărı̂yth yômayâ')——「在以後的日子」,或如法伯所言:「在日子的後際」。這話的意思,即我們所說的「今後——在將來的時候——在未來」。此語常特指彌賽亞的時代——地上最後的安排、世事將在其下完結的時期。比較 Isaiah 2:2 的註釋。然而此處似乎不是那個意思,只指「未來」的時候。故「末後的日子」並不確切傳達原文之意:是「未來的」日子,而非「末後的」日子。

你的夢和你頭腦中的異象——「頭腦(頭)中的異象」一語,指腦中所形成的概念或意念。由此看來,即使在那個時代,人已某種程度上視腦為思維之官,或以為「思想」居於頭。不應設想但以理用這些不同的說法是要描述兩件事,或暗示尼布甲尼撒見了彼此不同的多個異象。他所見的既可稱為夢、也可稱為異象;它實際兼具二者的性質。

就是這樣——「就是我如今要述說的這些」。

英文原文

But there is a God in heaven that revealeth secrets - One of the principal objects contemplated in all that occurred respecting this dream and its interpretation was, to direct the mind of the monarch to the true God, and to secure the acknowledgment of his supremacy. Hence, it was so ordered that those who were most eminent for wisdom, and who were regarded as the favorites of heaven, were constrained to confess their entire inability to explain the mystery. The way was thus prepared to show that he who "could" do this must be the true God, and must be worthy of adoration and praise. Thus prepared, the mind of the monarch was now directed by this pious Hebrew youth, though a captive, to a truth so momentous and important. His whole training, his modesty and his piety, all were combined to lead him to attribute whatever skill he might evince in so difficult a matter to the true God alone: and we can scarcely conceive of a more sublime object of contemplation than this young man, in the most magnificent court of the world, directing the thoughts of the most mighty monarch that then occupied a throne, to the existence and the perfections of the true God.

And maketh known to the king Nebuchadnezzar - Margin, "hath made." The translation in the text is more correct, for it was not true that he had as yet actually made these things known to the king. He had furnished intimations of what was to occur, but he had not yet been permitted to understand their signification.

What shall be in the latter days - Greek ἐπ ̓ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν ep' eschatōn tōn hēmerōn - "in the last days." Vulgate, in novissimis temporibus - "in the last times." Chaldee, יומיא באחרית be'achărı̂yth yômayâ' - "in the after days;" or, as Faber expresses it, "in the afterhood of days." The phrase means what we should express by saying, "hereafter - in future times - in time to come." This phrase often has special reference to the times of the Messiah, as the last dispensation of things on the earth, or as that under which the affairs of the world will be wound up. Compare the notes at Isaiah 2:2. It does not appear, however, to be used in that sense here, but it denotes merely "future" times. The phrase "the latter days," therefore, does not exactly convey the sense of the original. It is "future" days rather than "latter" days.

Thy dream, and the visions of thy head upon thy bed - The phrase "visions of thy head" means conceptions or notions formed by the brain. It would seem from this, that, even in the time of Daniel, the brain was regarded as, in some sense, the organ of thinking, or that "thought" had its seat in the head. We are not to suppose that by the use of these different expressions Daniel meant to describe two things, or to intimate that Nebuchadnezzar had had visions which were distinct. What he saw might be described as a dream or a vision; it, in fact, had the nature of both.

Are these - "These which I now proceed to describe."

29

Daniel 2:29

開啟正文

「王啊,你在牀上想到後來的事」——旁註作「上升」;即你的意念升上來。迦勒底文作「你的意念升上來」——סלקוּ(selı̂qû)。希臘文也是如此:「你的意念升上(ἀνέβησαν)你的牀。」這裏顯然暗指意念的「上升」或「上達」;其觀念或許是,這些意念所用的是重大主題——這是我們如今以說一個人的思想「高超」、與那些「低俗」「卑下」的思想相對時所表達的同一觀念。

「要顯明日後必有的事」——從這話看來,最可能的情況是:尼布甲尼撒在牀上清醒的時刻,思想正被這題目佔據;及至睡着,那夢便嫁接於這一連串思想之上。他的思想如此被佔據,再沒有比這更可能的了。關乎繼承者的問題;可能發生的變更;別國或他自己龐大帝國諸省中發生革命的可能性——這一切,都是他的心思大概會忙於思考的題目。而且,神既定意要使他的思想特別注視那總題——即將發生於他帝國中的變更——這樣一個他的注意力大大專注於該題目的時機,便非常合宜於把神藉這異象所傳達的知識賜給他。但以理提及這一點,大概是因為:他若追溯到夢之前的那一連串思想,必大有助於堅固王對他受感動之事的信念;因為王雖忘記了那「夢」,卻未必不記得他在該題目上「清醒時」的思想。

英文原文

As for thee, O king, thy thoughts came into thy mind upon thy bed - Margin, "up;" that is, thy thoughts ascended. The Chaldee is, "thy thoughts ascended" - סלקוּ selı̂qû. So the Greek: "Thy thoughts ascended (ἀνέβησαν anebēsan) upon thy couch." There is, evidently, some allusion to the thoughts "ascending," or "going up;" and perhaps the idea is, that they were employed on important subjects - an idea which we now express by saying that one's thoughts are "elevated," as contrasted with those which are "low" and "grovelling."

What should come to pass hereafter - It would seem most probable from this, that the thoughts of Nebuchadnezzar were occupied with this subject in his waking moments on his bed, and that the dream was grafted on this train of thought when he fell asleep. Nothing is more probable than that his thoughts might be thus occupied. The question respecting his successor; the changes which might occur; the possibility of revolutions in other kingdoms, or in the provinces of his own vast empire, all were topics on which his mind would probably be employed. As God designed, too, to fix his thoughts particularly on that general subjects the changes which were to occur in his empire - such an occasion, when his attention was greatly engrossed with the subject, would be very suitable to impart the knowledge which he did by this vision. Daniel refers to this, probably, because it would do much to confirm the monarch in the belief of his inspiration, if he referred to the train of thought which had preceded the dream; as it is not improbable that the king would remember his "waking" thoughts on the subject, though his "dream" was forgotten.

30

Daniel 2:30

開啟正文

「至於我」——就我在這事上的分而言;或說,無論我在講解上顯出甚麼技巧或智慧,都不能歸功於我自己。前一節以「至於你」開始;在這一節,但以理藉「至於我」一語,把自己與王置於強烈的對比之中。他這樣作的方式,既不諂媚王的自負,也不能被視為佞臣之術,卻又是人人會採用來博取王的好感、並使王對年輕的但以理的謙遜與敬虔有崇高觀念的方式。在前一節他說,至於關乎王的事,神大大尊重他,把將要發生之事的重要暗示賜給他。照王所處的地位,人們或會以為他蒙這樣的恩並非全然不自然;但以理也沒有像論到自己時那樣說,這事的啟示臨到王,並非因為王的品性和地位中有任何可取之處。但當論到自己——一個少年;一個被擄之人;巴比倫的一個異鄉客;另一片土地的本地人——再沒有比明確地聲明這事不是因他裏面的任何東西,更自然或更恰當的了。

「這奧祕的事顯明給我,並非因我的智慧勝過一切活人」——即「這不是『憑』我勝過別人的任何智慧,也不是『因』我先前擁有或顯明的任何智慧。」這裏對「這在任何意義上、以任何方式,是因他在智慧上超人一等」的觀念,作了絕對而徹底的否認。他在這事上的一切知識,當完全追溯於神。

「乃是要使他們將那夢的講解指明給王」——旁註作「或作:為使講解得以指明」。旁註是更正確的譯法,本當採入正文。直譯是:「但(לְהֵן)是為着他們可以把講解指明給王這件事。」「指明」一詞的原文確是複數,但顯然是作非人稱用法,意思是那講解將被指明。「這是為叫他們可以把它指明」;即叫某人可以作成這事,或叫這事可以作成。謙遜與細膩豈不會引導人在此選用這樣的表達,使但以理盡可能避免提到自己嗎?主要的意念是:所要達成的宏大目的,不是要榮耀但以理或任何別的人,而是要把關乎將來之事的重要真理傳給這位異教君王,並藉着他傳給世界。

「並使你知道心裏的思念」——關乎這事;即叫他能把那在他夢中經過心思的意念召回來。這段 (Daniel 2:27-30) 乃是但以理即將向王所作重要披露的引言。這裏他完全否認靠自己的智慧想出這講解的榮譽,並把它歸於神,值得特別留意。術士們慣於把解夢和別的預卜未來的能力歸於自己的技巧和敏識,並以此要求特別的尊榮,這大概是實情。與此相反,但以理完全否認自己有任何這樣的智慧,並把他所有的技能完全歸於神。這是謙遜與敬虔之本質的一個美好例證。它把一個少年人擺在我們面前:如今有被高舉至大尊榮的展望;處處受試探,要把非凡智慧的擁有歸於自己;忽然被高舉在世上最顯赫宮廷的一切哲士之上,卻否認一切功績,並以最莊嚴的方式宣告:他即將作出的傳達中無論含有多麼深邃的智慧,絲毫都不能追溯於他自己。見本章末尾的評註(6)。

英文原文

But as for me - So far as I am concerned in this matter, or whatever skill or wisdom I may evince in the interpretation, it is not to be traced to myself. The previous verse commences with the expression "as for thee;" and in this verse, by the phrase "as for me," Daniel puts himself in strong contrast with the king. The way in which this was done was not such as to flatter the vanity of the king, and cannot be regarded as the art of the courtier, and yet it was such as would be universally adopted to conciliate his favor, and to give him an elevated idea of the modesty and piety of the youthful Daniel. In the previous verse he says, that, as to what pertained to the king, God had greatly honored him by giving him important intimations of what was yet to occur. Occupying the position which he did, it might be supposed that it would not be wholly unnatural that he should be thus favored, and Daniel does not say, as in his own case, that it was not on account of anything in the character and rank of the king that this had been communicated to him. But when he comes to speak of himself - a youth; a captive; a stranger in Babylon; a native of another land - nothing was more natural or proper than that he should state distinctly that it was not on account of anything in him that this was done.

This secret is not revealed to me for any wisdom that I have more than any living - That is, "it is not "by" any wisdom which I have above others, nor is it "on account of" any previous wisdom which I have possessed or manifested." There is an absolute and total disclaimer of the idea that it was in any sense, or in any way, on account of his own superiority in wisdom. All the knowledge which he had in the case was to be traced entirely to God.

But for their sakes that shall make known the interpretation to the king - Margin, "or, the intent that the interpretation may be made known." The margin is the more correct rendering, and should have been admitted into the text. The literal translation is, "but (להן lâhēn) on account of the thing that they might make known the interpretation to the king." The word rendered "make known" is indeed in the plural, but it is evidently used in an impersonal sense, meaning that the interpretation would be made known. "It was to the intent that they might make it known;" that is, that somebody might do it, or that it might be done. Would not modesty and delicacy lead to the choice of such an expression here, inclining Daniel to avoid, as far as possible, all mention of himself? The main thought is, that the grand object to be secured was not to glorify Daniel, or any other human being, but to communicate to this pagan monarch important truths respecting coming events, and through him to the world.

And that thou mightest know the thoughts of thy heart - In reference to this matter; that is, that he might be able to recal the thoughts which passed through his mind in the dream. This Daniel 2:27-30 is the introduction to the important disclosure which Daniel was about to make to the king. This entire disclaimer of the honor of having originated the interpretation by his own wisdom, and the ascribing of it to God, are worthy here of special attention. It is probable that the magicians were accustomed to ascribe to their own skill and sagacity the ability to interpret dreams and the other prognostics of the future, and to claim special honor on that account. In opposition to this, Daniel utterly disclaims any such wisdom himself, and attributes the skill which he has entirely to God. This is a beautiful illustration of the nature of modesty and piety. It places before us a young man, having now the prospect of being elevated to great honors; under every temptation to arrogate the possession of extraordinary wisdom to himself; suddenly exalted above all the sages of the most splendid court on earth, disclaiming all merit, and declaring in the most solemn manner that whatever profound wisdom there might be in the communication which he was about to make, it was not in the slightest degree to be traced to himself. See the remarks at the end of the chapter, (6.)

31

Daniel 2:31

開啟正文

「王啊,你看見」——旁註作「正在觀看」。旁註符合迦勒底原文。這話恰當地表達一種持續或專注的觀看。他正處於有利於見異象的狀態,或正凝神觀看,這個非凡的像便顯在他面前。比較 Daniel 7:1-2、Daniel 7:4、Daniel 7:6。這不是一個顯現片刻便即消失的東西,而是停留許久,使他可以準確地凝視它。

「看見一個大像」——迦勒底文作「一個宏偉的像」——צְלֵם חַד סַגִּיא(tselēm chad s'agı̂y')。武加大譯本如此——statua una grandis。希臘文譯本也如此——εἰκὼν μία(eikōn mia)。其目的似乎是使注意力聚焦於這一事實:雖然由如此不同的材料構成、由看似極不宜結合於同一雕像的材料構成,卻只有「一個」像。以「一個」像來代表,其觀念是:他在某幾方面看見的,乃是「同一個國」被表徵;即它將延及同樣的疆土,並在某種意義上可被視為同一帝國的延長。雖然在許多方面各不相同,卻有如此多的「同一性」,以致可以被代表為「一」。譯作「像」的字(צְלֶם,tselem)本義是「蔭」或「影」,繼而指任何「影射」或代表任何事物的東西。

這字應用於人 (Genesis 1:27),作為對神的影射或代表;即人受造時裏面有些東西與神如此相似,以致可被視為神的「像」。這字常用來指偶像——被認為是眾神的「代表」,或代表其形體,或影射其性情,如威嚴、嚴厲、溫和、苛刻、憐憫等 (Numbers 33:52;1 Samuel 6:5;2 Kings 11:18;2 Chronicles 23:17;Ezekiel 7:20;Ezekiel 16:17;Ezekiel 23:14;Amos 5:26)。這像並未被描繪為受人敬拜的偶像;從這字的用法中,也不能如布什教授所設想的那樣,認為暗指這些王國將是拜偶像的;這字是按其本有的、原初的意義使用,指某種將要「代表」或「影射」那將存在之王國的東西。像的確切「大小」並未提及,只暗示它是大的——恰當地表徵它所指的王國之「偉大」。

「這像甚高」——此處譯作「大」的字(רַב,rab)與前一句所用的不同,雖然兩字的確切分別不易斷定。兩者都表明這像具有巨大的尺寸。布什教授說得好:「古代的遺蹟充份顯明,東方各地、尤其在埃及,盛行建造巨型雕像的風氣;這些雕像通常奉獻給他們的某位神明,並與其敬拜相連。因此,如今在君王夢中呈現的對象,對他的思想來說,大概並非全然新奇的東西。」

「極其光明」——「它的光明『卓越』,或說是不尋常而值得注意的。」譯作「光明」的字(זִיו,zı̂yv)只見於但以理書。它在 Daniel 2:31;Daniel 4:36 及 Daniel 5:6、Daniel 5:9 的旁註中譯作「光明」;在 Daniel 5:6(正文)及 Daniel 2:9-10;Daniel 7:28 中譯作「面貌」。從它出現之處、特別是 Daniel 4:36 看,它顯然用來指面容中煥發的某種美或威嚴,足以使觀看者心生敬畏。此處的用詞不僅指像的臉面,而指它的整體外貌,其中有某種格外輝煌而威嚴的東西。我們只要想像一座頭部為磨光黃金、軀幹大部分為磨光白銀的巨型雕像,便能看出這話的力量。

「站在你面前」——它立在他對面,全景在望。他有機會清楚而分明地審視它。

「樣子甚是可怕」——巨大、威嚴、宏偉、可畏。這樣一個對象突然顯現,必使人心充滿恐懼。這表徵向尼布甲尼撒顯現的目的,在但以理的講解中已清楚展開。此處一般而言可以說,這樣一個巨大之像的顯現,極適合代表相繼而來的王國;而這表徵也符合古代的精神。《圖解聖經》的編者說:「在古代的錢幣和獎章上,再沒有比以人形(男或女)代表城邑和國家更常見的了。按照提示這類表號的觀念,以人形呈現的巨大之像,便是主權和統治權的極恰當的象徵;而它所由構成的材料,又最意味深長地預表這異象所預示其相繼的各帝國的特性。這最後一個觀念——以金屬表號表達事物的狀況——在但以理之前便已盛行。赫西俄德生活在但以理之前約兩個世紀,他以同樣的金屬——金、銀、銅、鐵——描述(四個)時代的相繼。」

英文原文

Thou, O king, sawest - Margin, "wast seeing." The margin is in accordance with the Chaldee. The language is properly what denotes a prolonged or attentive observation. He was in an attitude favorable to vision, or was looking with intensity, and there appeared before him this remarkable image. Compare Daniel 7:1-2, Daniel 7:4, Daniel 7:6. It was not a thing which appeared for a moment, and then vanished, but which remained so long that he could contemplate it with accuracy.

And, behold, a great image - Chaldee, "one image that was grand" - שׂגיא חד צלם tselēm chad s'agı̂y'. So the Vulgate - statua una grandis. So the Greek - εἰκὼν μία eikōn mia. The object seems to be to fix the attention on the fact that there was but "one" image, though composed of so different materials, and of materials that seemed to be so little fitted to be worked together into the same statue. The idea, by its being represented as "one," is, that it was, in some respects, "the same kingdom" that he saw symbolized: that is, that it would extend over the same countries, and could be, in some sense, regarded as a prolongation of the same empire. There was so much of "identity," though different in many respects, that it could be represented as "one." The word rendered "image" (צלם tselem) denotes properly "a shade," or "shadow," and then anything that "shadows forth," or that represents anything.

It is applied to man Genesis 1:27 as shadowing forth, or representing God; that is, there was something in man when he was created which had so far a resemblance to God that he might be regarded as an "image" of him. The word is often used to denote idols - as supposed to be a "representation" of the gods, either in their forms, or as shadowing forth their character as majestic, stern, mild, severe, merciful, etc. Numbers 33:52; 1 Samuel 6:5; 2 Kings 11:18; 2 Chronicles 23:17; Ezekiel 7:20; Ezekiel 16:17; Ezekiel 23:14; Amos 5:26. This image is not represented as an idol to be worshipped, nor in the use of the word is it to be supposed that there is an allusion, as Prof. Bush supposes, to the fact that these kingdoms would be idolatrous, but the word is used in its proper and primitive sense, to denote something which would "represent," or "shadow forth," the kingdoms which would exist. The exact "size" of the image is not mentioned. It is only suggested that it was great - a proper characteristic to represent the "greatness" of the kingdoms to which it referred.

This great image - The word here rendered "great" (רב rab) is different from that used in the previous clause, though it is not easy to determine the exact difference between the words. Both denote that the image was of gigantic dimensions. It is well remarked by Prof. Bush, that "the monuments of antiquity sufficiently evince that the humor prevailed throughout the East, and still more in Egypt, of constructing enormous statues, which were usually dedicated to some of their deities, and connected with their worship. The object, therefore, now presented in the monarch's dream was not, probably, entirely new to his thoughts."

Whose brightness was excellent - "Whose brightness "excelled," or was unusual and remarkable." The word rendered brightness (זיו zı̂yv) is found only in Daniel. It is rendered "brightness" in Daniel 2:31; Daniel 4:36, and in the margin in Daniel 5:6, Daniel 5:9; and "countenance" in Daniel 5:6 (text), and in Daniel 2:9-10; Daniel 7:28. From the places where it is found, particularly Daniel 4:36, it is clear that it is used to denote a certain beauty, or majesty, shining forth in the countenance, which was fitted to impress the beholder with awe. The term here is to be understood not merely of the face of the image, but of its entire aspect, as having something in it signally splendid and imposing. We have only to conceive of a colossal statue whose head was burnished gold, and a large part of whose frame was polished silver, to see the force of this language.

Stood before thee - It stood over against him in full view. He had an opportunity of surveying it clearly and distinctly.

And the form thereof was terrible - Vast, imposing, grand, fearful. The sudden appearance of such an object as this could not but fill the mind with terror. The design for which this representation was made to Nebuchadnezzar is clearly unfolded in the explanation which Daniel gives. It may be remarked here, in general, that such an appearance of a gigantic image was well adapted to represent successive kingdoms, and that the representation was in accordance with the spirit of ancient times. "In ancient coins and medals," says the editor of the "Pictorial Bible," "nothing is more common than to see cities and nations represented by human figures, male or female. According to the ideas which suggested such symbols, a vast image in the human figure was, therefore, a very fit emblem of sovereign power and dominion; while the materials of which it was composed did most significantly typify the character of the various empires, the succession of which was foreshown by this vision. This last idea, of expressing the condition of things by metallic symbols, was prevalent before the time of Daniel. Hesiod, who lived about two centuries before Daniel, characterizes the succession of ages (four) by the very same metals - gold, silver, brass, and iron."

32

Daniel 2:32

開啟正文

「這像的頭是精金的」——迦勒底文作「好金」——דְהַב טָב(dehab ṭâb)——即精純、無雜質的金。這巨大雕像的整個頭部,看來完全由純金構成。倘若「整個」像都是金造的,反而不會如此奪目——因為以這金屬建造巨像並非罕見。比較 Daniel 3:1。這像的非凡特點,在於它由不同的材料構成,其中有些極少、或從不用於這類結構,而全都具有特殊的意義。關乎這部分雕像的意義、並這金頭與尼布甲尼撒本人之間的相似,見 Daniel 2:37-38 的註釋。

「胸膛和膀臂是銀的」——譯作「胸膛」的字(חֲדִין(chădı̂y))是複數,符合希伯來文的慣常用法——人體的許多肢體常以複數表達,如 פָּנִים(pânı̂ym)——「臉面」等。這用法在自然界有其根據:人體許多部位具有成雙的形態。此處所代表的身體部位,顯然是軀幹前面的上部——我們觀看人體時最為突出的部分。僅次於頭,它是最重要的部分,因為它容納大部分要害器官。這自然代表着某種程度的遜色,也代表着承繼的觀念。「銀與金相比價值較低,自然暗示它所表徵之對象的品性有某種程度的衰落或退化;往下各部分也是如此,材料愈趨卑賤,我們自然推論其所表徵的對象,在某種意義上也照樣遞減。」——布什教授,見該處。關乎這所代表的國、並這表徵的恰當性,見 Daniel 2:39 的註釋。

「肚腹和腰是銅的」——旁註作「腰」。不必對此處用詞作過細的推究。「肚腹」一詞無疑指腹部外面可見的部位。正文譯作「腰」的字,旁註作「體側」。它與前一節的「胸膛」一樣是複數,理由相同。這個希伯來字(יָרֵךְ(yârêk))在聖經中通常譯作「腿」(Genesis 24:2、Genesis 24:9;Genesis 32:25 (26)、31、32 (32, 33) 等),但也常譯作「旁邊」(Exodus 32:27;Exodus 40:22、Exodus 40:24;Leviticus 1:11;Numbers 3:29 等)。照格塞尼烏斯的說法,它指「始於脊柱末端、延伸至小腿的厚而成雙的肉部」。這是古時佩劍之處 (Exodus 32:27;Judges 3:16、Judges 3:21;Psalm 45:3 (4));也是表達哀慟或義憤時拍打之處 (Jeremiah 31:19;Ezekiel 21:12 (17))。比較荷馬《伊利亞特》xii. 162、xv. 397;《奧德賽》xiii. 198;西塞羅《演說家》(Orat.) 80;昆體良(Quinc.) xi. 3。此處譯作「腰」並非不當;銅製的部分乃是胸膛與小腿之間的部分,即從胸延伸至膝。這字在別處也用來指會幕金燈臺的幹或主幹 (Exodus 25:31;Exodus 37:17;Numbers 8:4)。

「是銅的」——一種較次的金屬,代表一個權勢或卓越程度較次的國。關乎這所代表的國,見 Daniel 2:39 的註釋。

英文原文

This image's head was of fine gold - Chaldee, "good gold" - טב דהב dehab ṭâb - that is, fine, pure, unalloyed. The whole head of the figure, colossal as it was, appeared to be composed wholly of this. Had the "whole" image been made of gold, it would not have been so striking - for it was not uncommon to construct vast statues of this metal. Compare Daniel 3:1. But the remarkable peculiarity of this image was, that it was composed of different materials, some of which were seldom or never used in such a structure, and all of which had a peculiar significancy. On the significancy of this part of the figure, and the resemblance between this head of gold and Nebuchadnezzar himself, see the notes at Daniel 2:37-38.

His breast and his arms of silver - The word rendered "breast" (חדין chădı̂y) is in the plural number, in accordance with common usage in the Hebrew, by which several members of the human body are often expressed in the plural; as פנים pânı̂ym - "faces," etc. There is a foundation for such a usage in nature, in the two-fold form of many of the portions of the human body. The portion of the body which is here represented is obviously the upper portion of the front part - what is prominently visible when we look at the human frame. Next to the head it is the most important part, as it embraces most of the vital organs. Some degree of inferiority, as well as the idea of succession, would be naturally represented by this. "The inferior value of silver as compared with gold will naturally suggest some degree of decline or degeneracy in the character of the subject represented by the metal; and so in other members, as we proceed downward, as the material becomes continually baser, we naturally infer that the subject deteriorates, in some sense, in the like manner." - Professor Bush, in loc. On the kingdom represented by this, and the propriety of this representation, see the notes at Daniel 2:39.

His belly and his thighs of brass - Margin, "sides." It is not necessary to enter minutely into an examination of the words here used. The word "belly" denotes, unquestionably, the regions of the abdomen as externally visible. The word rendered "thighs" in the text is rendered "sides" in the margin. It is, like the word "breast" in the previous verse, in the plural number and for the same reason. The Hebrew word (ירך yârêk) is commonly rendered "thigh" in the Scriptures (Genesis 24:2, Genesis 24:9; Genesis 32:25 (26), 31, 32(32, 33), et al.), though it is also frequently rendered "side," Exodus 32:27; Exodus 40:22, Exodus 40:24; Leviticus 1:11; Numbers 3:29, et al. According to Gesenius, it denotes "the thick and double fleshy member which commences at the bottom of the spine, and extends to the lower legs." It is that part on which the sword was formerly worn, Exodus 32:27; Judges 3:16, Judges 3:21; Psalm 45:3 (4). It is also that part which was smitten, as an expression of mourning or of indignation, Jeremiah 31:19; Ezekiel 21:12 (17). Compare Hom. Iliad xii. 162, xv. 397; Odyssey xiii. 198; Cic. 150: "Orat." 80; "Quinc." xi. 3. It is not improperly here rendered "thighs," and the portion of the figure that was of brass was that between the breast and the lower legs, or extended from the breast to the knees. The word is elsewhere employed to denote the shaft or main trunk of the golden candlestick of the tabernacle, Exodus 25:31; Exodus 37:17; Numbers 8:4.

Of brass - An inferior metal, and denoting a kingdom of inferior power or excellence. On the kingdom represented by this, see the notes at Daniel 2:39.

33

Daniel 2:33

開啟正文

「腿是鐵的」——下肢自膝至踝的部分。這無疑是「腿」字在英文中的慣常含義,也顯然是此處原文的含義。鐵被視為次於前面所提的任何一種金屬,卻極適合表徵某一特定種類的國——在某些方面較不高貴,卻堅韌、強大,適於藉征服踐踏世界。關乎這一點的應用,見 Daniel 2:40 的註釋。

「腳是半鐵半泥的」——至於牠的腳;或說就牠的腳而論,一部分是鐵、一部分是泥——這混合表徵巨大的力量,與易碎脆弱之物相結合。此處譯作「泥」的字(חֲסַף(chăsaph))除本章外未見於別處,且總是譯作「泥」(Daniel 2:33-35、Daniel 2:41(兩次)、42、43(兩次)、45)。在幾處 (Daniel 2:41、Daniel 2:43),還加上「爛泥」的形容詞。這似乎暗示它不是「燒過或烤過的泥」、或「陶器」,如布什教授所設想的,而是自然狀態的泥。其觀念似乎是:那骨架,可以說,是鐵的,泥被揉入其中、填滿空隙,以致構成一幅力量與軟弱相結合的圖像。這極適合代表一個有許多恆久要素、卻又混有使之軟弱之物的國——強大者與易被壓碎者相混;能發出巨大的力量、承受巨大的衝擊,卻又有如此軟弱和衰敗的要素,以致可能被傾覆。關乎這一點的應用,見 Daniel 2:41-43 的註釋。

英文原文

His legs of iron - The portion of the lower limbs from the knees to the ankles. This is undoubtedly the usual meaning of the English word "legs," and it as clearly appears to be the sense of the original word here. Iron was regarded as inferior to either of the other metals specified, and yet was well adapted to denote a kingdom of a particular kind - less noble in some respects, and yet hardy, powerful, and adapted to tread down the world by conquest. On the application of this, see the notes at Daniel 2:40.

His feet part of iron and part of clay - As to his feet; or in respect to his feet, they were partly of iron and partly of clay - a mixture denoting great strength, united with what is fragile and weak. The word rendered "clay" in this place (חסף chăsaph) is found nowhere else except in this chapter, and is always rendered "clay," Daniel 2:33-35, Daniel 2:41 (twice), 42, 43 (twice), 45. In some instances Daniel 2:41, Daniel 2:43, the epithet "miry" is applied to it. This would seem to imply that it was not "burnt or baked clay," or "earthenware," as Professor Bush supposes, but clay in its natural state. The idea would seem to be, that the framework, so to speak, was iron, with clay worked in, or filling up the interstices, so as to furnish an image of strength combined with what is weak. That it would be well adapted represent a kingdom that had many elements of permanency in it, yet that was combined with things that made it weak - a mixture of what was powerful with what was liable to be crushed; capable of putting forth great efforts, and of sustaining great shocks, and yet having such elements of feebleness and decay as to make it liable to be overthrown. For the application of this, see the notes at Daniel 2:41-43.

34

Daniel 2:34

開啟正文

「你看見」——迦勒底文作「你正在觀看」;即你繼續觀看,暗示異象持續了相當時候。它不是顯現後忽然消失,而是停留許久,使他有機會仔細觀察。

「見有一塊非人手鑿出來的石頭」——即從一山或一岡鑿出 (Daniel 2:45)。這觀念在拉丁文和希臘文譯本中都有表達。這異象似乎是:一座巨像「立於平原上」、在山附近,屹立不動;直到藉着某種看不見的媒介、以無法解釋的方式,一塊石頭從山脫落,撞擊那像。此處旁註作「不在手中」。然而迦勒底文更正確的譯法是正文的譯法,直譯為「一塊石頭被鑿出,不是憑手」——בִּידַיִן(bı̂ydayı̂n);或更準確地說,「一塊石頭被鑿出,不在手中」,這樣,它不在或不是憑「手」的事實,所指毋寧是它非由手拋出,而非它從山脫落的方式。根本的觀念是:在這事上,手的作為完全沒有出現。那石頭似乎是自動的。它從山脫落,彷彿賦有生命,擊打那像,把它毀滅。譯作「石頭」的字(אֶבֶן('eben))沒有判定石頭的「大小」;但整體的陳述似乎暗示它體積不大。它擊中那像的「腳」,而它自己「成了」一座大山 (Daniel 2:35)——這一切都似乎暗示它起初不大。使王愈發驚奇的是:這樣大小的一塊石頭,竟足以推翻如此巨大的雕像,並把它磨成粉碎。顯然要使王留意、並使這異象如此重大而非凡的要點,乃是這些:(a) 那像的巨大體積和堅固;(b) 一塊不大的石頭,竟被看見自行從山脫落,向那像移動;(c) 它竟完全摧毀那巨大形體,把它磨成粉末;(d) 之後,這塊微小的石頭竟神秘地增大,直到充滿天下。還當補充:這異象似乎不是一塊石頭從山坡脫落、靠重力滾下山,而是一塊石頭脫落之後,朝那像移動過去,彷彿被一隻手拋出,只是那手看不見。這將非常鮮明而恰當地表達這樣的觀念:某樣起源看似微小的東西,被一種看不見的原因推動,以巨大的力量作用於一個龐大的對象,其所憑的媒介,不能以通常運行的原因來解釋。關乎這一點的應用和貼切性,見 Daniel 2:44-45 的註釋。

「打在這像的腳上」——此處所用的字(מְחָא(mechâ'))意為「擊打」或「敲擊」,不論是一擊還是連續多次。希伯來文對應字(מָחָא(mâchâ'))一律用於指「拍手」;即兩手合擊 (Psalm 98:8;Isaiah 55:12;Ezekiel 25:6)。這個迦勒底字只用在此處和 Daniel 2:35(指擊打那像),以及 Daniel 4:35 (32)(譯作「攔阻」——「無人能攔住他的手」)。此處的上下文和整體陳述,似乎要求持續或延長的擊打、或連續打擊的含義,而非單一次衝撞。那大像不僅被擊倒,隨後還有一個獨立於跌倒本身所能產生之效果的「碾碎」過程。單是跌倒只能使它碎成大塊或碎片;但這持續的擊打把它化為粉末。因此,這不僅暗示單一次震擊或猛擊,而是某種持續運行的原因,直到被推翻之物被徹底毀滅,如同一座巨像被磨成難以觸覺的細粉。那打在腳上的「第一次衝撞」使巨大的軀體必然倒下;但要成就全部的效果,還需要更長的過程。比較 Daniel 2:44-45 的註釋。

「把這像砸得粉碎」——在 Daniel 2:35,其意念是「他們就如夏天禾場上的糠秕」。意思不是那像碎成「碎片」,而是被「磨得極細」——化為粉末——以致可以被風吹散。這是迦勒底字(דְּקַק(deqaq))、也是希伯來字(דָּקַק(dâqaq))的含義。見 Exodus 32:20:「他將他們所鑄的牛犢用火焚燒,磨得粉碎。」Deuteronomy 9:21:「我把那叫你們犯罪所鑄的牛犢用火焚燒,又搗碎磨得很細,以致細如灰塵。」Isaiah 41:15:「你要打碎磨平眾山,使岡陵如同糠秕。」2 Kings 23:15:「他將邱壇焚燒,打碎成灰。」2 Chronicles 34:4:「他們拆毀邱壇……把偶像磨成灰,撒在向他們獻祭之人的墳上。」比較 Exodus 30:36;2 Chronicles 34:7;2 Kings 23:6。從這些經文看,這字的大概含義顯然是把東西磨成細塵或粉末,以致容易被風吹散。

英文原文

Thou sawest - Chaldee, "Thou wast seeing;" that is, thou didst continue to behold, implying that the vision was of somewhat long continuance. It did not appear and then suddenly vanish, but it remained so long that he had an opportunity of careful observation.

Till that a stone was cut out without hands - That is, from a mountain or hill, Daniel 2:45. This idea is expressed in the Latin and the Greek version. The vision appears to have been that of a colossal image "standing on a plain" in the vicinity of a mountain, standing firm, until, by some unseen agency, and in an unaccountable manner, a stone became detached from the mountain, and was made to impinge against it. The margin here is, "which was not in his hands." The more correct rendering of the Chaldee, however, is that in the text, literally, "a stone was cut out which was not by hands" - בידין bı̂ydayı̂n: or perhaps still more accurately, "a stone was cut out which was not in hands," so that the fact that it was not in or by "hands" refers rather to its not being projected by hands than to the manner of its being detached from the mountain. The essential idea is, that the agency of hands did not appear at all in the case. The stone seemed to be self-moved. It became detached from the mountain, and, as if instinct with life, struck the image and demolished it. The word rendered "stone" ( אבן 'eben) determines nothing as to the "size" of the stone, but the whole statement would seem to imply that it was not of large dimensions. It struck upon "the feet" of the image, and it "became" itself a great mountain Daniel 2:35 - all which would seem to imply that it was at first not large. What increased the astonishment of the monarch was, that a stone of such dimensions should have been adequate to overthrow so gigantic a statue, and to grind it to powder. The points on which it was clearly intended to fix the attention of the monarch, and which made the vision so significant and remarkable, were these:

(a) the colossal size and firmness of the image;

(b) the fact that a stone, not of large size, should be seen to be selfdetached from the mountain, and to move against the image;

(c) the fact that it should completely demolish and pulverize the colossal figure; and

(d) the fact that then this stone of inconsiderable size should be itself mysteriously augmented until it filled the world.

It should be added, that the vision appears not to have been that of a stone detached from the side of a hill, and rolling down the mountain by the force of gravitation, but that of a stone detached, and then moving off toward the image as if it had been thrown from a hand, though the hand was unseen. This would very strikingly and appropriately express the idea of something, apparently small in its origin, that was impelled by a cause that was unseen, and that bore with mighty force upon an object of colossal magnitude, by an agency that could not be explained by the causes that usually operate. For the application and pertinency of this, see the notes at Daniel 2:44-45.

Which smote the image upon his feet - The word here used (מחא mechâ') means, to "strike," to "smite," without reference to the question whether it is a single blow, or whether the blow is often repeated. The Hebrew word (מחא mâchâ') is uniformly used as refering to "the clapping of the hands;" that is, smiting them together, Psalm 98:8; Isaiah 55:12; Ezekiel 25:6. The Chaldee word is used only here and in Daniel 2:35, referring to the smiting of the image, and in Daniel 4:35 (32), where it is rendered "stay" - "none can stay his hand." The connection here, and the whole statement, would seem to demand the sense of a continued or prolonged smiting, or of repeated blows, rather than a single concussion. The great image was not only thrown down, but there was a subsequent process of "comminution," independent of what would have been produced by the fall. A fall would only have broken it into large blocks or fragments; but this continued smiting reduced it to powder. This would imply, therefore, not only a single shock, or violent blow, but some cause continuing to operate until what had been overthrown was effectually destroyed, like a vast image reduced to impalpable powder. The "first concussion" on the feet made it certain that the colossal frame would fall; but there was a longer process necessary before the whole effect should be accomplished. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:44-45.

And brake them to pieces - In Daniel 2:35, the idea is, "they became like the chaff of the summer threshing-floors." The meaning is not that the image was broken to "fragments," but that it was "beaten fine" - reduced to powder - so that it might be scattered by the wind. This is the sense of the Chaldee word (דקק deqaq), and of the Hebrew word also (דקק dâqaq). See Exodus 32:20 : "And he took the calf which they had made, and burned it in the fire, and ground it to powder." Deuteronomy 9:21 : "and I took your sin, the calf which ye had made, and burnt it with fire, and stamped it, and ground it very small, even until it was as small as dust." Isaiah 41:15 : "thou shalt thresh the mountains and "beat them small," and shalt make the hills as chaff." 2 Kings 23:15 : "he burnt the high place, and "stamped" it "small" to powder." 2 Chronicles 34:4 : "and they brake down the altars, etc., and "made dust" of them, and strewed it upon the graves of them that had sacrificed unto them." Compare Exodus 30:36; 2 Chronicles 34:7; 2 Kings 23:6. From these passages it is clear that the general meaning of the word is that of reducing anything to fine dust or powder, so that it may be easily blown about by the wind.

35

Daniel 2:35

開啟正文

「於是金、銀、銅、鐵、泥都一同砸得粉碎,如同夏天禾場上的糠秕」——譯作「一同」的字(כְּחַדָּה(kachădâh)),我們的譯者似乎理解為指「時間」;指事情同時作成。然而更按字面的解釋是「如同一個」;即「它們被磨碎如同一體」,指境況的同一。它們全被化為一種不分彼此的混體;那混體中原有的材料再也無法分辨,都要一同被風吹去。這字的字面意義(חַד(chad)與 חֲדָה(chădâh))是「一」或「第一」。Ezra 4:8「上了一道奏本」;Ezra 5:13「在古列元年」;Ezra 6:2「一卷」;Daniel 2:9「你們只有一道命令」;Daniel 3:19「比尋常更加七倍」等。與介詞(כְּ(k))連用時,意為「如同一個」,如希伯來文 כְּאֶחָד(ke'echâd)——Ecclesiastes 11:6;2 Chronicles 5:13;Ezra 2:64;Ezra 3:9;Isaiah 65:25。「夏天禾場上的糠秕」一語,指東方揚穀的方式。這是在露天進行的,通常在高處,用杴把打過的穀拋向空中,風便把糠秕吹散。這樣的糠秕,自然成了任何輕飄易散之物的表徵。見 Isaiah 30:24;Matthew 3:12 的註釋。

「被風吹散,無處可尋」——它們如糠秕般完全消散。糠秕似乎不再有任何去處,被吹到無人知道的地方;照樣,這裏的圖像標示它所指的權勢被完全消滅。

「打碎這像的石頭變成一座大山,充滿天下」——王心中在此所見的異象乃是:從山鑿出的那石頭起初很小,而當他凝視之時,它膨脹為更大的體積,直到成為一座巨大的山——一座充滿全地的山。大概正是這一點,比別的更激起他的驚奇:一塊起初如此小的石頭,竟自行增大到超過它所從出的山,直到佔滿視野中的一切地方。這事的一切都如此非凡而不尋常,難怪他無法解釋。我們如今已把這異象本身、如它顯在君王心中那樣,描述完畢。若異象到此為止,顯然它必難以解釋,真正的含義也許永遠不會被提出。然而我們有但以理的講解,使其目的毫無疑問;這講解也要把人的思想帶進歷史中一些最重大、最非凡的事件。他所說的一部分已經應驗;一部分尚未成就;而仔細解明他對異象含義的陳述,必引導我們的思想到引入基督教時代的一些最重要的歷史事件,並到論及未來之事的陳述中更重大的事件。

英文原文

Then was the iron, the clay, the brass, the silver, and the gold broken to pieces together, and became like the chaff of the summer threshing-floor - The word rendered "together" (כצרה kachădâh) our translators would seem to have understood as referring to "time;" to its being done simultaneously. The more literal interpretation, however, is, "as one;" that is, "they were beaten small as one," referring to identity of condition. They were all reduced to one indiscriminate mass; to such a mass that the original materials could no longer be distinguished, and would all be blown away together. The literal meaning of the word (חד chad used and חדה chădâh) is, "one," or "first." Ezra 4:8, "wrote a letter;" Ezra 5:13, "in the first year of Cyrus;" Ezra 6:2, "a roll;" Daniel 2:9; "there is but one decree for you;" Daniel 3:19, "heat the furnace one seven times hotter," etc. United with the preposition (כ k) it means "as one," like the Hebrew כאחד ke'echâd) - Ecclesiastes 11:6; 2 Chronicles 5:13; Ezra 2:64; Ezra 3:9; Isaiah 65:25. The phrase "chaff of the summer threshing-floors" refers to the mode of winnowing grain in the East. This was done in the open air, usually on an elevated place, by throwing the grain, when thrashed, into the air with a shovel, and the wind thus drove away the chaff. Such chaff, therefore, naturally became an emblem of anything that was light, and that would be easily dissipated. See the notes at Isaiah 30:24; Matthew 3:12.

And the wind carried them away, that no place was found for them - They were entirely dissipated like chaff. As that seems to have no longer any place, but is carried we know not where, so the figure here would denote an entire annihilation of the power to which it refers.

And the stone that smote the image became a great mountain, and filled the whole earth - The vision which was before the mind of the king as here represented was, that the stone which was cut out of the mountain was at first small, and that while he contemplated it, it swelled to larger dimensions, until it became an immense mountain - a mountain that filled the whole land. It was this which, perhaps more than anything else, excited his wonder, that a stone, at first of so small dimensions, should of itself so increase as to surpass the size of the mountain from which it was cut, until it occupied every place in view. Everything about it was so remarkable and unusual, that it was no wonder that he could not explain it. We have now gone over a description of the literal vision as it appeared to the mind of the monarch. Had it been left here, it is clear that it would have been of difficult interpretation, and possibly the true explanation might never have been suggested. We have, however, an exposition by Daniel, which leaves no doubt as to its design, and which was intended to carry the mind forward into some of the most important and remarkable events of history. A portion of his statement has been fulfilled; a part remains still unaccomplished, and a careful exposition of his account of the meaning of the vision will lead our thoughts to some of the most important historical events which have occurred in introducing the Christian dispensation, and to events still more important in the statement of what is yet to come.

36

Daniel 2:36

開啟正文

「那夢就是這樣,我們必在王面前講解那夢」——但以理在此以自己的名、並以他同伴的名發言。所以他說「我們必將夢的講解告訴王」。這異象的含義既是為着答應他們聯合的懇求 (Daniel 2:18) 而賜給他的,那麼,但以理若把啟示的全部功勞歸於自己,便不僅違反謙遜的法則,也是不公的僭取。雖然他是唯一向王說話的人,他卻似乎有意叫人明白:神所賜的尊榮並非他一人獨享,他也願意他的同伴得着應有的記念。比較 Daniel 2:49。

英文原文

This is the dream; and we will tell the interpretation thereof before the king - Daniel here speaks in his own name, and in the name of his companions. Hence, he says, "we will tell the interpretation." It was in answer to their united supplications Daniel 2:18, that this meaning of the vision had been made known to him; and it would not only have been a violation of the rules of modesty, but an unjust assumption, if Daniel had claimed the whole credit of the revelation to himself. Though he was the only one who addressed the king, yet he seems to have desired that it might be understood that he was not alone in the honor which God had conferred, and that he wished that his companions should be had in just remembrance. Compare Daniel 2:49.

37

Daniel 2:37

開啟正文

「王啊,你是諸王之王」——「諸王之王」是希伯來語法,指一位至高的君王,或一位有別的王向其進貢的王 (Ezra 7:12;Ezekiel 26:7)。因此,這稱號以卓越的方式應用於神的兒子 (Revelation 17:14;Revelation 19:16)。此處的意思是,尼布甲尼撒統管向他進貢的眾王眾侯,或說他是地上眾王中最傑出的。他所揮動的權杖,事實上延伸到許多曾經獨立為國的邦國;此處加給他的稱號,並非有意諂媚君王,而是對一個無可置疑之事實的簡單陳述。凡與事實相符的稱號,但以理都不會扣留;正如凡與事實相符、足以使君王謙卑的陳述,他也不會扣留一樣。

「因為天上的神已將國……賜給你」——但以理一方面給他一個本身就可能助長君王驕傲的稱號,一方面又小心提醒他:他持有這稱號,並非憑自己的任何智慧或能力。是那位真神把這廣大疆域的主權賜給他;而這異象的目的之一,正是要向他顯明:他的權力是憑神的旨意持有的,神也可以隨自己的喜悅使它過去。正是因為忘記了這一點、並因這忘記而生的驕傲,導致了這位狂傲君王所遭的可悲災禍,如 Daniel 4 所記。

英文原文

Thou, O King, art a king of kings - The phrase "king of kings" is a Hebraism, to denote a supreme monarch, or one who has other kings under him as tributary, Ezra 7:12; Ezekiel 26:7. As such it is applied by way of eminence to the Son of God, in Revelation 17:14; Revelation 19:16. As here used, it means that Nebuchadnezzar ruled over tributary kings and princes, or that he was the most eminent of the kings of the earth. The scepter which he swayed was, in fact, extended over many nations that were once independent kingdoms, and the title here conferred on him was not one that was designed to flatter the monarch, but was a simple statement of what was an undoubted truth. Daniel would not withhold any title that was in accordance with reality, as he did not withhold any communication in accordance with reality that was adapted to humble the monarch.

For the God of heaven hath given thee a kingdom ... - At the same time that Daniel gave him a title which might in itself have ministered to the pride of the monarch, he is careful to remind him that he held this title in virtue of no wisdom or power of his own. It was the true God who had conferred on him the sovereignty of these extensive realms, and it was one of the designs of this vision to show him that he held his power at his will, and that at his pleasure he could cause it to pass away. It was the forgetfulness of this, and the pride resulting from that forgetfulness, which led to the melancholy calamity which befel this haughty monarch, as recorded in Daniel 4.

38

Daniel 2:38

開啟正文

「凡世人所住之地的走獸,並天空的飛鳥,他都交付你手」——這顯然是籠統的說法,不應按字面強解。其用意是說他統管全世界;即當時所知的世界。這是聖經中應用於巴比倫、波斯、希臘和羅馬諸國的慣用語。如此,在 Daniel 2:39,這些國中的第三國——希臘——將「掌管天下」。比較 Daniel 8:5:「我正思想的時候,見有一隻公山羊從西而來,遍行全地。」論羅馬帝國也是如此,在 Daniel 7:23:「第四獸必吞吃全地。」說他的國囊括田野的走獸和空中的飛鳥,乃是一種有力的說法,意即他作王統管全世界。關乎巴比倫王帝國版圖的類似描述,見 Jeremiah 27:4-8:「要吩咐他們對他們的主人如此說:萬軍之耶和華以色列的神如此說……我用大能和伸出來的膀臂,創造大地和地上的人民、牲畜,我看給誰相宜,就把地給誰。現在我將這些地都交給我僕人巴比倫王尼布甲尼撒的手,我也將田野的走獸給他使用。列國都必服事他和他的兒子和他孫子,直到他本國的日期來到……那一國不肯把頸項放在巴比倫王的軛下,我必用刀劍、饑荒、瘟疫刑罰那國,直到我藉巴比倫王的手將他們毀滅。」

在但以理所指的時候,尼布甲尼撒的權杖實際統管着這一切疆域,世界實質上被置於一個元首之下。牛頓主教說:「古東方的歷史幾乎全部亡佚;但異教史家尚有些斷片存留,論到這位強大的征服者和他廣大的帝國。柏洛沙斯(見約瑟夫斯《駁阿皮安》(Contra Apion) 卷一第19節)說,他使埃及、敘利亞、腓尼基、阿拉伯臣服,他的功業超過了以前一切迦勒底王和巴比倫王。斯特拉波斷言,這位迦勒底王比赫拉克勒斯更負盛名;他遠征直達赫拉克勒斯柱,率軍從西班牙進入色雷斯和本都。但他的帝國雖然幅員遼闊,卻不長久;因為它亡於他的孫子伯沙撒,在這預言賜下之後不足七十年,在尼布甲尼撒死後也不過二十三年。」——牛頓,《論預言》,頁186、187。

「你就是那金頭」——像中所見的金頭,代表你這龐大帝國的君王。與將要繼你的諸王相比,你如同金與銀、銅、鐵相比;或說,與你的國相比,他們的國將如銀、銅、鐵之於金。早期常以不同的金屬比喻世界的不同時代。比較 Daniel 2:31 的註釋。關乎我們面前的這句話——「你就是那金頭」——當注意:它大概不應僅限於君王本人,而是論到他作為那帝國的元首;作為國家的代表;作為那王朝的化身。其意是:巴比倫帝國,照他治下的情形,與將要繼起的諸國相比,正像像中的金頭與構成其餘部分的較次金屬相比。但以理作為解夢者,並沒有說明相似之處何在,也沒有說明他的國在哪幾方面可與將要繼起之國相比擬為金。就我們如今所知那君王生平和治世事跡的稀少細節,或許不能如人所願那樣清楚地看出相似之處何在、或加給他這稱號的全部恰當性。就如今所能見的,相似之處似乎在以下幾方面:

(一)就他為元首的帝國本身而論——它立於其他諸國之首,是這一系列中的第一個。這確實不是世上第一個王國;但此處的目的不是要記述地上一切的帝國,而是要取世界「當時的樣子」,追尋那將要發生的相繼變化,以預備那最終要遍滿全地之國的設立。就這目的而觀,稱巴比倫帝國為「頭」無疑是恰當的。它不僅在時間上先於它們,而且所處的關係,使其他諸國在某種意義上可被視為它的繼承者;即「它們要接續它,向世界揮動普遍的權杖」。在這方面,它們也與巴比倫相似。在此所指的時候,尼布甲尼撒揮動權杖的統治權,居於列國之首;是異教世界的中央勢力;是唯一能自稱普世的帝國。很長一段時期,巴比倫王國隸屬於亞述;當尼尼微還是亞述帝國的京都時,巴比倫是一個王國的首邑,大體上從屬於亞述;直到尼布甲尼撒的直接前任尼波帕拉薩,使巴比倫王國脫離亞述獨立,並把帝國的座位遷到巴比倫。這約在主前626年。見《世界通史》(Universal History),卷三頁412-415。尼布甲尼撒承受了這強大的王國,把自己的兵器帶到遙遠的地方;征服了印度、推羅和埃及;而且看來還有北非全境,遠至赫拉克勒斯柱;除了無關緊要的例外,當時已知的世界都服從他。

(二)「金頭」的稱號,或許是因他京都的輝煌和宮廷的宏偉而加給他的。在 Isaiah 14:4,巴比倫被稱為「金城」。見該處的註釋。在 Isaiah 13:19,它被稱為「列國的榮耀,迦勒底人所誇耀的華美」。在 Isaiah 47:5,它被稱為「列國的主母」。在 Jeremiah 51:13,它被稱為「多有財寶」的;在 Jeremiah 51:41,被稱為「全地所讚美的」。在世俗作家中,巴比倫也有類似的稱呼。如此,在埃斯庫羅斯《波斯人》(Aesch. Per.) 51,提到 Βαβυλὼν ἡ πολύχρυσος(Babulōn hē poluchrusos)——「黃金眾多的巴比倫」。尼布甲尼撒的征服,使他能把列國的戰利品運到他的京都,使它富庶超過地上任何別的城。於是,他致力於裝飾一座配作普世帝國之首的城,並成功地使它華美到被視為世界奇觀之一。他裝飾並加強京都的大工,包括:第一,建造城中巨大的城牆;第二,比魯斯塔;第三,空中花園。關乎這些的完整描述,見普里多《沿革》(Connections),卷一頁232以下。

(三)這稱號或許是因與將要繼他的諸國相比而加給他的。在某幾方面——版圖和權力——其中一國或數國,如羅馬,可能超越他的;但適合它們的稱號不是金,它們最好以較次的金屬來代表。如此,瑪代波斯國不如巴比倫輝煌,以銀代表更好;馬其頓國雖在征服上更著名,卻不夠宏偉,以銅代表更好;羅馬雖然最終在征服上更廣、在權力上更強,其著稱卻在力量而非輝煌,以鐵代表更好。在宏偉上——若非在權力上——巴比倫超越它們一切;因此,「金頭」這稱號是恰當的。

(四)這稱號中,或許也暗指那君王本人的品格。在 Jeremiah 27:6,他被稱為「我的僕人」;顯然,神定意在他身上、在神的管制之下,成就一項輝煌的使命,並為彌賽亞的來臨預備世界。他雖然作君王驕傲狂妄,但他個人的品格,與這些相繼興起諸國中許多繼他而起者相比,仍是可稱許的。他的征服雖多,他作為征服者的生涯卻不像許多別的戰士那樣以殘忍為標記。他不僅僅是一個征服者。他也愛好和平的技藝。他設法美化他的京都,使它在外表的宏偉上、並在他匯聚於此的人才上,真正成為世界的首都。連耶路撒冷他也沒有徹底毀滅;他既戰勝了它,把他想用來美化自己京都的東西移去之後,仍有意使它作他疆域中一個重要行省的次級首邑,並在城中原有君王的近親中立了一人登位。

但此處的稱號和尼布甲尼撒的治世,與繼起的諸國一樣,主要當從它們與救贖的關係上來看。在視一切事件都包括在神永恆旨意之內的心思中,正是從這一方面,歷史的研究才成為最饒有興味的;而這些王國的歷史之所以被引入受感動的著作,無疑正是着眼於此。一切歷史都可從兩方面觀看:它屬世的影響;並它與世界救贖的關係。就前一方面,它有重大而重要的用途。它為政治家提供教訓;顯示社會的進步;例證罪惡和不道德的後果、以及混亂、野心和戰爭的禍害;記錄並保存藝術上的發明;顯明甚麼是公民政府的最佳方法、甚麼最有益於一民的幸福——它的價值怎樣高估也不為過。

但正是在它與救贖人類之工的關係上,歷史才獲得其主要的價值;因此,聖卷才如此多地論及早期各國的歷史。每一國家的興衰;往日所發生的征服和挫敗,都可能與人類的救贖有重大的關聯——或為使世界處於合宜的位置、迎接和平之君的來臨,或以某種方式為福音最終的得勝預備道路。這觀點給歷史一個新而重要的面貌。它成為地上一切愛人類、渴望其蒙救贖的人、並天上的一切,都深切關注的對象。每一位君王;每一個戰士;每一位政治家;每一個以他的口才、勇氣或德行對人類的進步有所貢獻、或在世事進程中扮演過重要角色的人,都成為我們能以強烈情感注視的對象;而對每一個這樣的人,一個有趣的探究便是:他作了甚麼,有助於為中保救恩計劃的引入預備道路,或助其推行於世界。就這一點而論,我們面前這位君王的品格,似乎是在神護理的統管之下被興起,要成就以下諸事:

(1) 對背道之神百姓的眾多拜偶像之行,施行「懲罰」。見耶利米書全卷。因此,他率軍進入巴勒斯坦地;他掃蕩那民,把他們擄去;他焚燒聖殿,毀滅京都,使那地荒涼。

(2) 他是神手中的工具,有效地煉淨猶太民族脫離拜偶像之罪。他們被擄,正是特為這罪;而懲罰的目的,再沒有比這事例更好地達成的了。這管教是有效的。猶太民族此後再未陷入拜偶像。即使那國中有過成為拜偶像者的個人——這也沒有確實的證據——但作為一個民族,他們蒙保守脫離了它。此後二千五百多年過去了;他們在各地作流亡者和被放逐者;他們因宗教受逼迫、被譏誚、被壓迫;他們處於一切可能的誘因之下,要隨從四圍的宗教;然而,作為自稱敬拜列祖之神耶和華的人,他們持守了自己的純正;應許和威嚇、盼望和恐懼、生和死,都不足以迫使希伯來人向偶像屈膝。

(3) 尼布甲尼撒在救贖工作上似乎要成就的另一個目的,乃是為彌賽亞的來臨,把列國聚集在一個元首之下。在論羅馬帝國與這工作的關係時(見 Daniel 2:40-43 的註釋)將可看到,這樣作有重要的理由。為預備這事,這樣的王國相繼各向全世界揮動權杖;及至彌賽亞來到,道路已備,新的宗教便能輕易而迅速地傳到地上最遠的地方。

英文原文

And wheresoever the children of men dwell, the beasts of the field, and the fowls of the heavens, hath he given into thy hand - This is evidently general language, and is not to be pressed literally. It is designed to say that he ruled over the whole world; that is, the world as then known. This is common language applied in the Scriptures to the Babylonian, Persian, Grecian, and Roman kingdoms. Thus in Daniel 2:39, the third of these kingdoms, the Grecian, was to "bear rule over all the earth." Compare Daniel 8:5 : "And, as I was considering, behold, an he-goat came from the west on the face of the whole earth." So of the Roman empire, in Daniel 7:23 : "The fourth beast shall devour the whole earth." The declaration that his kingdom embraced the beasts of the field and the fowls of the air is a strong expression, meaning that he reigned over the whole world. A somewhat similar description of the extent of the empire of the king of Babylon occurs in Jeremiah 27:4-8 : "And command them to say unto their masters, Thus saith the Lord of hosts, the God of Israel, Thus shall ye say unto your masters; I have made the earth, the man and the beast that are upon the ground, by my great power, and by my outstretched arm, and have given it unto whom it seemed meet unto me. And now I have given all these lands into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar, the king of Babylon, my servant; and the beasts of the field I have given him also to serve him. And all nations shall serve him, and his son, and his son's son, until the very time of his land come: and then many nations and great kings shall serve themselves of him. And it shall come to pass, that the nation and kingdom which will not serve the same Nebuchadnezzar, the king of Babylon, and that will not put their neck under the yoke of the king of Babylon, that nation will I punish, saith the Lord, with the sword, and with the famine, and with the pestilence, until I have consumed them by his hand."

At the time referred to by Daniel, the scepter of Nebuchadnezzar a extended over all these realms, and the world was, in fact, placed substantially under one head. "All the ancient Eastern histories," says Bishop Newton, "almost are lost; but there are some fragments even of pagan historians yet preserved, which speak of this mighty conqueror and his extended empire. Berosus, in Josephus (Contra Apion, c. i. Section 19), says that he held in subjection Egypt, Syria, Phoenicia, Arabia, and by his exploits surpassed all the Chaldeans and Babylonians who reigned before him. Strabo asserts that this king among the Chaldeans was more celebrated than Hercules; that he proceeded as far as to the pillars of Hercules, and led his army out of Spain into Thrace and Pontus. But his empire, though of great extent, was not of long duration, for it ended in his grandson Belshazzar, not seventy years after the delivery of this prophecy, nor above twenty-three years after the death of Nebuchadnezzar." - Newton on the "Prophecies," pp. 186, 187.

Thou art this head of gold - The head of gold seen in the image represents thee as the sovereign of a vast empire. Compared with the other monarchs who are to succeed thee, thou art like gold compared with silver, and brass, and iron; or, compared with thy kingdom, theirs shall be as silver, brass, and iron compared with gold. It was common, at an early period, to speak of different ages of the world as resembling different metals. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:31. In reference to the expression before us, "Thou art this head of gold," it should be observed, that it is not probably to be confined to the monarch himself, but is rather spoken of him as the head of the empire; as representing the state; as an impersonation of that dynasty. The meaning is, that the Babylonian empire, as it existed under him, in its relation to the kingdoms which should succeed, was like the head of gold seen in the image as compared with the inferior metals that made up the remaining portions of the image. Daniel, as an interpreter, did not state in what the resemblance consisted, nor in what respects his empire could be likened to gold as compared with those which should follow. In the scanty details which we now have of the life of that monarch, and of the events of his reign, it may not be possible to see as clearly as would be desirable in what that resemblance consisted, or the full propriety of the appellation given to him. So far as may now be seen, the resemblance appears to have been in the following things:

(I) In respect to the empire itself of which he was the sovereign, as standing at the head of the others - the first in the line. This was not indeed the first kingdom, but the design here was not to give an account of all the empires on earth, but to take the world "as it was then," and to trace the successive changes which would occur preparatory to the establishment of the kingdom which should finally spread over the earth. Viewed in reference to this design, it was undoubtedly proper to designate the empire of Babylon "as the head." It not only stood before them in the order of time, but in such a relation that the others might be regarded as in some sort its successors; that is, "they would succeed it in swaying a general scepter over the world." In this respect they would resemble also the Babylonian. At the time here referred to, the dominion over which Nebuchadnezzar swayed his scepter was at the head of the nations; was the central power of the Pagan world; was the only empire that could claim to be universal. For a long period the kingdom of Babylon had been dependent on that of Assyria; and while Nineveh was the capital of the Assyrian empire, Babylon was the head of a kingdom, in general subordinate to that of Assyria, until Nabopolassar, the immediate predecessor of Nebuchadnezzar, rendered the kingdom of Babylon independent of the Assyrians, and transferred the seat of empire to Babylon. This was about the year 626 before the Christian era. See "Universal History," vol. iii. pp. 412-415. Nebuchadnezzar, receiving this mighty kingdom, had carried his own arms to distant lands; had conquered India, Tyre, and Egypt; and, as would appear, all Northern Africa, as far as the pillars of Hercules, and, with quite unimportant exceptions, all the known world was subject to him.

(II) The appellation "head of gold" may have been given him on account of the splendor of his capital, and the magnificence of his court. In Isaiah 14:4, Babylon is called "the golden city." See the note at that place. In Isaiah 13:19, it is called "the glory of kingdoms, the beauty of the Chaldees' excellency." In Isaiah 47:5, it is called "the lady of kingdoms." In Jeremiah 51:13, it is spoken of as "abundant in treasures," and in Jeremiah 51:41, as "the praise of the whole earth." So in profane writers, Babylon has similar appellations. Thus, in Aesch. Per. 51, mention is made of Βαβυλὼν η ̓ πολύχρυσος Babulōn hē poluchrusos - "Babylon abounding in gold." The conquests of Nebuchadnezzar enabled him to bring to his capital the spoils of nations, and to enrich his capital above any other city on the earth. Accordingly, he gave himself to the work of adorning a city that should be worthy to be the head of universal empire, and succeeded in making it so splendid as to be regarded as one of the wonders of the world. His great work in adorning and strengthening his capital consisted, first, of the building of the immense walls of the city; second, of the tower of Belus; and third, of the hanging gardens. For a full description of these, see Prideaux's "Connections," vol. i. p. 232, following.

(III) The appellation may have been given him by comparison with the kingdoms which were to succeed him. In some respects - in extent and power - some one or more of them, as the Roman, might surpass his; but the appellation which was appropriate to them was not gold, but they would be best denoted by the inferior metals. Thus the Medo-Persian kingdom was less splendid than that of Babylon, and would be better represented by silver; the Macedonian, though more distinguished by its conquests, was less magnificent, and would be better represented by brass; and the Roman, though ultimately still more extensive in its conquests, and still more mighty in power, was less remarkable for splendor than strength, and would be better represented by iron. In magnificence, if not in power, the Babylonian surpassed them all; and hence, the propriety of the appellation, "head of gold."

(IV) It is possible that in this appellation there then may have been some reference to the character of the monarch himself. In Jeremiah 27:6, he is spoken of as the "servant of God," and it is clear that it was designed that a splendid mission was to be accomplished by him as under the Divine control, and in the preparation of the world for the coming of the Messiah. Though he was proud and haughty as a monarch, yet his own personal character would compare favorably with that of many who succeeded him in these advancing kingdoms. Though his conquests were numerous, yet his career as a conqueror was not marked with cruelty, like that of many other warriors. He was not a mere conqueror. He loved also the arts of peace. He sought to embellish his capital, and to make it in outward magnificence and in the talent which he concentrated there, truly the capital of the world. Even Jerusalem he did not utterly destroy; but having secured a conquest over it, and removed from it what he desired should embellish his own capital, he still intended that it should be the subordinate head of an important province of his dominions, and placed on the throne one who was closely allied to the king who reigned there when he took the city.

But the appellation here, and the reign of Nebuchadnezzar, are to be contemplated chiefly, like the kingdoms that succeeded, in their relation to redemption. It is in this aspect that the study of history becomes most interesting to a mind that regards all events as embraced in the eternal counsels of God, and it is undoubtedly with reference to this that the history of these kingdoms becomes in any way introduced into the inspired writings. All history may be contemplated under two aspects: in its secular bearing; and in its relation to the redemption of the world. In the former aspect, it has great and important uses. As furnishing lessons to statesmen; as showing the progress of society; as illustrating the effects of vice and immorality, and the evils of anarchy, ambition, and war; as recording and preserving the inventions in the arts, and as showing what are the best methods of civil government, and what conduces most to the happiness of a people, its value cannot well be overestimated.

But it is in its relations to the work of redeeming man that it acquires its chief value, and hence, the sacred volume is so much occupied with the histories of early nations. The rise and fall of every nation; the conquests and defeats which have occurred in past times, may all have had, and perhaps may yet be seen to have had, an important connection with the redemption of man - as being designed to put the world in a proper position for the coming of the Prince of Peace, or in some way to prepare the way for the final triumph of the gospel. This view gives a new and important aspect to history. It becomes an object in which all on earth who love the race and desire its redemption, and all in heaven, feel a deep concern. Every monarch; every warrior; every statesman; every man who, by his eloquence, bravery, or virtue, has contributed anything to the progress of the race, or who has in any way played an important part in the progress of the world's affairs, becomes a being on whom we can look with intense emotion; and in reference to every man of this character, it would be an interesting inquiry what he has done that has contributed to prepare the way for the introduction of the Mediatorial scheme, or to facilitate its progress through the world. In reference to this point, the monarch whose character is now before us seems to have been raised up, under an overruling Providence, to accomplish the following things:

(1) To inflict "punishment" on the revolted people of God for their numerous idolatries. See the book of Jeremiah, "passim." Hence, he led his armies to the land of Palestine; he swept away the people, and bore them into captivity; he burned the temple, destroyed the capital, and laid the land waste.

(2) He was the instrument, in the hand of God, of effectually purifying the Jewish nation from the sin of idolatry. It was for that sin eminently that they were carried away; and never in this world have the ends of punishment been better secured than in this instance. The chastisement was effectual. The Jewish nation has never since sunk into idolatry. If there have been individuals of that nation - of which, however, there is no certain evidence - who have become idolaters, yet as a people they have been preserved from it. More than two thousand five hundred years have since passed away; they have been wanderers and exiles in all lands; they have been persecuted, ridiculed, and oppressed on account of their religion; they have been placed under every possible inducement to conform to the religion around them, and yet, as professed worshippers of Jehovah, the God of their fathers, they have maintained their integrity, and neither promises nor threatenings, neither hopes nor fears, neither life nor death, have been sufficient to constrain the Hebrew people to bow the knee to an idol god.

(3) another object that seems to have been designed to be accomplished by Nebuchadnezzar in relation to Redemption was to gather the nations under one head preparatory to the coming of the Messiah. It will be seen in the remarks which will be made on the relation of the Roman empire to this work (see the notes at Daniel 2:40-43), that there were important reasons why this should be done. Preparatory to that, a succession of such kingdoms each swayed the scepter over the whole world, and when the Messiah came, the way was prepared for the easy and rapid propagation of the new religion to the remotest parts of the earth.

39

Daniel 2:39

開啟正文

「在你以後必另興一國」——這必是指「後來」興起,但並非指這裏所指的國「立即」接續他的治世,因為那就不真實了。瑪代波斯帝國直到尼布甲尼撒死後多年才取得優勢。那事發生在他的孫子伯沙撒在位期間;在他祖孫二人的治世之間,還隔着以未米羅達和尼利格里薩兩朝。再者,由於這預言論像的餘下部分所指的是「諸國」,而非個別的君王,顯然這裏也首先不是指尼布甲尼撒個人,而是指他作為一個王國的元首。其意是:將有一國接續他所統治的國,其遜色如此之大,以致可以用銀與金相比來代表。

「必另興一國」——迦勒底文作「另一國必站立(תְּקוּם(teqûm))」。這話標示與同王朝的承繼不同的東西,因為那不過是「同一國的延續」。所指顯然是帝國的更替;這話暗示將有某種革命或征服,使現存的王國過去,另一國繼起。然而,就它佔有實質上同一疆土而言,它仍有如此多的同一性,以致由顯給尼布甲尼撒的同一個像來象徵。這裏所指的國無疑是瑪代波斯,由古列在征服巴比倫時建立,歷經他繼承者諸朝,直到被亞歷山大大帝征服。這國接續亞述即巴比倫之國,自主前538年起,至大利烏·科多曼努斯被傾覆、主前333年止。當然,它貫穿波斯諸王的治世——他們在入侵希臘一事上扮演了如此重要的角色,他們的挫敗使列奧尼達、阿里斯提德、米爾提亞德斯和地米斯托克利的名字不朽,使薩拉米斯、溫泉關、馬拉松和留克特拉的名字如此著名。關乎古列和瑪代波斯帝國之創立的一般記述,請參 Isaiah 41:2 的註釋。

「不及於你」——因此以銀與金相比來代表。它會在哪幾方面遜色,但以理沒有說明;這只能從關乎那國所發生的「事實」來學習。要印證這預言描述的真實性,所需的只是:它遜色到一個地步,使「銀」這稱號與「金」所代表的巴比倫國相比,能恰當地應用於它。這說法標示君王品格和帝國一般狀況的普遍衰落或退化。關乎這國之遜於巴比倫,歷來意見不一。加爾文認為指退化。蓋爾認為關乎國祚——這國延續不過二百四十年左右;而另一國,連亞述在內,涵蓋一千五百年。波拉努斯認為其意是巴比倫更多安逸太平;而尤尼烏斯、威利特等人則理解為巴比倫人待猶太人比波斯人更溫和、更人道。然而,這些意見或許沒有一個切合實情,因為它們對這遜色的原因,沒有提供如人所願的那麼充份的說明。關乎這一點,可以觀察到:

(a) 不應假定這國在「每一方面」都遜於巴比倫,而只是它將具有某些特性,使以「銀」而非以「金」描述它更為恰當。在別的方面,它可能遠勝;如羅馬,雖在同一大體的承繼線上,版圖和權力都超越二者,卻仍有一個理由,使它當以「鐵」、而非以金、銀或銅來代表。

(b) 這遜色與瑪代波斯帝國的權力、財富或版圖無關;因為就所見而論,它囊括了巴比倫帝國所含的一切,加上古列征服所增的一切。在他重建聖殿的詔令中 (Ezra 1:2),古列論他帝國版圖的話,與論尼布甲尼撒之國的話極其相似:「波斯王古列如此說:耶和華天上的神已將天下萬國賜給我。」照樣,論到亞哈隨魯——即瑪王阿斯提阿格斯;那國在古列和他的繼承者之下,構成瑪代波斯帝國的一部分——經上說他「從印度直到古實統管一百二十七省」。古列征服巴比倫時,在所發現的之外,當然又加上了瑪代和波斯兩國——他是這兩國王位的繼承人(見 Isaiah 41:2 的註釋)——並加上他登基前所征服的各行省;即加帕多家、呂底亞國、以及幾乎整個小亞細亞。

(c) 也不能認為這國在「財富」上遜色;因為除了古列在巴比倫所發現的一切財富,他還帶來他勝利的擄物;波斯和瑪代兩王室手中的珍寶;並呂底亞富王克羅伊斯的一切財富——那是他因征服而據有的。在思考使這國宜以銀而非金代表的「遜色」時,當記得這描述當涵蓋歷經相繼諸朝的「整個王國」,而不僅是古列行政之下的王國。這樣看來,它便包括波斯諸王的相繼,直到亞歷山大大帝入侵並征服東方之時。古列的治世誠然輝煌;若所注視的只是「他」一人、或只他行政期間的王國,便難以指明為何要加給它一個暗示遜於尼布甲尼撒之國的稱號。這國的「遜色」、或使它宜以銀而非金來代表之處(與巴比倫國相比),或許在於以下幾點:

(1) 就佔據波斯王位的諸王之相繼而論。古列的品格誠然配得最高的稱許;他不僅以勇敢而成功的征服者著稱,也以溫和、有能而正直的民政統治者著稱。色諾芬想描繪一位模範君王的品格,便選了古列為範例;雖然他大概在某種程度上把自己想像的美德加在他身上、修飾了他的品格,但主要之處無疑取自其生平。普里多(《沿革》,卷一頁252,查爾斯頓1815年版)說:「他為上述目的(描述一位可敬而正直的君王當如何)在一切生平中選擇古列的生平,其真正緣由,看來無非是:他發現那位卓越而英武之君王的真實歷史,比任何別的更適合他嫁接於其上的那些正確治術和真正君德的準則相互印證。」但接替他的,是一個瘋子——岡比西斯——以及一列在愚昧和罪惡上於君王中臭名昭著的王。普里多說:「波斯諸王是歷來治理一個帝國的最壞的人種。」

(2) 這國的遜色,在於它所發動戰役中那些顯著的「挫敗」。亞述即巴比倫帝國以連串的勝利著稱,把它的兵器帶遍當時所知的世界。瑪代波斯帝國在古列之後,卻幾乎同樣以連串的挫敗著稱——這些挫敗使這帝國延續的時期在歷史上如此著名。大概再沒有一個王國,在征服別國的事上承擔過這麼多愚昧的計劃——計劃如此失策,結果如此慘敗。古列的繼承者岡比西斯入侵埃及;他在那裏進行戰爭的行徑,使人視他為瘋子。他假借友誼之名派探子去察看埃塞俄比亞人的國土,因他們給他的答覆而大怒,決意入侵他們的領土。他到了上埃及的底比斯,從軍中分出五萬人去攻打哈門人,吩咐他們毀滅那地,焚燒其中的哈門朱庇特廟。他們在沙漠中行軍數日之後,被一陣強勁的南風埋在沙中,全軍覆沒。其間岡比西斯率領其餘的軍隊進攻埃塞俄比亞人,儘管他全然缺乏軍隊的給養,直到馱獸被吃盡,他們被迫每十人中指定一人被殺來吃。在這可悲的境況中,岡比西斯回到底比斯,在這次狂妄的遠征中喪失了大半軍隊。——普里多《沿革》,i. 328。也是在這國存續期間,發生了向希臘進軍的諸多次禍遠征:馬多尼烏斯和薛西斯把亞洲的百萬大軍傾瀉到希臘諸國,在普拉提亞、馬拉松和薩拉米斯遭到如此慘重的潰敗。入侵的軍隊從未遭遇過這樣一連串的災難;抵禦入侵者也從未因此如此聞名。在這方面,稱這為一個遜色或退化的國,顯然是恰當的。

(3) 它的遜色,在於品格和道德日益墮落與柔靡。自薛西斯時期(主前479年)起,「衰敗和腐化的徵兆在帝國中顯明;國民的品格逐漸退化;市民因奢侈而腐化衰弱;他們倚仗僱傭兵過於本族的勇武和忠誠。諸王受制於他們的妻子、或他們所提拔到顯要職位的寵臣;而諸省總督也由文職官員開始篡奪軍權。」——萊曼,《歷史圖表》(Hist. Chart.)。

(4) 這國的遜色,也在於其權力因內部原因而逐漸削弱。它不僅在入侵他人的嘗試中受挫、因宮廷和百姓的墮落而削弱,而且——作為自然的結果——因中央政府權力的漸減和諸省日益的獨立而削弱。自主前423年大利烏·諾圖斯——一個軟弱、柔靡而怠惰的君王——的時代起,「遙遠行省的總督只對王保持名義上的服從。他們中許多人實際上是他們所轄之地的君主,並彼此開戰。」——萊曼。正是因着這樣的原因,這國的權力逐漸削弱,為亞歷山大大帝的輕易征服預備了道路。他們相繼的挫敗、並這國這樣的逐漸墮落和削弱,顯明了異象和講解中對這國之描述的恰當性——它將是一個「較次的國」,一個與巴比倫相比、可以銀與金相比擬的國。

然而,就世上宗教歷史的事件進程而論,這國仍持有一個重要的關係,並對人類的救贖有重要的影響。這既是歷史最重要的方面,既然聖經中提及它無疑正是着眼於此,而且它事實上常被以賽亞、並以斯拉記、尼希米記、以斯帖記和幾位小先知書所暗指,那麼,以最簡括的方式略述這國與救贖大事相關的影響、或在這國存續期間為促進真宗教所作的事,或屬合宜。完整的記述見普里多《沿革》第一部分卷三至卷七。另比較愛德華茲《救贖史》(History of Redemption),第一時期第六部分。在這國期間發生、與宗教進程相連並有利於其推進的特有事件,乃是這些:

(a) 巴比倫的傾覆——它久為古代神子民的可畏仇敵。

(b) 被擄之人在古列的主持下歸回本地 (Ezra 1:1)。

(c) 在同一主持下、並在古列繼承者的恩待下重建聖殿。

(d) 在波斯君主國存續期間的動盪中,為彌賽亞的來臨預備世界;對希臘的入侵;在那裏的挫敗;藉這些挫敗,為那久被應許為「萬國所羨慕的」一位的來臨作預備。比較 Haggai 2:7:「萬軍之耶和華說:我必震動萬國;萬國所羨慕的必來到;我就使這殿(在古列和他繼承者主持下建造的聖殿)滿了榮耀。」因此,這國在聖經中受到特別的提及,是恰當的;因為世上真宗教歷史中一些最重大的事件,正是在古列和他繼承者的主持下發生的;而且,大概再沒有一個時期,比在影響那些異教君王的心思、使他們傾向恩待久受壓迫之神兒女的事上,更當承認神的手了。

「又有第三國,就是銅的」——見 Daniel 2:32 的註釋。像中屬銅的部分是肚腹和腰,標示不僅遜於頭,也遜於緊接其前的部分——銀的胸膛和膀臂。誠然,這裏沒有像前一例那樣明說這國將遜於前國;只是從它在像中所佔的位置、並代表它的金屬之較次品質,暗示將有遜色。這第三國所指乃亞歷山大大帝所創的帝國——馬其頓帝國,這一點沒有合理的懷疑餘地。眾所周知,他傾覆了波斯帝國,在東方建立了一個王國,實質上涵蓋瑪代波斯和巴比倫帝國曾佔有的同一疆土。這國所指既無疑問,那麼所指也不僅是亞歷山大本人在位期間的帝國,而是涵蓋他所創立和安排的整個帝國,直到它被另一個普世帝國——此處稱為第四國——所接替,這也同樣少有疑問。認為此處指馬其頓帝國的理由,幾乎明顯到不必一一列舉。它們是:

(1) 這國實際接續瑪代波斯之國,佔有同一疆土,並且與它一樣,當時被視為普世君主國。

(2) 亞歷山大的帝國在別處被但以理不止一次按同樣的次序提及,其含義不可能誤解。如此,Daniel 8:21:「那公山羊就是希臘王;兩眼當中的大角就是頭一王。至於那折斷了的角,在其根上又長出四角,這四角就是四國,必從這國裏興起來,只是權勢都不及他。」Daniel 10:20:「現在我要回去與波斯的君爭戰;我去後,希臘的君必來。」Daniel 11:2-4:「現在我將真事指示你。波斯還有三王興起,第四王必富足遠勝諸王,他因富足成為強盛,就必激動眾人攻擊希臘國。必有一個勇敢的王興起,執掌大權,隨意而行。他興起的時候,他的國必破裂,向天的四方分開,也不歸他的後裔,治國的權勢也都不及他;因為他的國必被拔出,歸與他後裔之外的人。」這國既被但以理在別處按同樣的次序提及、並被定意在世界事務中扮演重要角色,那麼合理的是假定此處指它。

(3) 這裏用來代表這國的表號——「銅」——特別適合希臘人,且不能同樣恰當地應用於任何別國,這也是一個相當要緊的情況。希臘人以「銅甲」著稱;「穿銅甲的亞該亞人」——χαλκοχίτωνες Ἀχαιοί(chalkochitōnes Achaioi)——是古人最常稱呼他們的名號。——《伊利亞特》i. 371;ii. 47;《奧德賽》i. 286。與此相符,約瑟夫斯說(《猶太古史》卷十第10章第4節):την δε εκεινων ετερος τις απο δυσεως καθαιρησει χαλκον ημφιεσμενος——「他們的帝國,將有另一個披銅甲的從西方而來,加以傾覆。」這些考慮使我們無疑地相信,此處所指的國,乃是那在亞歷山大之下取得全東方統治權的希臘即馬其頓帝國。

「必掌管天下」——其意義與亞述、巴比倫和瑪代波斯帝國相似。這是對亞歷山大帝國的慣常描述。他自己曾下令要稱他為「全世界的王」。「(查士丁,卷12,第16章,第9節)——「他既受了帝國,便下令稱自己為全地和全世界之王。」狄奧多羅斯·西庫路斯說,他接受來自各國的使節;κατὰ δὲ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον ἐξ ἀπάσης σχεδὸν τῆς οἰκουμένης ἧκον πρεσβεις——「在那時候,使節從幾乎整個有人煙的世界前來。」——卷17,第113章。照樣,阿里安(《亞歷山大遠征記》卷7,第15章)評述說,亞歷山大那時在自己和四圍的人眼中,「已是全地和全海的主」——γῆς τε ἁπάσης καὶ θαλάσσης κύριον。

馬加比書的作者對這國的版圍也作了類似的記述:「亞歷山大大帝的兒子、馬其頓人腓力的兒子亞歷山大,原先作希臘王,他從那裏出來,擊敗了波斯和瑪代王大利烏,征服了列國;他打了許多仗,攻取了列國的堅固城,殺了地上的諸王;他直行到地極;擄掠了許多國的財物;全地在他面前太平無事。」(1 Macc. 1:1-3)可見,說這「國掌管天下」是恰當的。它當然囊括了古時包括在亞述和巴比倫帝國中的一切;古列的征服加給那帝國的一切;並亞歷山大因他的世襲領地、並他在別處的征服所加添的一切。已知世界幾乎全部——或全部——當時都在亞歷山大的統治之下;例外的是當時隸屬羅馬人的部分,而羅馬當時不過是初興的勢力。有人提出一個問題:這是指僅限於亞歷山大本人一生之內的王國,還是也包括相繼的諸王朝、直到羅馬人的征服?後者是正確的見解,這從以下考慮看來是清楚的:

(1) 如我們所見,前兩國——巴比倫和瑪代波斯——所涵蓋的,不僅是任何一位在位君王之下的王國,而是其整個延續期,直到被另一個同樣自稱普世帝國的所傾覆——前者亡於瑪代波斯,後者亡於馬其頓。可以推定,同樣的解釋原則也當應用於馬其頓國本身——尤其因它實際上也接續被一個在更高意義上自稱普世帝國的所承繼。

(2) 這事實上是一個國。誠然,亞歷山大死後,他所創的帝國分給了他的四個將軍;從它又興起兩個王朝——敘利亞的西流基王朝和在埃及執政的拉基德王朝;但正如牛頓所言:「他們的王國與亞歷山大的王國之別,不過是部分與整體之別。那仍是同一政府的延續。執政的仍是馬其頓人。一切古代作者都把亞歷山大和他繼承者的王國說成同一個王國。他們通常的名稱——『亞歷山大的繼承者』——已暗含這一點。『亞歷山大死後,』約瑟夫斯說(《猶太古史》卷十一第8章第7節),『帝國分給了他的繼承者。』『亞歷山大死後,』查士丁說(卷41,第4章,第1節),『東方的諸國分給了他的繼承者』;而他仍稱他們為馬其頓人,稱他們的帝國為馬其頓帝國。」——牛頓,《論預言》,頁189、190。

關乎前面曾提論巴比倫和瑪代波斯兩國的一點——它們與宗教的關係、或它們被用來促進宗教在世上進展的方式,使它們宜於在受感動的書卷中被提及——可以說,馬其頓國無疑也在神護理的統管之下,被定意有助於人類救贖大工的進展,並為彌賽亞的來臨預備道路。關乎這一朝代在宗教方面所作之事——歷史最有趣的一面——的完整陳述,見愛德華茲《救贖史》,頁271-275;並普里多《沿革》,卷二頁279以下。此處所指的國——馬其頓,在此由像中屬銅的部分代表,在四獸的異象中 (Daniel 7) 由背上有鳥翅膀的豹代表,在 Daniel 8:21 由公山羊代表——自亞歷山大傾覆大利烏·科多曼努斯(主前333年)起,延續到羅馬人在龐培之下征服敘利亞和東方,約在救主降生前六十六年。這期間影響宗教利益、並為彌賽亞來臨預備道路的主要事件,乃是以下這些:

一、希臘語知識的廣泛傳播。亞歷山大的軍隊主要由希臘人組成。希臘語自然是宮廷和他所建各城所講的語言;公文以希臘文發出;那語言必被廣泛研習以取悅掌權者;而亞歷山大的繼承者都是使用希臘語的人。結果,希臘語廣泛傳播於被亞歷山大征服、由他繼承者治理的各國。那語言成了通俗的語言;一種為大眾所了解的普世語言,與今日歐洲的法語不無相似。這在為福音的引入作預備上的效果,見於兩方面:

(a) 便利了福音的「傳講」。使徒誠然有方言的恩賜;儘管希臘語盛行,這仍有其需要。但沒有證據表明這恩賜賜給了早期傳福音者的「所有人」;也不能確定那些「受了」這恩賜的人,在一切場合都能使用它。使徒和別人在日常的勞苦中,大概仍要倚靠自己天生的才能,使用他們最慣用的語言。因此,在福音將要傳揚的多數國家中既有一種共同的語言,顯然宗教的傳播便因此大得便利;而且無疑,這是護理的設計「之一」,藉着容許馬其頓的征服,為新宗教更輕易而迅速的擴散預備道路。

(b) 照樣,這征服也為救主生平的歷史、並宗教的教義在新約著作中「作永久記錄」預備了道路。從多方面看,記錄以一種語言而非多種語言寫成,顯然是合宜的;而在當時地上所講的一切語言中,「希臘語」最適合這目的。它不僅最精煉、最有教養,也最豐富;最適合表達抽象的觀念和精確的區分。大概連經過一切改良的豐富的阿拉伯語、並近代的諸語言在內,從未有一種語言像希臘語那樣適合神聖啟示的目的。護理的一個設計,或許正是:藉着那語言在希臘本土廣泛而精確的研習、並它在全世的傳播,使基督教啟示引入之時,有一種盡語言所能、免除缺點的永久記錄媒介;一種擁有如此多永久而有價值之文獻的媒介,以致即使它不再被作為口語使用之後,仍會被整個文學界研習,從而為準確了解聖典的含義提供途徑。

二、舊約聖經譯成同一語言,是發生於這國存續期間的另一件大事,大大便利了基督教的引入和傳播。明白希伯來語的人相對少。它在被擄之後便不再以純正的形式被講說。舊約聖經若以那語言存留,在世上便難以廣傳。然而,它們既被譯成希臘文,便得以廣泛為人所知,並為新宗教的傳道者提供現成而可懂的依據,使他們引用舊約的預言和關乎彌賽亞的記載時有所根據。關乎這譯本歷史的完整記述,請參普里多《沿革》,卷三頁53以下。照烏舍爾大主教的說法,它約於主前277年譯成。可能它是不同時期、由不同的人譯成的,因為其執行的水準參差很大。見以賽亞書導論第八節一(1),其中有對這譯本及其價值更詳盡的記述。無疑,它對聖經知識的擴散貢獻甚大,並是為世界領受彌賽亞將要作出的啟示作預備的重要工具。

三、這國存續期間,還發生了在逼迫之時保全猶太民族、拯救他們的城和聖殿免於毀滅、並他們的民族免於滅絕的重大事件。

(a) 耶路撒冷和聖殿的毀滅,曾受亞歷山大本人的威脅。圍攻並奪取推羅之後,他因猶太人在圍城期間拒絕供應他軍隊而大怒——猶太人藉口他們必須向大利烏效忠——他便進軍耶路撒冷,有意攻取並毀滅它。據說,為了安撫他,大祭司雅杜亞穿着祭司禮服、率領祭司的行列、由穿白衣的百姓陪同,出去迎接他。亞歷山大深受那場面感動,竟出所有人意外,饒了那城和聖殿;帕爾梅尼奧問他如此寬大的緣由,他說他曾在異象中見過這人,那人指示他撇下對所籌劃亞洲遠征的一切憂慮,並應許他神必把波斯帝國賜給他。據該記載,雅杜亞把但以理的預言指給他看,並藉那些預言堅定了他征服東方的確信;鑑於此,亞歷山大在聖殿獻祭,並賜給希伯來人本國的自由、以及遵行他們法律和宗教的權利。見普里多,卷二頁302以下;約瑟夫斯,《猶太古史》卷十一第8章。這記載無論含多少傳說成分,這城和聖殿確實沒有被亞歷山大毀滅;他在東方的蹂躪中,出於某種原因,對希伯來民族首都的處理,確與對別處不同。

(b) 在亞歷山大的一個繼承者安提阿古·伊皮法尼之下、馬加比時代的大逼迫中,又發生了一次性質相近的猶太民族蒙保全的顯著事例,顯明神的保護。見普里多,卷三頁230;並 2 Macc. 5:11-27。在那著名的逼迫時期,大批猶太人被安提阿古親手殺害;那城被攻取,聖殿被污穢。那城被安提阿古攻取(主前168年)三年之後,他命阿波羅尼烏斯進軍攻城,向猶太人發洩怒氣;當百姓聚集在會堂敬拜時,他放縱軍隊襲擊他們,下令殺盡一切男子,把一切婦孺擄去賣為奴隸。此後,他劫掠那城,拆毀房屋,夷平城牆,然後用那被毀之城的廢墟,在城中大衛城的一處高地、俯瞰聖殿之地,築了一座堅固的堡壘,內駐重兵。從那裏,攻擊一切上聖殿敬拜的人;聖殿被各樣污穢所玷污,直到它被離棄、每日的祭祀止息。猶太人從這些災禍和逼迫中,藉猶大·馬加比的英勇得了拯救,其詳情載於馬加比一書。

英文原文

And after thee - This must mean "subsequently" to the reign, but it does not mean that the kingdom here referred to would "immediately" succeed his own reign, for that would not be true. The Medo-Persian empire did not come into the ascendency until many years after the death of Nebuchadnezzar. This occurred during the reign of Belshazzar, a grandson of Nebuchadnezzar, between whose reign and that of his grandfather there had intervened the reigns of Evil-merodach and Neriglissar; besides, as the remainder of the prophecy relating to the image refers to "kingdoms," and not to individual monarchs, it is clear that this also relates not primarily to Nebuchadnezzar as an individual, but as the head of a kingdom. The meaning is, that a kingdom would succeed that over which he reigned, so far inferior that it might be represented by silver as compared with gold.

Shall arise another kingdom - Chaldee, "shall stand up (תקוּם teqûm) another kingdom." This is language which would denote something different from a succession in the same dynasty, for that would be a mere "continuance of the same kingdom." The reference is evidently to a change of empire; and the language implies that there would be some revolution or conquest by which the existing kingdom would pass away, and another would succeed. Still there would be so much of sameness in respect to its occupying essentially the same territory, that it would be symbolized in the same image that appeared to Nebuchadnezzar. The kingdom here referred to was undoubtedly the Medo-Persian, established by Cyrus in the conquest of Babylon, which continued through the reigns of his successors until it was conquered by Alexander the Great. This kingdom succeeded that of Assyria or Babylon, 538 years b.c., to the overthrow of Darius Codomanus, 333 years b.c. It extended, of course, through the reigns of the Persian kings, who acted so important a part in the invasion of Greece, and whose defeats have given immortality to the names of Leonidas, Aristides, Miltiades, and Themistocles, and made the names of Salamis, Thermopylae, Marathon, and Leuctra so celebrated. For a general account of Cyrus, and the founding of the Medo-Persian empire, the reader is referred to the notes at Isaiah 41:2.

Inferior to thee - And therefore represented by silver as compared with gold. In what respects it would be inferior, Daniel does not specify, and this can only be learned from "the facts" which occurred in relation to that kingdom. All that is necessary to confirm the truth of the prophetic description is, that it was to be so far inferior as to make the appellation "silver" applicable to it in comparison with the kingdom of Babylon, represented by "gold." The expression would denote that there was a general decline or degeneracy in the character of the monarchs, and the general condition of the empire. There have been different opinions as to the inferiority of this kingdom to the Babylonian. Calvin supposes that it refers to degeneracy. Geir supposes that it relates to the duration of the kingdom - this continuing not more than two hundred and forty years; while the other, including the Assyrian, embraced a period of one thousand five hundred years. Polanus supposes that the meaning is, that the Babylonian had more rest and tranquility; while Junius, Willett, and others understand it of a milder and more humane treatment of the Jews by the Babylonians than the Persians. Perhaps, however, none of these opinions meet the circumstances of the case, for they de not furnish as full an account of the reasons of this inferiority as is desirable. In regard to this, it may be observed,

(a) that it is not to be supposed that this kingdom was to be in "all respects" inferior to the Babylonian, but only that it would have certain characteristics which would make it more appropriate to describe it as "silver" than as "gold." In certain other respects it might be far superior, as the Roman, though in the same general line of succession, was in extent and power superior to either, though there was still a reason why that should be represented by "iron," rather than by gold, by silver, or by brass.

(b) The inferiority did not relate to the power, the riches, or the territorial extent of the Medo-Persian empire, for it embraced, so far as appears, all that was comprehended in the Babylonian empire, and all in addition which was added by the conquests of Cyrus. In his proclamation to rebuild the temple Ezra 1:2, Cyrus speaks of the extent of his empire in language strongly resembling what is applied to the kingdom of Nebuchadnezzar. "Thus saith Cyrus, king of Persia, The Lord God of heaven hath given me all the kingdoms of the earth." Thus also it is said of AhaAhasuerus or Astyages, king of Media - a kingdom that constituted a part of the Medo-Persian empire under Cyrus and his successors, that he "reigned from India even unto Ethiopia, over an hundred and twenty and seven provinces." To the kingdom of Babylon, as he found it when he conquered it, Cyrus of course added the kingdoms of Media and Persia, to the crowns of which he was the heir (see the notes at Isaiah 41:2), and also the various provinces which he had conquered before he came to the throne; that is, Cappadocia, the kingdom of Lydia, and almost the whole of Asia Minor.

(c) Nor can it be supposed that the kingdom was inferior in regard to "wealth," for, in addition to all the wealth that Cyrus found in Babylon, he brought the spoils of his victories; the treasures in the possession of the crowns of Persia and Media, and all the wealth of Croesus, the rich king of Lydia, of which he had become possessor by conquest. In considering the "inferiority" of this kingdom, which made it proper that it should be represented by silver rather than by gold, it is to be borne in mind that the representation should embrace "the whole kingdom" in all the successive reigns, and not merely the kingdom as it was under the administration of Cyrus. Thus regarded, it will comprehend the succession of Persian monarchs until the time of the invasion and conquest of the East by Alexander the Great. The reign of Cyrus was indeed splendid; and if "he" alone, or if the kingdom during his administration, were contemplated, it would be difficult to assign a reason why an appellation should have been given to it implying any inferiority to that of Nebuchadnezzar. The "inferiority" of the kingdom, or what made it proper to represent it by silver rather than by gold, as compared with the kingdom of Babylon, may have consisted in the following particulars:

(1) In reference to the succession of kings who occupied the Persian throne. It is true that the character of Cyrus is worthy of the highest commendation, and that he was distinguished not only as a brave and successful conqueror, but as a mild, able, and upright civil ruler. Xenophon, who wished to draw the character of a model prince, made choice of Cyrus as the example; and though he has not improbably embellished his character by ascribing to him virtues drawn from his own fancy in some degree, yet there can be no doubt that in the main his description was drawn from the life. "The true reason," says Prideaux ("Connections," vol. i. p. 252, Ed. Charlestown, 1815), "why he chose the life of Cyrus before all others for the purpose above mentioned" (that of giving a description of what a worthy and just prince ought to be) "seemeth to be no other but that he found the true history of that excellent and gallant prince to be, above all others, the fittest for those maxims of right policy and true princely virtue to correspond with, which he grafted upon it." But he was succeeded by a madman, Cambyses, and by a race of kings eminent among princes for folly and crime. "The kings of Persia," says Prideaux, "were the worst race of men that ever governed an empire."

(2) The kingdom was inferior in reference to the remarkable "defeats" in the military campaigns which were undertaken. The Assyrian or Babylonian empire was distinguished for the victories by which it carried its arms around the then known world. The Medo-Persian empire, after the reign of Cyrus, was almost as remarkable for the succession of defeats which have made the period of the world during which the empire continued, so well known in history. It is probable that no kingdom ever undertook so many foolish projects in reference to the conquests of other nations - projects so unwisely planned, and that resulted in so signal failures. The successor of Cyrus, Cambyses, invaded Egypt, and his conduct there in carrying on the war was such as to make him be regarded as a madman. Enraged against the Ethiopians for an answer which they gave him when, under pretence of friendship, he sent spies to examine their country, he resolved to invade their territory.

Having come to Thebes, in Upper Egypt, he detached from his army fifty thousand men to go against the Hammonians, with orders to destroy their country, and to burn the temple of Jupiter Hammon that stood in it. After marching a few days in the desert, they were overwhelmed in the sands by a strong south wind, and all perished. Meantime Cambyses marched with the rest of his army against the Ethiopians, though he wanted all the means of subsistence for his army, until, having devoured all their beasts of burden, they were constrained to designate every tenth man of the army to be killed and eaten. In these deplorable circumstances, Cambyses returned to Thebes, having lost a great part of his army in this wild expedition. - Prideaux's "Con." i. 328. It was also during the continuance of this kingdom, that the ill-starred expeditions to Greece occurred, when Mardonius and Xerxes poured the million of Asia on the countries of Greece, and met such signal overthrows at Platea, Marathon, and Salamis. Such a series of disasters never before had occurred to invading armies, or made those who repelled invasion so illustrious. In this respect there was an evident propriety in speaking of this as an inferior or degenerate kingdom.

(3) It was inferior in respect to the growing degeneracy and effeminacy of character and morals. From the time of Xerxes (479 b.c.) "symptoms of decay and corruption were manifest in the empire; the national character gradually degenerated; the citizens were corrupted and enfeebled by luxury; and confided more in mercenary troops than in native valor and fidelity. The kings submitted to the control of their wives, or the creatures whom they raised to posts of distinction; and the satraps, from being civil functionaries, began to usurp military authority." - Lyman, "Hist. Chart."

(4) The kingdom was inferior by the gradual weakening of its power from internal causes. It was not only defeated in its attempts to invade others, and weakened by the degeneracy of the court and people, but, as a natural consequence, by the gradual lessening of the power of the central government, and the growing independence of the provinces. From the time of Darius Nothus (423 b.c.) - a weak, effeminate, and indolent prince - "the satraps of the distant provinces paid only a nominal obedience to the king. Many of them were, in fact, sovereigns over the countries over which they presided, and carried on wars against each other." - Lyman. It was from causes such as these that the power of the kingdom became gradually weakened, and that the way was prepared for the easy conquests of Alexander the Great. Their successive defeats, and this gradual degeneracy and weakening of the kingdom, show the propriety of the description given of the kingdom in the vision and the interpretation - that it would be an "inferior kingdom," a kingdom which, in comparison with that of Babylon, might be compared with silver as compared with gold.

Still it sustained an important relation to the progress of events in regard to the history of religion in the world, and had an important bearing on the redemption of man. As this is the most important bearing of history, and as it was doubtless with reference to this that the mention of it is introduced into the sacred Scriptures, and as it is, in fact, often alluded to by Isaiah, and in the books of Ezra, Nehemiah, Esther, and some of the minor prophets, it may be proper, in the most summary way, to alude to some of those things which pertain to the bearing of this kingdom on the great events connected with redemption, or to what was done during the continuance of this kingdom for the promotion of the true religion. A full account may be found in Prideaux's "Connections," part 1, books iii-vii. Compare Edwards' "History of Redemption," Period I, part vi. The particular things which occurred in connection with this kingdom bearing on the progress of religion, and favorable to its advancement, were these:

(a) The overthrow of Babylon, so long the formidable enemy of the ancient people of God.

(b) The restoration of the exiles to their own land under the auspices of Cyrus, Ezra 1:1.

(c) The rebuilding of the temple under the same auspices, and with the favor of the successors of Cyrus.

(d) The preparation of the world for the coming of the Messiah, in the agitations that took place during the continuance of the Persian monarchy; the invasion of Greece; the defeats there; the preparation by these defeats for the coming of Him who was so long promised as the "desire of all nations."

Compare Haggai 2:7 : "And I will shake all nations, and the desire of all nations shall come; and I will fill this house" (the temple erected under the auspices of Cyrus and his successors) "with glory, saith the Lord of hosts." There was a propriety, therefore, that this kingdom should receive a distinct notice in the sacred Scriptures, for some of the most important events connected with the history of true religion in the world occurred under the auspices of Cyrus and his successors, and perhaps at no period has there been more occasion to recognize the hand of God than in the influences exerted on the minds of those pagan princes, disposing them to be favorable to the long-oppressed children of God.

And another third kingdom of brass - See the notes at Daniel 2:32. The parts of the image which were of brass were the belly and thighs, denoting inferiority not only to the head, but to the part which immediately preceded it - the breast and the arms of silver. It is not, indeed, specified, as in the former case, that this kingdom would be inferior to the former, and it is only from the position assigned to it in the image, and the inferior quality of the metal by which it is represented, that it is implied that there would be any inferiority. There can be no reasonable doubt that by this third kingdom is denoted the empire founded by Alexander the Great - the Macedonian empire. It is known to all that he overthrew the Persian empire, and established a kingdom in the East, embracng substantially the same territory which had been occupied by the Medo-Persian and the Babylonian empire. While there can be no doubt that that kingdom is referred to, there can be as little that the reference is not merely to the empire during the reign of Alexander himself, but that it embraced the whole empire as founded and arranged by him, until it was succeeded by another universal empire - here denominated the fourth kingdom. The reasons for supposing that the Macedonian empire is referred to here are almost too obvious to require that they should be specified. They are such as these:

(1) This kingdom actually succeeded that of Mede-Persia, covering the same territory, and, like that, was then understood to be a universal monarchy.

(2) The empire of Alexander is elsewhere more than once referred to by Daniel in the same order, and in such a manner that the sense cannot be mistaken. Thus, in Daniel 8:21 : "And the rough goat is the king of Grecia: and the great horn that is between his eyes is the first king. Now that being broken, whereas four stood up for it, four kingdoms shall stand up out of the nation, but not in his power." Daniel 10:20 : "and now," said the man that appeared in vision to Daniel Dan 2:5, "will I retram to fight with the prince of Persia: and when I am gone forth, lo, the prince of Grecia shall come." Daniel 11:2-4 : "and now will I show thee the truth. Behold there shall stand up yet three kings in Persia; and the fourth shall be far richer than they all, and by his strength through his riches he shall stir up all against the realm of Grecia. And a mighty king shall stand up, that shall rule with great dominion, and do according to his will. And when he shall stand up, his kingdom shall be broken, and shall be divided toward the four winds of heaven; and not to his posterity, nor according to the kingdom that he ruled: for his kingdom shall be plucked up, even for others beside those." Since this kingdom is thus referred to elsewhere by Daniel in the same order, and as destined to act an important part in the affairs of the world, it is reasonable to suppose that there is a reference to it here.

(3) It is a circumstance of some importance that the emblem here by which this kingdom is represented, "brass," is one that is peculiarly appropriate to the Greeks, and one that could not be applied to any other naion with equal propriety. The Greeks were distinguished for their "brazen armor," and the appellation, the "brazen-coated Greeks" - χαλκοχιτώνες Ἀχαιοὶ chalkochitōnes Achaioi - is that by which they were designated most commonly by the ancients. - Iliad i. 371; ii. 47; Odyssey i. 286. In accordance with this, Josephus says ("Ant." b. x. c. 10, Section 4), τὴν δὲ ἐκεὶνων ἕτερος τις ἀπὸ δύσεως καθαιρήσει χαλκὸν ἠμφιεσμένος tēn de ekeinōn heteros tis apo duseōs kathairēsei chalkon ēmphiesmenos, - "their empire another shall come from the West, clothed with brass, shall destroy." These considerations leave no doubt that the kingdom here referred to was that Grecian or Macedonian, which, under Alexander, obtained dominion over all the East.

Which shall bear rule over all the earth - In a sense similar to that of the Assyrian, the Babylonian, and the Medo-Persian empire. This is the common description of the empire of Alexander. He himself commanded that he should be called "the king of all the world." "Accepto deinde imperio, regem se terrarum omnium ac mundi appellari jussit" (Justin. l. 12, c. 16, Section 9) - "Having received the empire, he ordered himself to be called the king of all lands and of the world." Diodorus Siculus says that he received ambassadors from all countries; κατὰ δὲ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον ἐξ ἀπάσης σχεδόν τῆς οἰκουμένης ἦκον πρέσβεις, κ.τ.λ. kata de touton ton chronon ex apasē; schedon tēs oikoumenēs ēkon presbeis, etc. - "At which time, legates came to him from almost the whole habitable world." - L. 17, c. 113. So Arrian (Expedi. Alex. l. 7, c. 15) remarks, that "Alexander then appeared to himself, and to those around him, "to be lord of all the earth and of the sea" - γῆς τε ἁπάσης καὶ θαλάσσης κύριον gēs te hapasēs kai thalassēs kurion.

The author of the book of Maccabees gives a similar account of the extent of this kingdom: "And it came to pass, after that Alexander, the son of Philip the Macedonian, who first reigned in Greece, had overthrown Darius, the king of the Persian and Medes, he fought many battles, and took the strongholds of all, and slew the kings of the earth; and he went through even to the ends of the earth; and took the spoil of many nations; and the earth was quiet before him," 1 Macc. 1:1-3. The propriety of saying that this "kingdom bore rule over all the earth" is, therefore, apparent. It embraced, of course, all that was anciently included in the Assyrian and Babylonian empires; all that had been added to that empire by the conquests of Cyrus, and also all that Alexander had added to it by his hereditary dominions, and by his conquests in other places. Nearly or quite all the known world, except what was then subject to the Romans, then just a rising power, was under the sway of Alexander. A question has been started whether this refers merely to the kingdom of Alexander during his own life, or whether it embraced also the succession of dynasties until the conquests of the Romans. That the latter is the correct opinion seems clear from the following considerations:

(1) It was true, as we have seen, of the two previous kingdoms specified the Babylonian and the Medo-Persian - that they embraced, not merely the kingdom under any one reigning monarch, but during its entire continuance until it was overthrown by one that had also pretensions to a universal empire - the former by the Medo-Persian, and the latter by the Macedonian. It is to be presumed that the same principles of interpretation are to be applied also to the Macedonian kingdom itself - especially as that was also actually succeeded by one that in a still higher sense laid claim to universal empire.

(2) This was, in fact, one kingdom. It is true that, on the death of Alexander, the empire which he founded was divided among four of his generals, and also that from that sprung the two reigns, the Seleucidae in Syria, and of the Lagidae who reigned in Egypt; but, as Newton has remarked, "their kingdom was no more a different kingdom from that of Alexander, than the parts differ from the whole. It was the same government still continued. Those who governed were still Macedonians. All ancient authors spoke of the kingdom of Alexander and of his successors as one and the same kingdom The thing is implied in the very name by which they are usually called, the "successors of Alexander." 'Alexander being dead,' says Josephus (Ant. b. xi. ch. 8, Section 7), 'the empire was divided among his successors.' 'After the death of Alexander,' says Justin (lib. xli. c. 4, Section 1), 'the kingdoms of the East were divided among his successors;' and he still denominates them Macedonians, and their empire the Macedonian." - Newton "on the Prophecies," pp. 189, 190.

In regard to the point before adverted to in reference to the kingdoms of Babylon and of Medo-Persia - the relation which they sustained to religion, or the methods in which they were made to contribute to its progress in the world, making it proper that they should be noticed in the volume of inspiration, it may be remarked that the Macedonian kingdom was also designed, undoubtedly, under an overruling Providence, to contribute to the progress of the great work of human redemption, and to prepare the way for the coming of the Messiah. A full statement of what was done under this reign in respect to religion - the most interesting aspect of history - may be seen in Edwards' "History of Redemption," pp. 271-275, and in Prideaux's "Connections," vol. ii. p. 279, "seq." The kingdom here referred to - the Macedonian, represented here by the portion of the image that was of brass, and in the vision of the four beasts Daniel 7 by a leopard that had on its back the wings of a fowl, and in Daniel 8:21, by the rough goat - continued from the overthrow of Darius Codomanus by Alexander (333 b.c.), to the conquest of Syria, and the East, by the Romans under Pompey, about sixty-six years before the birth of the Saviour. The principal events during this period affecting the interests of religion, and preparing the way for the coming of the Messiah, were the following:

I. The extensive diffusion of the knowledge of the Greek language. The army of Alexander was mainly composed of Greeks. The Greek language was, of course, what was spoken by the court, and in the cities which he founded; the despatches were in Greek; that language would be extensively cultivated to gratify those in power; and the successors of Alexander were those who used the Greek tongue. The consequence was, that the Greek language was extensively spread over the countries which were subdued by Alexander, and which were governed by his successors. That language became the popular tongue; a sort of universal language understood by the great mass of the people, in a manner not unlike the French in Europe at the present day. The effect of this, in preparing for the introduction of the gospel, was seen in two respects:

(a) In facilitating the "preaching" of the gospel. It is true that the apostles had the gift of tongues, and that there was, notwithstanding the prevalence of the Greek language, occasion for this. But there is no evidence that this was conferred on "all" the early preachers of the gospel, nor is it certain that those on whom it "was" conferred were able to make use of it on all occasions. It is not improbable that, in their ordinary labors, the apostles and others were left to rely on their natural endowments, and to use the language to which they had been most accustomed. As there was, therefore, a common language in most of the countries in which the gospel would be proclaimed, it is evident that the propagation of religion would be greatly facilitated by this, and there can be no doubt that it was "one" of the designs of Providence in permitting the Macedonian conquest thus to prepare the way for the more easy and rapid diffusion of the new religion.

(b) In like manner, this conquest prepared the way "for the permanent record" of the history of the Saviour's life, and the doctrines of religion in the writings of the New Testament. It was evidently desirable, on many accounts, that the records should be made in one language rather than in many, and of all the languages then spoken on the earth, the "Greek" was the best adapted to such a purpose. It was not only the most polished and cultivated, but it was the most copious; and it was the best fitted to express abstract ideas, and accurate distinctions. Probably with all the improvements since made in the copious Arabic language, and in the languages of modern times, there never has been one that was so well fitted for the purposes of a Divine revelation as the Greek. It may have been one design of Providence, in the extensive and accurate cultivation of that language in Greece itself, as well as in its diffusion over the world, that there should be at the time of the introduction of the Christian revelation a medium of permanent record that should be as free from imperfection as language could be; a medium also in which there should be so much permanent and valuable literature that, even after it should cease to be a spoken language, it would be cultivated by the whole literary world, thus furnishing the means of an accurate knowledge of the meaning of the sacred writings.

II. The translation of the Old Testament into the same language was another important event, which took place during the continuance of this kingdom, which greatly facilitated the introduction and spread of Christianity. The Hebrew language was understood by comparatively few. It ceased to be spoken in its purity after the time of the captivity. In that language the Scriptures of the Old Testament would have been but little diffused in the world. By their being translated, however, into Greek, they became extensively known, and furnished a ready and an intelligible ground of appeal to the preachers of the new religion when they referred to the prophecies of the Old Testament, and the recorded predictions of the Messiah. For a full account of the history of this version, the reader may consult Prideaux's "Connections," vol. iii. p. 53, following. It was made according to Archbishop Usher, about 277 b.c. The probability is, that it was made at different periods, and by different hands, as it is executed with very various degrees of ability. See Introduction to Isaiah, Section viii. I.((1), for a more extended account of this version and its value. There can be no doubt that it contributed much to the diffusion of the knowledge of the Holy Scriptures, and was an important instrument in preparing the world for the reception of the revelation that should be made by the Messiah.

III. Events of great importance occurred dating the continuance of this kingdom in preserving the Jewish people in times of persecution, and saving their city and temple from ruin. and their nation from extinction.

(a) The destruction of Jerusalem and the temple was threatened by Alexander himself. After the siege and capture of Tyre, he became enraged at the Jews for refusing to furnish supplies for his army during the siege, under the plea that they were bound to show allegiance to Darius, and he marched to Jerusalem with an intention to take and destroy it. In order to appease him, it is said that Jaddua, the high priest, went out to meet him in his pontifical robes, at the head of a procession of priests, and accompanied by the people in white garments. Alexander was so impressed with the scene that, to the surprise of all, he spared the city and temple; and on being asked by Parmenio the reason of this clemency, said that he had seen this person in vision, who had directed him to lay aside all anxiety about his contemplated expedition to Asia, and that he had promised that God would give him the empire of the Persians. According to the story, Jaddua showed him the prophecies of Daniel, and confirmed him by those prophecies in the confident expectation of conquering the East; and in view of this, Alexander offered sacrifices in the temple, and granted to the Hebrews the freedom of their country, and the exercise of their laws and religion. See Prideaux, vol. ii. p. 302, following; Josephus, "Ant." b. xi. ch. 8. Whatever of fable there may be in this account, it is certain that this city and temple were not destroyed by Alexander, but that in his ravages in the East, he was led, by some cause, to deal with the capital of the Hebrew nation in a masher different from what he did with others.

(b) A remarkable preservation of the Jewish people, of a somewhat similar character, and evincing the protection of God, occurred during the great persecution under Antiochus Epiphanes, one of the successors of Alexander, in the time of the Maccabees. See Prideaux, vol. iii. p. 230, and 2 Macc. 5:11-27. In the times of that celebrated persecution, multitudes of the Jews were slain by Antiochus himself; the city was taken, and the temple defiled. Three years after it was taken by Antiochus (168 b.c.), Apollonius was directed by him to march against the city to vent his wrath on the Jews; and when the people were assembled in their synagogues for worship, he let loose his forces on them, with a command to slay all the men, and to take all the women and children captives to be sold as slaves. After this, he plundered the city, demolished the houses, and pulled down the walls, and then with the ruins of the demolished city built a strong fortress on the top of an eminence in the city of David, in a place which overlooked the temple, and placed a strong garrison within. From this place attacks were made on all who went up to the temple to worship; and the temple was defiled with all manner of pollutions, until it was deserted, and the daily sacrifices ceased. From these calamities and persecutions, the city and the Jewish nation were delivered by the valor of Judas Maccabeus, in the manner detailed in the first book of Maccabees.

40

Daniel 2:40

開啟正文

「第四國」——在像中由鐵的腿、並「半鐵半泥」的腳代表 (Daniel 2:33)。此處首先興起的問題是:這指的是哪一個國?關乎此點,一直有兩大見解:一說指羅馬帝國;另一說指緊接亞歷山大大帝之後的諸國或諸王朝——包括西流基王朝和拉基德王朝、敘利亞和埃及的諸國;照採納這見解的斯圖亞特教授的說法,「腿和腳乃是那在他(亞歷山大大帝)之後終於得勢的希臘眾首領之下興起之混雜而混亂帝國的表號。」——《但以理書註釋》,頁173。支持這見解的論證,見斯圖亞特教授,頁173-193。一般的見解乃是指羅馬帝國;支持這見解,可提出以下的考量:

(1) 這像明顯的設計,乃是象徵將在救贖主之國設立以先相繼而來的大君主國,並將在為那國預備世界上扮演重要角色。羅馬帝國本身太重要、在為那國預備世界上所扮演的角色太重要,不能在這樣的列舉中被遺漏。

(2) 此處所指的國,在石頭從山鑿出的表號所象徵的時候仍必存在;因為在那國存續期間、或在它之下,「天上的神必另立一國,永不敗壞」(Daniel 2:44)。但西流基和拉基德的諸國——亞歷山大之後「興起的混雜而混亂的帝國」——在那時之前已經終結,被羅馬所取代。

(3) 若不是羅馬的權勢被代表,像的對稱便被破壞;因為那將使事實上的一個國,由兩種不同的金屬——銅和鐵——來代表。我們在上文已見,巴比倫帝國恰當地由金代表;瑪代波斯由銀代表;馬其頓由銅代表。我們也已見到,亞歷山大所創、經他敘利亞和埃及的繼承者延續的帝國,事實上是一個國——古人如此稱它,它事實上是一個「希臘」王朝。若「銅」的稱號屬於那國作為一個希臘王國,那麼把「鐵」應用於那國的任何部分,便有明顯的不協調,也偏離了解釋像其他部分的方法。

(4) 「鐵」一詞的應用,顯然暗示這樣所指的國將以「力量」著稱——力量大於其前任諸國——如同鐵在這品質上勝過銅、銀和金。但這對緊接亞歷山大之後那些混亂的王朝並不真實。它們合起來弱於巴比倫和瑪代波斯,也弱於它們所從出的亞歷山大帝國。比較 Daniel 8:21-22。然而,羅馬的權勢確實在能力上遠勝它之前的一切,以致與銅、銀、金相比,它很可以由鐵來代表。

(5) 尼布甲尼撒夢中代表的第四君主國,顯然與 Daniel 7:7-8、Daniel 7:23、Daniel 7:25 中第四獸所代表的是同一個。但從那章的闡述將可看出,那裏所指是羅馬帝國。見這些經文的註釋。有人以為這國嚴格說來不是亞歷山大之國的「承繼」、也不佔有完全相同的疆土,故反對這見解;但這反對沒有充分根據。其他兩國——瑪代波斯和馬其頓——也是如此。它們雖在該詞的通常意義上不在「承繼」之列,卻實際上先後相繼;加上由征服、並由征服者世襲領地而來的增添,它們確實佔有同一疆土。這裏的設計,似乎是要描繪一系列的大君主國——在重要意義上的普世君主國——在救主降臨以先彼此相繼。羅馬除了它西方所擁有的之外,實際上在東方佔有與巴比倫、瑪代波斯和馬其頓實質上相同的疆土;並且與它們一樣,它擁有任何古代主權所能有的、對普世君主國稱號的一切主張;確實,再沒有一個存在過的王國,比它更有資格承受這稱號。

「必堅壯如鐵」——這描述適用於羅馬的權勢,幾乎不必說明。它最著稱的正是它的「力量」——那使一切別國在它面前全然無力抵擋的、不可抗拒的權勢。羅馬權勢的這一特性,吉本先生如此記述:「共和國的兵器,在戰役中有時受挫,在戰爭中卻總是得勝,以快速的步伐推進到幼發拉底河、多瑙河、萊茵河和大洋;那可以代表列國及其君王的金像、銀像或銅像,都相繼被羅馬的『鐵』君主國擊碎。」——《衰亡史》,頁642,倫敦1830年版,轉引自布什教授。

「鐵能壓碎一切」——鐵是為此處所提目的而使用、並一直使用的金屬。以錘、大錘和炮彈的形式,並總體上就藉敲擊或撞擊成就任何目的而論,它已被證明是最有價值的金屬。它沉重,易於鍛成所需的形狀;蘊藏豐富;能被煉硬以致自己不受損傷;因此,對這類目的而言,它具備人所期望的一切特性。

「也必打碎砸壓列國」——即這一切東西;也就是一切。沒有一物能在它面前站立;沒有一物它不能磨成粉末。這裏有些重複,但為加強語氣。

「它必打碎砸壓」——再沒有比這更能標示羅馬權勢的了。一切都它在面前被碾碎。他們所征服的列國不再成為王國,被貶為行省;作為王國,它們從列國的名單上被塗抹。歐文先生對此描述得好:「羅馬帝國確實擊垮了別國的憲法和建制;廢除它們的獨立,使它們陷於最完全的臣服;挫折別國的驕傲、制服別國的意志、徵用別國的財產、踐踏別國的權力和尊嚴。因為羅馬的統治正是以此區別於其餘一切:它是用幾乎與別國所用年數相當的世紀作成的;是千次戰役的果實,其間百萬人被殺。它為自己開路,如同攻城槌一樣,靠連續不斷、相繼而來的打擊;只要列國繼續抵抗,它就不停止擊打和碾壓。」——《但以理異象論》(Discourse on Daniel's Visions),頁180。

英文原文

And the fourth kingdom - Represented in the image by the legs of iron, and the feet "part of iron, and part of clay," Daniel 2:33. The first question which arises here is, what kingdom is referred to by this? In regard to this, there have been two leading opinions: one, that it refers to the Roman empire; the other, that it refers to the kingdoms or dynasties that immediately succeeded the reign of Alexander the Great; embracing the kingdoms of the Seleucidae and Lagidae, Syria, and Egypt - in the language of Prof. Stuart, who adopts this opinion, "that the legs and feet were symbols of that intermingled and confused empire which sprung up under the Grecian chiefs who finally succeeded him," (Alexander the Great). - "Com. on Daniel," p. 173. For the reasoning by which this opinion is supported, see Prof. Stuart, pp. 173-193. The common opinion has been, that the reference is to the Roman empire, and in support of this opinion the following conditions may be suggested:

(1) The obvious design of the image was to symbolize the succession of great monarchies, which would precede the setting up of the kingdom of the Redeemer, and which would have an important agency in preparing the world for that. The Roman empire was in itself too important, and performed too important an agency in preparing the world for that, to be omitted in such an enumeration.

(2) The kingdom here referred to was to be in existence at the time symbolized by the cutting of the stone out of the mountain, for, during the continuance of that kingdom, or under it, "the God of heaven was to set up a kingdom which should never be destroyed," Daniel 2:44. But the kingdoms of the Seleucidae and the Lagidae - the "intermingled and confused empires that sprang up" after Alexander the Great - had ceased before that time, being superseded by the Roman.

(3) unless the Roman power be represented, the symmetry of the image is destroyed, for it would make what was, in fact, one kingdom represented by two different metals - brass and iron. We have seen above that the Babylonian empire was represented appropriately by gold; the Medo-Persian by silver; and the Macedonian by brass. We have seen also, that in fact the empire founded by Alexander, and continued through his successors in Syria and Egypt, was in fact one kingdom, so spoken of by the ancients, and being in fact a "Greek" dynasty. If the appellation of "brass" belonged to that kingdom as a Greek kingdom, there is an obvious incongruity, and a departure from the method of interpreting the other portions of the image, in applying the term "iron" to any portion of that kingdom.

(4) By the application of the term "iron," it is evidently implied that the kingdom thus referred to would be distinguished for "strength" - strength greater than its predecessors - as iron surpasses brass, and silver, and gold, in that quality. But this was not true of the confused reigns that immediately followed Alexander. They were unitedly weaker than the Babylonian and the Medo-Persian, and weaker than the empire of Alexander. out of which they arose. Compare Daniel 8:21-22. It was true, however, of the Roman power, that it was so much superior to all its predecessors in power, that it might well be represented by iron in comparison with brass, silver, and gold.

(5) The fourth monarchy represented in Nebuchadnezzars dream is evidently the same which is represented by the fourth beast in Daniel 7:7-8, Daniel 7:23, Daniel 7:25. But it will appear, from the exposition of that chapter, that the reference there is to the Roman empire. See the note at these passages. There can be no well-founded objection to this view on the ground that this kingdom was not properly a "succession" of the kingdom of Alexander, and did not occupy precisely the same territory. The same was true of each of the other kingdoms - the Medo-Persian and Macedonian. Yet while they were not, in the usual sense of the term, in the "successions," they did, in fact, follow one after the other; and with such accessions as were derived from conquest, and from the hereditary dominions of the conquerors, they did occupy the same territory. The design seems to have been to give a representation of a series of great monarchies, which would be, in an important sense, universal monarchies, and which should follow each other before the advent of the Saviour. The Roman, in addition to what it possessed in the West, actually occupied in the East substantially the same territory as the Babylonian, the Medo-Persian, and the Macedonian, and, like them, it had all the claims which any ancient sovereignty had to the title of a universal monarchy; indeed no kingdom has ever existed to which this title could with more justice be applied.

Shall be strong as iron - It is scarcely necessary to observe that this description is applicable to the Roman power. In nothing was it more remarkable than its "strength;" for that irresistible power before which all other nations were perfectly weak. This characteristic of the Roman power is thus noticed by Mr. Gibbon: "The arms of the Republic, sometimes vanquished in battle, always victorious in war, advanced with rapid steps to the Euphrates, the Danube, the Rhine, and the ocean; and the images of gold, or silver, or brass, that might serve to represent the nations and their kings, were successively broken by the "iron" monarchy of Rome." - "Dec. and Fall," p. 642, Lond. ed. 1830, as quoted by Prof. Bush.

Forasmuch as iron breaketh in pieces and subdueth all things - Iron is the metal which is used, and always has been used, for the purpose here suggested. In the form of hammers, sledges, and cannon-balls, and, in general, in reference to the accomplishment of any purpose, by beating or battering, this has been found to be the most valuable of the metals. It is heavy, is capable of being easily wrought into desired shapes; is abundant; is susceptible of being made hard so as not to be itself bruised, and has therefore, all the properties which could be desired for purposes like this.

And as iron that breaketh all these - That is, all these things; to wit, everything. Nothing is able to stand before it; there is nothing which it cannot reduce to powder. There is some repetition here, but it is for the sake of emphasis.

Shall it break in pieces and bruise - Nothing could better characterize the Roman power than this. Everything was crushed before it. The nations which they conquered ceased to be kingdoms, and were reduced to provinces, and as kingdoms they were blotted out from the list of nations. This has been well described by Mr. Irving: "The Roman empire did beat down the constitution and establishment of all other kingdoms; abolishing their independence, and bringing them into the most entire subjection; humbling the pride, subjecting the will, using the property, and trampling upon the power and dignity of all other states. For by this was the Roman dominion distinguished from all the rest, that it was the work of almost as many centuries as those were of years; the fruit of a thousand battles in which million of men were slain. It made room for itself, as doth a battering-ram, by continual successive blows; and it ceased not to beat and bruise all nations, so long as they continued to offer any resistance." - "Discourse on Daniel's Visions," p. 180.

41

Daniel 2:41

開啟正文

「你既見那腳和腳指頭,一半是窯匠的泥,一半是鐵」——見 Daniel 2:33。迦勒底文作「其中一部分是窯匠的泥,其中一部分是鐵」;即一部分由一種材料構成,一部分由另一種。其意不是腳全由一種構成、腳指全由另一種,而是它們互相攙混。材料沒有均質性;彼此沒有能融為一體、或能與對方永久聯合的東西,如兩種金屬可以熔合或焊合成一個固體那樣。鐵與泥不能焊接;此處的意念顯然是:在這所指的帝國中,將有兩種主要元素,永不能融為一體。

「那國將來也必分開」——即如像中的鐵與泥那樣分開。這不一定意味着公開的破裂——實際分裂為兩部分;而是「內部構造中將有這樣的多樣性」:既將有巨大權力的元素,也將有軟弱的元素;將有永不能與力量元素融合、以致產生一個和諧而均質之整體的東西。

「你既見鐵與泥攙雜,那國也必有鐵的力量」——這部分描述的主要意念是:將有巨大的「力量」;無論可能有多少軟弱的元素,那帝國的「力量」仍將是明顯的。這如何適用於羅馬帝國,無人不能不看出;那強大的權勢,在其全部悠長的歷史中,以推行其計劃、邁向普世統治的魄力著稱。至於同樣由泥所象徵的「軟弱」元素,或許不能絕對確定所指。任何內在的軟弱根源;國家體制中的任何東西——無論是原本就有、構成異質材料的,或是帝國自身之內興起的,或是從未與國家真正融合的外來元素攙混而產生的——這幾個假定中的任何一個,都能滿足這話所公平含示的一切。

然而,從 Daniel 2:43「他們必與人種攙雜」看來,所指大概是某種「外來」的混雜——如別的語言、法律和風俗之民族的攙混;他們從未與原有的材料真正融合,卻不斷傾向於削弱並分裂那國。在解釋本段時當注意:前三國具有相對的均質性。在第四國中,將有在這方面性質特殊、使它有別於其他諸國的東西。事實上,其他三國在性質上相對均質。其主導的特性是「東方的」;儘管巴比倫、瑪代波斯和馬其頓諸國中攙混着不同的民族和人民,但每一國都有同樣的總體主流特性;沒有外族攙混到產生擾亂元素、或損害整體對稱與力量的地步。羅馬卻不然。在那帝國中,有一切民族和語言的攙混;儘管帝國的本質元素——「羅馬的」元素——始終存在,卻有別的影響在同一大政府之下攙混,恰可以與泥和鐵的結合相比,並最終促成它的傾覆(見 Daniel 2:43 的註釋)。

英文原文

And whereas thou sawest the feet and toes, part of potters' clay and part of iron - Daniel 2:33. The Chaldee is, "of them clay of the potter, and of them iron;" that is, part was composed of one material and part of the other. The sense is, not that the feet were composed entirely of one, and the toes of the other, but that they were intermingled. There was no homogeneousness of material; nothing in one that would coalesce with the other, or that could be permanently united to it, as two metals might be fused or welded together and form one solid compound. Iron and clay cannot be welded; and the idea here clearly is, that in the empire here referred to there would be two main elements which could never be made to blend.

The kingdom shall be divided - That is, divided as the iron and clay were in the image. It does not necessarily mean that there would be an open rupture - an actual separation into two parts; but that there would be "such a diversity in the internal constitution" that, while there would be the element of great power, there would be also an element of weakness; there would be something which could never be blended with the element of strength, so as to produce one harmonious and homogeneous whole.

But there shall be in it of the strength of the iron, forasmuch as thou sawest the iron mixed with miry clay - The principal idea in this part of the description is, that there would be great "power;" that whatever elements of weakness there might be, yet the "power" of the empire would be apparent. No one can fail to perceive how this applies to the Roman empire; a mighty power which, through all its long history, was distinguished for the vigour with which it carried forward its plans, and pressed on to universal dominion. As to the element of "weakness" symbolized too by the clay, it may not be possible to determine, with absolute certainty, what is referred to. Any internal source of weakness; anything in the constitution of the state, whether originally existing and constituting heterogeneous material, or whether springing up in the empire itself, or whether arising from the intermingling of foreign elements that never amalgamated themselves with the state, any one of these suppositions would meet all that is fairly implied in this language.

From Daniel 2:43, "they shall mingle themselves with the seed of men," it would seem, however, that the reference is to some "foreign" admixture - like the intermingling of nations of other languages, laws, and customs, which were never truly amalgamated with the original materials, and which constantly tended to weaken and divide the kingdom. It is to be remarked, in the exposition of the passage, that in the previous three kingdoms there was comparative homogeneousness. In the fourth kingdom, there was to be something of a peculiar character in this respect by which it should be distinguished from the others. As a matter of fact, the other three kingdoms were comparatively homogeneous in their character. The predominant feature was "Oriental;" and though there were different nations and people intermingled in the Babylonian, the Medo-Persian, and the Macedonian kingdoms, yet there was the same general prevailing character in each; there was not such an intermingling of foreign nations as to produce disturbing elements, or to mar the symmetry and strength of the whole. It was not thus with Rome. In that empire there was the intermingling of all nations and tongues, and though the essential element of the empire remained always - "the Roman" - yet there was an intermingling of other influences under the same general government, which could be appropriately compared with clay united with iron, and which ultimately contributed to its fall (see the notes at Daniel 2:43).

42

Daniel 2:42

開啟正文

「那腳指頭,既是半鐵半泥,那國也必半強半弱」——旁註作「脆」。旁註是這迦勒底字(תְּבִירָה(tebı̂yrâh))更正確的譯法。它意為「易碎、脆弱」——容易破碎,但不一定已經破碎。那要等到從山鑿出的石頭撞擊它時才發生。通常認為(比較牛頓《論預言》),腳上的十個腳指指羅馬帝國最終分裂而成的十國,與但以理在 Daniel 7:7 異象中所見的十角相對應。關乎羅馬帝國最終分裂為這十國的事實,見 Daniel 7:24 的詳細註釋。在異象中使君王驚奇、在講解中也使但以理驚奇的事,乃是腳和腳指「一部分由鐵、一部分由泥構成」。

在像的上部,各部分曾是均一的,金屬之間沒有攙混。此處卻見新的特徵——不僅採用了一種新的金屬,而且在像的同一部分中,攙混着一種不同的物質;它與鐵沒有親和力,永不能與它融合。在本節後半,譯作「半」的原文在兩個子句中並不相同。前者是 מִן־קְצָת(min-qetsâth)——本義「從末端」,即那國的末端。比較 Daniel 12:13「直到末了的日子」;Daniel 1:15「過了十天」;並 Daniel 2:5、Daniel 2:18。這字「可以」用來指任何東西的「末端」或「極處」,例如就「時間」而論;有人便認為此處暗指羅馬帝國較後的時期。見普爾《綜覽》(Synopsis)。

但這字也用來指「總數」或「全數」;那樣,這片語便相等於「一部分」——如片語 מִקְצָת כְּלֵי בֵית הָאֱלֹהִים(miqetsât kelēy bēyth hâ'elohı̂ym)——「從神殿器皿的總數中」(Daniel 1:2);即全數中的一部分,或一部分。比較 Nehemiah 7:70「從眾族長中」;即他們的一部分。子句的後半是 מִנְּהַ(minnah)——「從它」;即它的一部分;部分地。整個片語的意思是:整體的一部分將是強的,一部分將是脆弱的。所指不是這事將發生的「時間」,而是它必如此「事實」。本節的意念與前節沒有實質差異;只是在前節,突出的思想是那國中將有「力量」;在本節,其意念是:那國中雖有力量,卻也將有軟弱的元素。

英文原文

And as the toes of the feet were part of iron and part of clay, so the kingdom shall be partly strong, and partly broken - Margin, "brittle." The margin is the more correct rendering of the Chaldee word (תבירה tebı̂yrâh). It means "frail, fragile" - easily broken, but not necessarily that it was actually broken. That did not occur until the stone cut out of the mountain impinged on it. It has been commonly supposed (comp. Newton "on the Prophecies"), that the ten toes on the feet refer to the ten kingdoms into which the Roman empire was ultimately broken up, corresponding with the ten horns seen in the vision of Daniel, in Daniel 7:7. In regard to the fact that the Roman empire was ultimately broken up into ten such kingdoms, see the extended notes at Daniel 7:24. The thing which struck the monarch in the vision, and Daniel in the interpretation, as remarkable, was that the feet and toes "were composed partly of iron and partly of clay."

In the upper portion of the image there had been uniformity in the different parts, and had been no intermingling of metals. Here a new feature was seen - not only that a new metal was employed, but that there was intermingled with that, in the same portion of the image, a different substance, and one that had no affinity with the iron, and that could never be made to blend with it. In the latter part of this verse, the original word for "partly" is not the same in each clause. In the former it is מן־קצת min-qetsâth - properly "from the end," sc., of the kingdom. Compare Daniel 12:13, "At the end of the days;" Daniel 1:15, "At the end of ten days;" and Daniel 2:5, Daniel 2:18. The word "might" be employed to denote the "end" or "extremity" of anything, e. g., in respect to "time," and some have supposed that there is a reference here to the later periods of the Roman empire. See Poole's "Synopsis."

But the word is also used to denote "the sum," or "the whole number;" and then the phrase is equivalent to "a part - as" e. g., in the phrase האלהים בית כלי מקצת miqetsât kelēy bēyth hâ'elohı̂ym - from the sum of the vessels of the house of God" Daniel 1:2; that is, a portion of the whole number, or a part. Compare Nehemiah 7:70, "from the sum of the heads of the fathers;" that is, a part of them. In the latter part of the clause it is מנת mı̂nnâh - "from it;" that is, a part of it; partly. The entire phrase means that one part of the whole would be strong, and one part would be fragile. The reference is not to the "time" when this would occur, but to the "fact" that it would be so. The idea in this verse does not vary materially from that in the former, except that in that, the prominent thought is, that there would be "strength" in the kingdom: in this, the idea is, that while there would be strength in the kingdom, there would be also the elements of weakness.

43

Daniel 2:43

開啟正文

「你既見鐵與泥攙雜,那國民也必與各種人攙雜」——本節有過各種解釋,確實不易解明。「人種」一語,恰當地指有別於由鐵所代表之原有血統的某種東西;某種外來的混雜,與它如此不同、又如此少與它融合,以致恰當地由泥與鐵相比來代表。斯圖亞特教授把它解釋為婚姻聯盟,認為所表達的意念是:「這類聯盟的目的既是聯合、或至少意在帶來太平的狀態,那目的卻以特殊的方式被挫敗了。」譯作「人」的字(אֱנָשָׁא('enâshâ'))在希伯來文和迦勒底文中,用來指等級較低的人——下層、平民——有別於由 אִישׁ('ı̂ysh)所代表較高貴的階層。見 Isaiah 2:9;Isaiah 5:15;Proverbs 8:4。

此處所用的字(出自 אָנַשׁ('ânash)——患病、不安、無可救藥)也恰當地標示軟弱或低劣,恰可以泥與鐵相對比來代表。「人種」這說法,既如此使用,便指某種較次種族與原有血統的攙混;在一個主權之下的某種聯合或結盟,它要大大削弱整體,儘管原有的力量仍然強大。這話描繪一族強大有力的人——構成那帝國的骨幹和筋腱——與另一族或別族攙雜;他們雖在政府中相聯,卻永不能融合,永不能同化。帝國中這外來的攙雜,將是軟弱的恆久根源,並將不斷導向分裂和黨爭,因為這樣的元素永不能和諧。

還可注意:這情形將達到前三國中任一國都不曾有的程度。事實上,那幾國中沒有與外族攙混到破壞帝國均質性的地步。它們大體上是東方人;有東方人的語言、風度、習俗、習慣;而就精力與能力——此處所論的要點——而論,被征服的行省與君主國的原有材料之間,沒有明顯的分別。因着臣服的行動,他們實質上成為一個民,輕易彼此融合。這話確實適用於這些君主國的前兩個——巴比倫和瑪代波斯;對馬其頓的適用性雖較弱,但它也沒有像羅馬那樣,與外族人民攙混到構成異質元素的地步。在那君主國中,「力量」的元素是由亞歷山大和他的希臘人「注入」的;一切軟弱的元素都在帝國原有的材料之中。在羅馬,力量的元素——「鐵」——在帝國原有的材料之中;軟弱的、異質的元素——「泥」——乃是從外族引入的。這一考量或許有助於顯明,格羅提烏斯、斯圖亞特教授等人所持、這第四君主國乃緊接亞歷山大之後之國的見解,並無充分根據。於是,惟一的問題是:在羅馬帝國的體制中,當它繼其他三國而成為普世君主國之時,是否有一種外來元素的攙混,足以恰當地由泥與原有較強的材料「鐵」相對比來代表。我說「當它繼其他三國而成為普世君主國之時」,因為但以理注視它的惟一觀點正是那一點。他看它,如同看其他諸國一樣,是已經這樣的一個普世統治權,而不是它先前的樣子、或它崛起掌權的步驟。

如今,看那時期的羅馬帝國——它佔據普世君主國地位的時期、也就是「從山鑿出的石頭」長大充滿天下的時期——不難找到它與別國、與「人種」的攙混,足以由同一像中「鐵與泥」永不能融合的描述來恰當表達。所指大概是那種外族的攙混,它如此顯著地成為羅馬帝國的特色,部分起於它的征服,部分起於帝國末年別族的入侵;就兩者而論,都沒有真正的融合,使帝國原有的活力實質上仍保其力量,卻引入了永不與它融合的其他元素,如同泥與鐵攙雜。

(1) 起於他們的征服。塔西佗說:「統治的貪慾,比一切別的情感更為熾烈」;這在羅馬人身上極為真實。他們企圖統治世界;在他們邁向普世征服的步伐中,使許多民族臣服,並准許他們取得公民權;這些民族與構成羅馬權勢的原有材料沒有親和力,從未真正與它融合,正如泥之於鐵。

(2) 這在帝國後期、從別國尤其斯堪的納維亞地區湧入帝國的諸族身上,也同樣真實;羅馬人被迫與他們結盟,卻不能與他們融合。吉本先生說:「在皇帝卡拉卡拉在位年間,為數不可勝數的蘇維匯人出現在美因河岸、羅馬諸行省的附近,尋求食物、擄物或榮耀。那支倉促召集的志願軍,漸漸凝聚成一個偉大而持久的民族;它既由這麼多不同的部落組成,便取名阿勒曼尼人——意即『全體之人』——以標示其多元的世系和共同的勇武。」凡讀過羅馬史的,沒有人不知道哥特人、匈奴和汪達爾人的入侵,或這些入侵對帝國的影響。

沒有人不知道他們與古羅馬人攙混的方式,也不知道藉着聯姻等與他們結盟的種種嘗試——這些嘗試總像要聯合鐵與泥一樣。「狄奧多西大帝的女兒普拉西迪亞,嫁給了哥特王阿道爾福斯;汪達爾人斯提里科的兩個女兒,先後嫁給霍諾里烏斯;另一個汪達爾人蓋薩里克,把被擄的帝國公主尤多基亞給了他的兒子為妻。」外族攙混對帝國品格和命運的影響,大概再沒有比吉本先生在其第七章末對羅馬歷史的總結評述中描繪得更生動的了;那同時也幾乎是對但以理這預言最清楚、最有力的註解。「在起初四個世紀中,」他說,「羅馬人在貧窮這所艱辛的學校裏,學得了戰爭和治國的美德;憑着這些美德的奮力運用、並憑着命運的相助,他們在其後三個世紀的進程中,取得了對歐、亞、非許多國家的絕對帝權。最後的三百年,則消耗於表面的繁榮和內在的衰落。那由士兵、官員和立法者組成、構成羅馬人民三十五個部族的民族,消解於人類的共同大眾之中,與百萬領受了羅馬之名、卻未領受羅馬之精神的奴性行省居民混為一體。一支從臣民和邊疆蠻族中招募的僱傭軍,成了惟一保存並濫用其獨立的階層。藉着他們喧嚷的選舉,一個敘利亞人、一個哥特人、或一個阿拉伯人,被高舉到羅馬的寶座上,受命對西庇阿們的征服地和故國施行專制之權。羅馬帝國的疆界,仍從西洋延伸到底格里斯河,從阿特拉斯山延伸到萊茵河和多瑙河。在凡人未經細察的眼中,腓力看來不亞於昔日哈德良或奧古斯都的強大君主。形式依舊,而賦予生機的健康與活力已逝。百姓的勤勞,因長期一連串的壓制而沮喪枯竭。軍團的紀律——它在別的一切美德消滅之後,獨自支撐着國家的偉大——被諸帝的野心所腐化,或因其懦弱而弛廢。邊防的力量——它向來在兵器而不在堡壘——不知不覺被削弱;最富庶的行省暴露於蠻族的貪婪或野心之下,他們不久便察覺了羅馬帝國的衰亡。」——卷一頁110、111;哈珀版(紐約),1829年。

比較 Revelation 6:1-8 的註釋。羅馬帝國在為神兒子的降臨預備世界、並在祂之國的設立上,扮演的角色如此重要,以致它顯然宜於成為預言的一個特別題目。我們已見到,其他三國各自在為基督教的引入預備世界上都有重要的影響,都被定意在「救贖史」中成就重要的一部分。而羅馬帝國的角色,比其中任何一國或全部更直接、更重要;因為 (a) 那是神兒子顯現時執掌至上權的帝國;(b) 那國在為祂的來臨預備世界上,作了更直接而重要的工作;(c) 神兒子是在由那主權而來的權柄之下被處死的;(d) 古代的制度是藉着它被帶到終結;並且 (e) 新宗教是在它之下傳遍世界的。因此,在闡釋這預言時,稍加具體地論及這「第四國」在促進救贖之工、或在引入並設立那必「永不敗壞」之國上所成就的事,或有好處。那角色關乎以下幾點:

(1) 一個普世統治權的設立;世界被置於一個權杖之下的事實,大大有利於基督教的傳播。我們已見到,在此前的諸王朝——巴比倫、波斯和馬其頓——之下,這樣一個普世帝國在早期時代對為彌賽亞的降臨「預備」世界是重要的。當祂即將實際顯現、祂的宗教將要傳遍世界的時候,這就更為重要。只有一個帝國;羅馬人已使世界各地之間的交通手段如此擴展;一個有權享有公民特權的人,幾乎能在世界任何地方要求保護——這一切都大大有利於新體系的擴散。

(2) 普世太平的盛行。世界既已服在羅馬權勢之下,征服便告結束。經過這麼長久的動盪和紛爭,世界終於太平。遙遠的行省安靜地服從羅馬的管制;曾在首都肆虐已久的內訌平息了;奧古斯都既戰勝了他一切的對手,便安然佔據帝位;而作為普世太平的標誌,雅努斯神廟的門關閉了。在他們的歷史中,那廟門罕有關閉的時候;然而,當「和平之君」將要來到時,世界理當安息,兵戈的鏗鏘理當止息。這是祂統治之本質的一個美好象徵。一個向來在衝突中的世界,收刀入鞘;戰陣的喧嚷消逝;戰旗收卷;羅馬的軍團在征服的進程中停步,世界安靜地等候神兒子的來臨。

(3) 羅馬的權勢,在神兒子來所要成就的那大事——為世人的罪作出贖價——上,也扮演了重要的角色。在神的旨意中,事情如此安排:祂要死,不是死於本族本國之人手中,而是死於外人之手、在他們的權柄之下。這事的必要和確實,早由救主預言 (Matthew 20:19;Mark 10:33;Luke 18:32);顯然,如此成就有重要的理由;而把猶太地和其餘的世界置於羅馬軛下的設計之一,無疑正是要使它以這方式成就。在這樣作的「理由」中,可提出以下幾項:

(a) 這樣,異教世界與猶太社會,都在這大事中有分。祂是為全世界——猶太人和外邦人——死的;祂死的方式反映這一事實、人類的兩大支派都在這大事中聯合,是重要的。這樣,它便不再單是一樁「猶太人的」事;不再是單與猶太有關的事件,而是一樁世界的大事;一樁世界的代表都有分的交易。

(b) 這樣,它成了眾所周知的事。救主之死的記述,自然會傳到首都,引起掌權者的注意。福音在羅馬傳開時,便可以恰當地申明:羅馬自己在其中有重要的參與,因為彌賽亞是在羅馬的權柄之下被處死的。

(c) 因此,羅馬人的參與,確立了耶穌之死的確實性,從而確立了祂從死裏復活的確實性。要證明後者,前者必須確定,有關祂死亡真實性的一切疑問必須消除。這是由羅馬巡撫彼拉多的手作成的。祂的死向他報告了,他也確知了。這成了有記錄的事;一個不容爭論的要點。因此,後來一切關乎基督宗教的爭論中,祂確實在羅馬巡撫彼拉多手下被處死一事,從未成為疑問——無論對祂復活的事實曾有過甚麼疑問。

(d) 羅馬人在確立救主的「無辜」上,其角色同樣重要。彼拉多經過在他面前耐心而反覆的審訊之後,被迫說祂對所控之事是無辜的,在祂身上查不出甚麼罪來。在傳揚福音時,能夠向全世界宣告這一點,有極重大的意義。人永不能指控福音說,其創立者觸犯了法律、該當作罪犯處死,因為羅馬巡撫自己的記錄表明恰好相反。因此,羅馬人在贖罪大工中的角色——雖非出於他們的本意——在基督教的確立上有無可估量的重要性;可以推想,世界之被置於他們管制之下、彌賽亞之如此安排在他們所授權柄之下受難,至少部分正是為着這一點。

(4) 羅馬人對那要充滿全地的宗教,還有另一個重要的角色:毀滅耶路撒冷城,使整個希伯來禮儀制度最終完結。當贖價在十字架上作成時,古代的祭祀便實際上失去了功效。那時,聖殿、祭壇和古代的祭司體系都不再需要了。古代的禮儀必須停止;它們既已失去功效,便不可再有延續的可能。於是,在救主死後約三十年之內——那時已有時間看出贖價對聖殿禮儀的影響;已很清楚它們不再有效、不再有意義、不再必要——羅馬人被容許毀滅那城、那壇和那殿,把整個制度永遠終結。古代敬拜的所在成了一堆廢墟;祭壇被推翻,永不再建;古代儀文的盛況和輝煌永遠逝去。那是神的設計,要那制度永遠終結;因此,憑祂的護理,事情如此安排:荒涼要蔓延到主被釘十字架之城,猶太人永不能再在那裏築壇建殿。直到今日,他們始終無力在那裏點燃祭牲之火,或使香的煙在一座奉獻給列祖之神敬拜的殿中上升。因此,這第四國的角色,在那要存到永遠、要充滿全地之國的引入和確立上,極其重要;故此,此處提及它,並在 Daniel 7 中更廣泛地提及。

英文原文

And whereas thou sawest iron mixed with miry clay, they shall mingle themselves with the seed of men - Various explanations have been given of this verse, and it certainly is not of easy interpretation. The phrase "seed of men," would properly denote something different from the original stock that was represented by iron; some foreign admixture that would be so unlike that, and that would so little amalgamate with it, as to be properly represented by clay as compared with iron. Prof. Stuart interprets this of matrimonial alliances, and supposes that the idea expressed is, that, "while the object of such alliances was union, or at least a design to bring about a peaceable state of things, that object was, in a peculiar manner, defeated." The word rendered "men" (אנשׁא 'ănâshâ') is employed in Hebrew and in Chaldee to denote men of an inferior class - the lower orders, the common herd - in contradistinction from the more elevated and noble classes, represented by the word אישׁ 'ı̂ysh. See Isaiah 2:9; Isaiah 5:15; Proverbs 8:4.

The word here used also (from אנשׁ 'ânash) - to be sick, ill at ease, incurable), would properly denote feebleness or inferiority, and would be aptly represented by clay as contrasted with iron. The expression "seed of men," as here used, would therefore denote some intermingling of an inferior race with the original stock; some union or alliance under the one sovereignty, which would greatly weaken it as a whole, though the original strength still was great. The language would represent a race of mighty and powerful men, constituting the stamina - the bone and the sinew of the empire - mixed up with another race or other races, with whom, though they were associated in the government, they could never be blended; could never assimilate. This foreign admixture in the empire would be a constant source of weakness, and would constantly tend to division and faction, for such elements could never harmonize.

It is further to be remarked, that this would exist to a degree which would not be found in either of the three previous kingdoms. In fact, in these kingdoms there was no such intermingling with foreign nations as to destroy the homogeneousness of the empire. They were, in the main, Orientals; with the language, the manners, the customs, the habits of Orientals; and in respect to energy and power - the point here under consideration - there was no marked distinction between the subjected provinces and the original materials of the monarchy. By the act of subjection, they became substantially one people, and readily blended together. This remark will certainly apply to the two first of these monarchies - the Babylonian and the Medo-Persian; and though with less force to the Macedonian, yet it was not true of that, that it became so intermingled with foreign people as to constitute heterogeneous elements as it was of the Roman. In that monarchy, the element of "strength" was "infused" by Alexander and his Greeks; all the elements of weakness were in the original materials of the empire.

In the Roman, the element of strength - "the iron" - was in the original material of the empire; the weak, the heterogeneous element - "the clay" - was what was introduced from the foreign nations. This consideration may perhaps do something to show that the opinion of Grotius, Prof. Stuart, and others, that this fourth monarchy was what immediately succeeded Alexander is not well founded. The only question then is, whether, in the constitution of the Roman empire, at the time when it became the successor of the other three as a universal monarchy, there was such an intermingling of a foreign element, as to be properly represented by clay as contrasted with the original and stronger material "iron." I say, "at the time when it became the successor of the other three as a universal monarchy," because the only point of view in which Daniel contemplated it was that. He looked at this, as he did at the others, as already such a universal dominion, and not at what it was before, or at the steps by which it rose to power.

Now, on looking at the Roman empire at that period, and during the time when it occupied the position of the universal monarchy, and during which the "stone cut out of the mountain" grew and filled the world, there is no difficulty in finding such an intermingling with other nations - "the seed of men" - as to be properly described by "iron and clay" in the same image that could never be blended, The allusion is, probably, to that intermingling with other nations which so remarkably characterized the Roman empire, and which arose partly from its conquests, and partly from the inroads of other people in the latter days of the empire, and in reference to both of which there was no proper amalgamation, leaving the original vigour of the empire substantially in its strength, but introducing other elements which never amalgamated with it, and which were like clay intermingled with iron.

(1) from their conquests. Tacitus says, "Dominandi cupido cunctis affectibus flagrantior est" - the lust of ruling is more ardent than all other desires; and this was eminently true of the Romans. They aspired at the dominion of the world; and, in their strides at universal conquest, they brought nations under their subjection, and admitted them to the rights of citizenship, which had no affinity with the original material which composed the Roman power, and which never really amalgamated with it, anymore than clay does with iron.

(2) This was true, also, in respect to the hordes that poured into the empire from other countries, and particularly from the Scandinavian regions, in the latter periods of the empire, and with which the Romans were compelled to form alliances, while, at the same time, they could not amalgamate with them. "In the reign of the emperor Caracalla," says Mr. Gibbon, "an innumerable swarm of Suevi appeared on the banks of the Mein, and in the neighborhood of the Roman provinces, in quest of food, or plunder, or glory. The hasty army of volunteers gradually coalesced into a great and permanent nation, and as it was composed of so many different tribes, assumed the name of Allemanni, or "allmen," to denote their various lineage, and their common bravery." No reader of the Roman history can be ignorant of the invasions of the Goths, the Huns, and the Vandals, or of the effects of these invasions on the empire.

No one can be ignorant of the manner in which they became intermingled with the ancient Roman people, or of the attempts to form alliances with them, by intermarriages and otherwish, which were always like attempts to unite iron and clay. "Placidia, daughter of Theodosius the Great, was given in marriage to Adolphus, king of the Goths; the two daughters of Stilicho, the Vandal, were successively married to Honorius; and Genseric, another Vandal, gave Eudocia, a captive imperial princess, to his son to wife." The effects of the intermingling of foreign people on the character and destiny of the empire cannot be stated perhaps in a more graphic manner than is done by Mr. Gibbon, in the summary review of the Roman History, with which he concludes his seventh chapter, and at the same time there could scarcely be a more clear or cxpressive commentary on this prophecy of Daniel. "During the four first ages," says he, "the Romans, in the laborious school of poverty, had acquired the virtues of war and government: by the vigorous exertion of those virtues, and by the assistance of fortune, they had obtained, in the course of the three succeeding centuries, an absolute empire over many countries of Europe, Asia, and Africa. The last three hundred years had been consumed in apparent prosperity and internal decline. The nation of soldiers, magistrates, and legislators, who composed the thirty-five tribes of the Roman people, was dissolved into the common mass of mankind, and confounded with the million of servile provincials who had received the name without adopting the spirit of Romans. A mercenary army, levied among the subjects and barbarians of the frontier, was the only order of men who preserved and abused their independence.

By their tumultuary election, a Syrian, a Goth, or an Arab was exalted to the throne of Rome, and invested with despotic power over the conquests and over the country of the Scipios. The limits of the Roman empire still extended from the Western Ocean to the Tigris, and from Mount Atlas to the Rhine and the Danube. To the undiscerning eye of the common, Philip appeared a monarch no less powerful than Hadrian or Augustus had formerly been. The form was still the same, but the animating health and rigor were fled. The industry of the people was discouraged and exhausted by a long series of oppression. The discipline of the legions, which alone, after the extinction of every other virtue, had propped the greatness of the state, was corrupted by the ambition, or relaxed by the weakness of the emperors. The strength of the frontiers, which had always consisted in arms rather than in fortifications, was insensibly undermined, and the fairest provinces were left exposed to the rapaciousness or ambition of the barbarians, who soon discovered the decline of the Roman empire." - Vol. i. pp. 110, 111; Harper's Edit. (N. Y.) 1829.

Compare the notes at Revelation 6:1-8. The agency of the Roman empire was so important in preparing the world for the advent of the Son of God, and in reference to the establishment of his kingdom, that there was an obvious proriety that it should be made a distinct subject of prophecy. We have seen that each of the other three kingdoms had an important influence in preparing the world for the introduction of Christianity, and was designed to accomplish an important part in the "History of Redemption." The agency of the Roman empire was more direct and important than any one or all of these, for

(a) that was the empire which had the supremacy when the Son of God appeared;

(b) that kingdom had performed a more direct and important work in preparing the world for his coming;

(c) it was under authority derived from that sovereignty that the Son of God was put to death; and

(d) it was by that, that the ancient dispensation was brought to an end; and

(e) it was under that, that the new religion was spread through the world. It may be of use, therefore, in an exposition of this prophecy, to refer, with some particularity, to the things that were accomplished by this "fourth kingdom" in furthering the work of redemption, or in introducing and establishing the kingdom that was to be "set up, and which was never to be destroyed." That agency related to the following points:

(1) The establishment of a universal dominion; the fact that the world was brought under one scepter greatly favorcd the propagation of the Christian religion. We have seen, under the previous dynasties - the Babylonian, Persian, and macedonian - that such an universal empire was important in earlier ages to "prepare" the world for the advent of the Messiah. This was still more important when he was about actually to appear, and his religion was to be spread over the world. It greatly favored the diffusion of the new system that there was one empire; that the means of communication from one part of the world to another had been so extended by the Romans; and that one who was entitled to the privileges of citizenship could claim protection in nearly every part of the world.

(2) The prevalence of universal peace. The world had become subject to the Roman power, and conquest was at an end. The world at last, after so long agitations and strifes, was at peace. The distant provinces quietly submitted to the Roman control; the civil dissensions which had reigned so long at the capital were hushed; Augustus, having triumphed over all his rivals, quietly occupied the imperial throne, and, as a symbol of the universal peace, the temple of Janus was closed. Rarely in their history had that temple been closed before; and yet there was an obvious propriety that when the "Prince of Peace" should come, the world should be at rest, and that the clangor of arms should cease. It was a beautiful emblem of the nature of his reign. A world that had been always in conflict before rested on its arms; the tumult of battle had died away; the banners of war were furled; the legions of Rome paused in their career of conquest, and the world tranquilly waited for the coming of the Son of God.

(3) The Roman power accomplished an important agency in the great transaction which the Son of God came to perform in his making an atonement for the sins of the world. It was so arranged, in the Divine counsels, that he should be put to death, not by the hands of his own kindred and countrymen, but by the hands of foreigners, and under their authority. The necessity and the certainty of this was early predicted by the Saviour Matthew 20:19; Mark 10:33; Luke 18:32, and it is clear that there were important reasons why it should be thus done; and doubtless one design of bringing Judea and the rest of the world under the Roman yoke was, that it might be accomplished in this way. Among the "reasons" for this may be suggested such as the following:

(a) The pagan world, as well as the Jewish community, thus had a part in the great transaction. He died for the whole world - Jews and Gentiles - and it was important that, that fact should be referred to in the manner of his death, and that the two great divisions of the human family should be united in the great transaction. It thus became not a "Jewish" affair only; not an event in which Judea alone was interested, but an affair of the world; a transaction in which the representatives of the world took their part.

(b) It was thus made a matter of publicity. The account of the death of the Saviour would thus, of course, be transmitted to the capital, and would demand the attention of those who were in power. When the gospel was preached at Rome, it would be proper to allege that it was a thing in which Rome itself had had an important agency, from the fact that under the Roman authority the Messiah had been put to death.

(c) The agency of the Romans, therefore, established the certainty of the death of Jesus, and consequently the certainty of his having risen from the dead. In order to demonstrate the latter, it was indispensable that the former should be made certain, and that all questions in regard to the reality of Iris death should be placed beyond a doubt. This was done by the agency of Pilate, a Roman governor. His death was certified to him, and he was satisfied of it. It became a matter of record; a point about which there could be no dispute. Accordingly, in all the questions that came up in reference to the religion of Christ, it was never made a matter of doubt that he had been really put to death under Pilate, the Roman governor, whatever question may have arisen about the fact of his resurrection.

(d) Equally important was the agency of the Romans in establishing establishing the "innocence" of the Saviour. After patient and repeated trials before himself, Pilate was constrained to say that he was innocent of the charges alleged against him, and that no fault could be found in him. In proclaiming the gospel, it was of immense importance to be able to affirm this throughout the world. It could never be alleged against the gospel that its Author had violated the laws; that he deserved to be put to death as a malefactor, for the records of the Roman governor himself showed the contrary. The agency of the Romans, therefore, in the great work of the atonement, though undesigned on their part, was of inestimable importance in the establishment of the Christian religion; and it may be presumed that it was for this, in part at least, that the world was placed under their control, and that it was so ordered that the Messiah suffered under authority derived from them.

(4) There was another important agency of the Romans in reference to the religion that was to fill the earth. It was in destroying the city of Jerusalem, and bringing to a final end the whole system of Hebrew rites and ceremonies. The ancient sacrifices lost their efficacy really when the atonement was made on the cross. Then there was no need of the temple, and the altar, and the ancient priesthood. It was necessary that the ancient rites should cease, and that, having now lost their efficacy, there should be no possibility of perpetuating them. Accordingly, within the space of about thirty years after the death of the Saviour, when there had been time to perceive the bearing of the atonement on their temple rites; when it was plain that they were no longer efficacious, significant, or necessary, the Romans were suffered to destroy the city, the altar, and the temple, and to bring the whole system to a perpetual end. The place where the ancient worship had been celebrated was tiaade a heap of ruins; the altar was overturned, never to be built again; and the pomp and splendor of the ancient ritual passed away forever. It was the design of God that that system should come to a perpetual end; and hence, by his providence, it was so arranged, that ruin should spread over the city where the Lord was crucified, and that the Jewish people should never build an altar or a temple there again. To this day it has never been in their power to kindle the fire of sacrifice there, or to cause the smoke of incense to ascend in a temple consecrated to the worship of the God of their fathers. The agency of this fourth kingdom, therefore, was exceedingly important in the introduction and establishment of that kingdom which was to be perpetual, and which was to fill the earth, and hence, the reference to it here, and the more extended reference in Daniel 7.

44

Daniel 2:44

開啟正文

「當那列王在位的時候」——旁註作「他們的」。正文「這些王」的讀法更為正確。武加大譯本譯作「在這些國的日子」。這段經文自然而明顯的意思是:在上述諸國存續期間、或它們最終過去之前——即在最後一國消滅之前——地上必另立一個國,存到永遠。在相繼的普世君主國盡數過去之前,那永不敗壞的新國必被設立。這樣的說法並不罕見。「如此,我們若說某事發生在不列顛列王的日子,當然不會理解為它貫穿他們所有的治世,而只是發生在其中某一個治世之中。」——布什教授。照樣,Ruth 1:1 說:「當士師秉政的時候,國中遭遇饑荒」;即那饑荒發生在那一般治理下的某個時候、或在它過去之前,顯然不是說每位士師的年日都有饑荒。照樣,論耶弗他,說他葬在「基列的城邑」;即其中之一。約西亞葬在「他列祖的墳墓裏」;即在其中一座。

「天上的神」——在天上掌權的神;真神。這是要顯明這國的神聖起源,並使它有別於其他一切。此處所指的其他諸國雖然都在神的管制之下、都被定意在為這國預備世界上扮演重要角色,卻沒有被描繪為直接源於天。它們按地上君主國的常規方式建立;這國卻要有屬天的起源。與此相符,彌賽亞來所要設立的國,在新約中常稱為「天國」、「神的國」等。比較 Micah 4:7;Luke 1:32-33。

「必另立一國」——「必使之興起或站立」——יְקִים(yeqı̂m)。它不欠它的起源於地上帝國得以建立的那些常因——征服、人的謀略、強大的聯盟、世襲的產業——它之所以存在,是因為神必「設立」並「組成」它。此處所指是哪一國,沒有合理的懷疑;幾乎所有解經家都認為它指彌賽亞的國。誠然,把第四國指為西流基和拉基德諸國的格羅提烏斯,為了一貫,不得不把這國指為羅馬的權勢;但在這解釋上,他幾乎是——若非全然——孤立的。然而連他也認為所指不僅是「異教的」羅馬,而是羅馬作為權柄永久的所在——永存的國——教會的座位:「羅馬帝國將永存,因為它將是教會的座位。」而且,他雖主張首要指羅馬,卻不得不承認,此處的話在更高的意義上對基督的國為真:「更深的含義是:基督將終結一切地上的帝國。」但所指為何國,不能真有疑問。它明確宣告的神聖起源;它永不敗壞的宣告;它必吞滅別國、必存到永遠的保證;並這些宣告與新約中論彌賽亞之國的記載完全相符——這一切都無疑地顯明,所指乃是救贖主的國。

「必永不敗壞」——其他諸國必要過去。巴比倫將被瑪代波斯繼起,那國被馬其頓繼起,那國又被羅馬繼起,而羅馬又輪到被天上的神所立的國繼起。這國卻是永遠的。沒有一物能有權推翻它。它必活在其他一切王國的興衰更迭之中,並比它們全都長存。比較 Daniel 7:14 的註釋;並 Daniel 2:45 註釋末尾對此處所教教義的總結。

「這國必不歸與別國的人」——按字面,「它的國必不歸與別國的人」;即屬於這國或統治權的執掌之權,永不離開它合法的擁有者、被轉到別人手中。至於別的國,君王被廢、權柄落入篡奪者之手,是常見的事。這在這國卻永不會發生。政府永不換手。行政必是永遠的。沒有外來的權勢能揮動這國的權杖。此處「或許」暗指這一事實:上述其他每一國,在同一疆土上的權柄「確實」轉到別國之人的手中。如此,在同一疆土上,統治權從巴比倫眾君手中轉到波斯人古列手中,再轉到馬其頓人亞歷山大手中,再轉到羅馬人手中。這在天上的神所要設立的國,卻永不會發生。在屬於它的帝國疆域之內,它永不換手;這永存的應許,使這國與它一切的前任截然不同。

「卻要打碎滅絕那一切國」——如由那非人手從山鑿出、撞擊那像的石頭所代表。見 Daniel 2:34-35 的註釋。

此處立時面對兩個頗難解答的探究。第一,若這是指彌賽亞的國,這描述怎能是真實的?這裏的話似乎暗示某種猛烈的行動;某種實際壓碎的力量;有如征服中列國被制伏時的情形。這豈不表明這裏所代表的國,要像其他諸國一樣以征服開路,而非以無聲而和平的影響?這話果真適用於基督之國取代其他一切的方式嗎?回答這些問題,可以說:(1) 預言中顯明的主要意念,與其說是「猛烈」,不如說是所指諸國必「全然終結」;即在這新國之下,它們最終要完全止息;或說它們必被除去、被取代。這由 Daniel 2:35 所代表:其他諸國的材料,在此之前被描繪為變得如「夏天禾場上的糠秕」,「被風吹散,無處可尋」。從山鑿出的石頭起初微小,卻神秘地擴大,佔據了它們所在的位置,最終充滿天下。一個漸進拆毀的過程,藉着持續的磨耗作用於它們,一塊塊地除去它們、佔據其位,直到它們消失,直到新國完全取代它們的位置——這似乎符合預言描述中一切本質的東西。見 Daniel 2:34 論「打在這像的腳上」一語的註釋。但是 (2) 這話與論彌賽亞之國的預言中常用的說法相符——那些描述「能力」之存在、以制伏列國、終結世上對抗之國的說法。如此,Psalms 2:9:「你必用鐵杖打破他們;你必將他們如同窯匠的瓦器摔碎。」Isaiah 9:12(參 Isaiah 60:12):「那一邦那一國不事奉你,就必滅亡,那些國也必全然荒廢。」照樣 1 Corinthians 15:24-25:「他既將一切執政的、掌權的、有能的都毀滅了……因為基督必要作王,等神把一切仇敵都放在他的腳下。」這些說法標示:其他諸國要完全臣服於彌賽亞的國——新約中稱為「神的國」。它們無疑暗示將有某種「力量」的使用——因為這大工離了「能力」的存在便不能成就——但可以說:(a) 它不一定意味着「屬身體的」力量,或如王國通常被傾覆的那種能力。救贖主的國是「原則」之國;那些原則必制伏列國,使他們臣服。(b) 它不一定意味着此處所描述的效果會「一下子」成就。它可以是漸進的過程,如對那像不斷的擊打,最終把它磨成粉末。

此處興起的另一個問題是:怎能說那將要設立的新國必「打碎滅絕這一切國」?在羅馬時期那像的毀滅,怎會實際上就是金、銀、銅所代表的前「三」國的毀滅?它們在羅馬權勢出現之前,豈不實際已經過去了?然而,Daniel 2:35 的描述豈不是鐵、泥、銅、銀、金一同砸得粉碎,都如夏天禾場上的糠秕被吹散?是否假定這些王國都同時存在,那表號性「石頭」的行動對它們全體都一樣?對這些問題,我們可以回答:(1) 其意無疑是:在所提「石頭」行動之時,這些國中的三國已經過去。它們是「相繼」的王國,大體佔有同一疆土,不是各佔不同疆土的同時代君主國。(2)「石頭」的行動,事實上在一個極重要的意義上,是要及於它們全體;即要及於那「構成」這金、銀、銅、鐵相繼諸國的東西。每一個在其時都是普世君主國。同一疆土實質上為它們全體所佔。瑪代波斯的權杖延伸於巴比倫治下的地區;馬其頓又及於其上;羅馬又及於其上。相繼的君主國中誠然各有「增添」;但任何影響羅馬帝國的事,也就影響了事實上曾是巴比倫、瑪代波斯和馬其頓的東西。因此,羅馬帝國時期那像的拆毀,實際上就是全體的拆毀。(3) 從表號性描述的性質看,這解釋是必要的。君王在夢中的眼目,乃是看那像為「一個輝煌的整體」。為着眼前的目的,他必須「一時」看見它全部,才能對它有清晰的概念。這目的使「相繼地」展示諸國為不可能;它們全體立時立在他面前。沒有人能懷疑,本「可以」有別的呈現方式,諸國本可以按其次序一一從他面前經過;但那呈現便不那麼宏偉而威嚴。而這設計使那像在它被拆毀之前,必須以「完整」的形態保持在心目中。若把頭描繪為先被除去,然後是肩和胸,然後是肚腹和腰,直到只剩腳和腳指,那便不體面了。必須保持「那巨大威嚴力量之像」的呈現,直到一個新權勢興起、「將它全部拆毀」。經文沒有描繪尼布甲尼撒看見像的各部分相繼出現或消失。他不是先看見金頭從地上升起,然後其他部分相繼出現;也不是看見金頭消失,然後別的部分,直到只剩腳和腳指。這樣的呈現會毀壞整體形象的端莊與美;正如不能因為尼布甲尼撒起初看見整個像以完整的形式立着,就推論這些王國必都同時存在;照樣,也不能因為他看見石頭打在像上時整個像仍立着,就推論這些王國那時都必仍存在。(4) 還可補充:末後一國的毀滅,實際上就是前三國全體的毀滅。全部的權力既已集中於它,那拆毀便影響整個系列。

英文原文

And in the days of these kings - Margin, "their." The reading in the text "these kings" - is the more correct. The Vulgate renders this, "in the days of these kingdoms." The natural and obvious sense of the passage is, that during the continuance of the kingdoms above-mentioned, or before they should finally pass away, that is, before the last one should become extinct, another kingdom would be established on the earth which would be perpetual. Before the succession of universal monarchies should have passed away, the new kingdom would be set up that would never be destroyed. Such language is not uncommon. "Thus, if we were to speak of anything taking place in the days of British kings, we should not of course understand it as running through all their reigns, but merely as occurring in some one of them." - Prof. Bush. So it is said in Ruth 1:1 : "It came to pass in the days when the judges ruled, that there was a famine in the land;" that is, the famine occurred sometime under that general administration, or before it had passed away, evidently not meaning that there was a famine in the reign of each one. So it is said of Jephthah, that he was buried "in the cities of Gilead;" that is, some one of them. Josiah was buried in, "the sepulchres of his fathers;" that is, in some one of them.

Shall the God of heaven - The God, who rules in heaven; the true God. This is designed to show the Divine origin of this kingdom, and to distinguish it from all others. Though the others here referred to were under the Divine control, and were designed to act an important part in preparing the world for this, yet they are not represented as deriving their origin directly from heaven. They were founded in the usual manner of earthly monarchies, but this was to have a heavenly origin. In accordance with this, the kingdom which the Messiah came to establish is often called, in the New Testament, "the kingdom of heaven," "the kingdom of God," etc. Compare Micah 4:7; Luke 1:32-33.

Set up a kingdom - "Shall cause to arise or stand up" - יקים yeqı̂ym. It shall not owe its origin to the usual causes by which empires are constituted on the earth by conquests; by human policy; by powerful alliances; by transmitted hereditary possession - but shall exist because God shall "appoint" and "constitute" it. There can be no reasonable doubt as to what kingdom is here intended, and nearly all expositors have supposed that it refers to the kingdom of the Messiah. Grotius, indeed, who made the fourth kingdom refer to the Seleucidse and Lagidse, was constrained by consistency to make this refer to the Roman power; but in this interpretation he stands almost, if not entirely, alone. Yet even he supposes it to refer not to "pagan" Rome only, but to Rome as the perpetual seat of power - the permanent kingdom - the seat of the church: "Imperium Romanum perpetuo mansurum, quod sedes erit ecclesice." And although he maintains that he refers to Rome primarily, yet he is constrained to acknowledge that what is here said is true in a higher sense of the kingdom of Christ: Sensus sublimior, Christum finem impositurum omnibus. imperiis terrestribus. But there can be no real doubt as to what kingdom is intended. Its distinctly declared Divine origin; the declaration that it shall never be destroyed; the assurance that it would absorb all other kingdoms, and that it would stand forever; and the entire accordance of these declarations with the account of the kingdom of the Messiah in the New Testament, show beyond a doubt that the kingdom of the Redeemer is intended.

Which shall never be destroyed - The others would pass away. The Babylonian would be succeeded by the Medo-Persian, that by the Macedonian, that by the Roman, and that in its turn by the one which the God of heaven would set up. This would be perpetual. Nothing would have power to overthrow it. It would live in the revolutions of all other kingdoms, and would survive them all. Compare the notes at Daniel 7:14; and the summary of the doctrines taught here at the close of the notes at Daniel 2:45.

And the kingdom shall not be left to other people - Margin, "thereof. Literally, "Its kingdom shall not be left to other people;" that is, the ruling power appropriate to this kingdom or dominion shall never pass away from its rightful possessor, and be transferred to other hands. In respect to other kingdoms, it often happens that their sovereigns are deposed, and that their power passes into the hands of usurpers. But this can never occur in this kingdom. The government will never change hands. The administration will be perpetual. No foreign power shall sway the scepter of this kingdom. There "may be" an allusion here to the fact that, in respect to each of the other kingdoms mentioned, the power over the same territory "did" pass into the hands of other people. Thus, on the same territory, the dominion passed from the hands of the Babylonian princes to the hands of Cyrus the Persian, and then to the hands of Alexander the Macedonian, and then to the hands of the Romans. But this would never occur in regard to the kingdom which the God of heaven would set up. In the region of empire appropriate to it, it would never change hands; and this promise of perpetuity made this kingdom wholly unlike all its predecessors.

But it shall break in pieces and consume all these kingdoms - As represented by the stone cut out of the mountains without hands, impinging on the image. See the notes at Daniel 2:34-35.

Two inquiries at once meet us here, of somewhat difficult solution. The first is, How, if this is designed to apply to the kingdom of the Messiah, can the description be true? The language here would seem to imply some violent action; some positive crushing force; something like what occurs in conquests when nations are subdued. Would it not appear from this that the kingdom here represented was to make its way by conquests in the same manner as the other kingdoms, rather than by a silent and peaceful influence? Is this language, in fact, applicable to the method in which the kingdom of Christ is to supplant all others? In reply to these questions, it may be remarked,

(1) That the leading idea, as apparent in the prophecy, is not so much that of "violence" as that the kingdoms referred to would be "uttterly brought to an end;" that there would be, under this new kingdom, ultimately an entire cessation of the others; or that they would be removed or supplanted by this. This is represented Daniel 2:35 by the fact that the materials composing the other kingdoms are represented before this as becoming like "the chaff of the summer threshing-floors;" and as "being carried away, so that no place was found for them." The stone cut out of the mountain, small at first, was mysteriously enlarged, so that it occupied the place which they did, and ultimately filled the earth. A process of gradual demolition, acting on them by constant attrition, removing portions of them, and occupying their place until they should disappear, and until there should be a complete substitution of the new kingdom in their place, would seem to correspond with all that is essential in the prophetic description, See the notes at Daniel 2:34, on the expression, "which smote the image upon his feet." But

(2) This language is in accordance with what is commonly used in the predictions respecting the kingdom of the Messiah - language which is descriptive of the existence of "power" in subduing the nations, and bringing the opposing kingdoms of the world to an end. Thus in Psalm 2:9, "Thou shalt break them with a rod of iron: thou shalt dash them in pieces like a potter's vessel." Isaiah 9:12, "for the nation and kingdom that will not serve thee shall perish; yea, those nations shall be utterly wasted." So 1 Corinthians 15:24-25, "When he shall have put down all rule, and all authority and power. For he must reign until he hath put all enemies under his feet." These expressions denote that there will be an entire subjection of other kingdoms to that of the Messiah, called in the New Testament "the kingdom of God." They undoubtedly imply that there will be some kind of "force" employed - for this great work cannot be accomplished without the existence of "power;" but it may be remarked

(a) That it does not necessarily mean that there will be "physical" force, or power like that by which kingdoms have been usually overturned. The kingdom of the Redeemer is a kingdom of "principles," and those principles will subdue the nations, and bring them into subjection.

(b) It does not necessarily mean that the effect here described will be accomplished "at once." It may be by a gradual process, like a continual beating on the image, reducing it ultimately to powder.

The other question which arises here is, How can it be said that the new kingdom which was to be set up would "break in pieces and consume all these kingdoms?" How could the destruction of the image in the Roman period be in fact the destruction of the "three" previous kingdoms, represented by gold, and silver, and brass? Would they not in fact have passed away before the Roman power came into existence? And yet, is not the representation in Daniel 2:35, that the iron, the clay, the brass, the silver, and the gold were broken in pieces together, and were all scattered like the chaff of the summer threshing-floor? Is it supposed that these kingdoms would be all in existence at the same time, and that the action of the symbolic "stone" was to be alike on all of them? To these questions, we may answer,

(1) That the meaning is, undoubtedly, that three of these kingdoms would have passed away at the time of the action of the "stone" referred to. They were to be a "succession" of kingdoms, occupying, to a great extent, the same territory, and not contemporary monarchies occupying distinct territories.

(2) The action of the "stone" was in fact, in a most important sense, to be on them all; that is, it was to be on what "constituted" these successive kingdoms of gold, silver, brass, and iron. Each was in its turn an universal monarchy. The same territory was substantially occupied by them all. The Medo-Persian scepter extended over the region under the Babylonian; the Macedonian over that; the Roman over that. There were indeed "accessions" in each successive monarchy, but still anything which affected the Roman empire affected what had "in fact" been the Babylonian, the Medo-Persian, and the Macedonian. A demolition of the image in the time of the Roman empire would be, therefore, in fact, a demolition of the whole.

(3) This interpretation is necessary from the nature of the symbolic representation. The eye of the monarch in the dream was directed to the image as "a splendid whole." It was necessary to the object in view that he should see it "all at a time," that he might have a distinct conception of it. This purpose made it impossible to exhibit the kingdoms "in succession," but they all stood up before him at once. No one can doubt that there "might" have been a different representation, and that the kingdoms might have been made to pass before him in their order, but the representation would have been less grand and imposing. But this design made it necessary that the image should be kept "entire" before the mind until its demolition. It would have been unseemly to have represented the head as removed, and then the shoulders and breast, and then the belly and thighs, until nothing remained but the feet and toes. It was necessary to keep up the representation of "the image of colossal majesty and strength," until a new power should arise which "would demolish it all." Nebuchadnezzar is not represented as seeing the parts of the image successively appear or disappear. He does not at first see the golden head rising above the earth, and then the other parts in succession; nor the golden head disappearing, and then the other parts, until nothing was left but the feet and the toes. Such a representation would have destroyed the decorum and beauty of the whole figure; and as it cannot be argued that because Nebuchadnezzar saw the whole image at the outset standing in its complete form, that therefore, all these kingdoms must have been simultaneously in existence, so it cannot be argued because he saw the whole image standing when the stone smote upon it, that therefore, all these kingdoms must have had an existence then.

(4) It may be added, that the destruction of the last was in fact the destruction of all the three predecessors. The whole power had become embodied in that, and the demolition affected the whole series.

45

Daniel 2:45

開啟正文

「你既看見非人手鑿出來的一塊石頭……」——關乎此處用詞的含義,見 Daniel 2:34-35 的註釋。「既」字既可連於上文,也可連於下文。按前一方法,本節應在「金」字後有句號;那樣其意便是:「當那些日子,天上的神必另立一國等等,『既因』——或『因為』——你看見一塊石頭」等;即那是它的一個確定標示。按後一方法,其意是:「既因你看見石頭被鑿出、毀滅那像,大神已把將來必有的事指示王」;即那是它必將作成的一個確定標示。武加大譯本作:「照你所看見的,那石頭非人手鑿出,並打碎泥等,大神已把此後將有的事指示了王。」兩種解釋的分別並不要緊。

「從山鑿出」——這在 Daniel 2:34 的陳述中沒有插入。然而那裏似乎已含此意,因為那裏提到石頭是被「鑿出」的。這描述顯然是一塊石頭脫離它本來的母床、山的側面,沒有任何人為,然後從山側滾下,撞擊那像。

「大神已把將來必有的事指示王」——旁註與迦勒底文同,作「此後」。其意不過是:在將來的時候;在某個未來的時期。但以理不把這發現的任何功勞歸於自己,而把它全歸於神。

「那夢既然是這樣,那講解也是確實的」——即它不是虛空飄渺的幻影;不僅是想像的運作。那夢正是君王所料想的一切——將來之事的代表;他對它的掛慮是有充分根據的。但以理對它的應驗,也以最大的確信說話。他知道自己是被引導到這講解,並非憑自己的技能;他的陳述使君王滿意其正確性。有兩個情況大概使它在那君王看來是確定的——如下節所示,也確實如此:一是但以理把那夢召回他的記憶,顯明他是在神聖的引導之下;另一是那講解的合理——它的逼真——其明顯的真實性。它是那夢如此明顯的一個「解釋」,以致尼布甲尼撒,正如從前法老在約瑟解夢時所行的,立時承認了那陳述的正確。

如今既已完成了這段論從山鑿出之石的重要經文的「闡述」,關乎那將要設立、由擊滅那像、並如此奇妙增大充滿全地之石所代表的國的性質,作幾點評述,似屬合宜。它指彌賽亞的國,不能合理地懷疑。從我們面前這段經文所確立、關乎那國的要點,乃是以下這些:

一、它超乎人類的起源。這由「非人手」從山鑿出之石的描述所指明;即顯然不是出於人為,或不出於事件的常規進程。在把它從山分離出來、並在它日後的增長上,都將有一種超乎人類的能力運行。看來如此奇妙的是:它被某種看不見的能力從它原來的安息之處鑿出,並在沒有任何人工的情況下向前推進,直到它工作的大功告成。這被定意標示某種東西,不能有合理的懷疑;因為結果正繫於此。我看不出「從山」鑿出這觀念本身有甚麼特別的意義,也不必在這說法上求精究,去查明那山是否如許多人所設想的,指福音教會所從出的羅馬國;或如奧古斯丁所設想的,指猶太民族;或如加爾文所設想的,指「基督的起源崇高、超乎全世界」;或如別許多人所主張的,指彌賽亞降生的猶太山地;或如另一些人所想像的,指約瑟的墳墓——彌賽亞從那磐石躍出,進入生命與得勝。這一切屬於一種極度瑣碎的解釋體系。此處對山的描繪,不過為求逼真,如比喻中的情節一樣。一塊石頭若「非人手鑿出」,自然會說它是從它所連附的山或母巖鑿出的。這裏的眼目不是注視「山」,以為它有甚麼意義或奇妙;而是注視那如此奧祕地離開其床、向那像滾去的「石頭」。興趣和奇妙之所在、那吸引眼目的奧祕之事,乃是沒有人工的使用;沒有手在工作;沒有看見人在人間成就大效時通常使用的任何普通媒介。而這正恰當地代表這觀念:彌賽亞的國將有超自然的起源。它的起頭將有別於人間通常所見的。這如何恰當地適用於彌賽亞的國——它的起源不在人的能力之中——在此不必詳述。再沒有比這更明顯的;再沒有比新約更常論及的:它有屬天的起源。它不欠它的起頭於人的計劃、謀略或能力。

二、它起初的微弱,與它最終的增長和力量相比。起初它是一塊相對小的石頭,看來全然不足以擊滅並磨碎一座金、銀、銅、鐵的巨像。最終它長成山那樣大,充滿全地。這描述無疑傳達這公正的印象:這由石頭所代表的新權勢,起初將相對微小而軟弱;它的起源與它最終所達到的相比,將有相對的弱小;它看來將全然不足以成就它最終所成就的。不必說,這與彌賽亞之國的起源完全吻合。它處處被描繪為起頭微弱;作為一個體系,在人的眼中,全然不足以成就使別國終結、並使萬國臣服於己這樣的大工。這預言陳述的完全應驗,可見於這樣的情形:(1) 這新權勢的元首——彌賽亞、錫安的王——本身的卑微出身。祂事實上出於一個衰落破落的家族;被列在窮人中;沒有有勢力的朋友或政治的關係;沒有超常的學識優勢;被本國的大多數人以輕蔑鄙視。沒有人會想到,一個出身如此卑微者所創始的宗教,會有能力改變地上列國的命運。(2) 祂之國起初的微弱。祂少數的跟隨者——那一小羣漁夫;起初進展的緩慢;這些情形與但以理的描述驚人地相符。(3) 那一小羣人中,全然沒有看來足以成就這樣大工的東西。他們沒有兵器,沒有財富,沒有政治權力。他們沒有通常用來傾覆王國的任何東西;受差派擔當這工作的一羣漁夫,看來與那從山鑿出的石頭之於擊滅巨像一樣,全然不稱其任。(4) 這起初的一切微弱,與最終的結果形成奇妙的對比,如石頭從山鑿出時之於它充滿全地時的體積。救主自己常論及祂宗教之卑微起源與它將長成之間的對比。起初它像一粒芥菜種,是種子中最小的;後來長成一棵大樹,天上的飛鳥宿在它的枝上。起初它像麵酵,藏在三斗麵裏;最終它要漫過全團,使全團都發起來 (Matthew 13:31-33)。

三、它必取代一切別的國。這由「石頭」擊滅那像、把它磨成粉末、並佔據它所佔的位置和全地的事實清楚指明。這已經解釋過(見 Daniel 2:34-35 的註釋),其意不是藉突然的暴力,而是藉持續的碾磨過程。對地上由金、銀、銅、鐵所代表的諸國,將有這樣的作用,使它們消失;那由「石頭」所代表的新權勢,最終必取代它們的位置。這新權勢既在起源上卑微、在人的眼中軟弱;既沒有甚麼在外表上看似足以達成這結果的東西,所指的便似乎是那將成為其特色的「原則」;這些原則作為能力的元素,必漸進而最終確保那由巨像之擊滅所代表的變化。於是,惟一的問題是:彌賽亞之國中的原則,是否有如此的獨創性和能力,能漸進而確定地改變世上既存的政體,以另一種統治取而代之;或說,它將對列國發揮甚麼影響,使合乎其原則的新的治理方式在地上盛行。它雖看似軟弱,沒有兵器、財富或屬世的聯盟,它裏面卻有「能力」的元素,必最終制伏其他一切治理的原則,取得它們的位置。它的工作誠然是漸進的工作,而且遠未完成;然而它對列國治理原則的影響,至今已經強大,而且必愈發強大,直到「彌賽亞之國的律法通行全地」。這似乎就是這預言表號所要表達的觀念。若有人問,「在哪幾方面」可預期這些變化將被作成,並「在哪幾方面」我們已能辨認這些變化的證據,我們可以舉出以下幾點:(1) 關乎政府得以建立的方式。從前的政府大多是內戰或外戰的結果。古代的政府幾乎全都原初建立在某個軍事領袖的「權力」上,然後靠權力維持。基督教發起了關乎戰爭與征服的新觀念——這些觀念必最終得勝。人的意見再沒有比在「戰爭」上——它的榮耀、它的成就、並那些以血腥得勝最著稱者的名聲——更將被完全顛倒的了。(2) 關乎人民的權利。基督教發起了一項關乎人「權利」的偉大原則:良心的權利;享受自己勞動收益的權利;生命和自由的權利。(3) 關乎壓迫。世界的歷史,在很大程度上乃是壓迫的歷史。但這一切都必因真宗教的原則而改變;當那再無理由使用「壓迫」一詞來描述地上任何實際存在之物的時期來到時,這世界便不同了。那時,那由巨像之擊滅所恰當標示的時候便來到了——巨像象徵一切壓迫的政府,而取代它的,是那起初微不足道、卻有生命活力足以取代它之前一切的東西。

四、這國將是永遠的。這在「永不敗壞」、「必不歸與別國的人」——即永不落入別人之手——的明確陳述中得着斷言。再沒有比這更正面的宣告:此處所指的國將存到一切將來的時代。別的王國都要過去,這國卻不;在其他一切帝國的興衰更迭中,它必長存。自這國設立以來一千八百年的消逝,已大大印證了這預言的真實。其間許多別的王國從地上消失了,這國卻仍充滿活力、力量不斷擴展。它今日擁有前所未有的統治範圍;它將傳遍全地的徵兆,比以往任何時候都更清晰。這國「必」是永遠的,可從以下考量論證:(1) 從神的應許。這些應許是絕對的;並由那位掌管一切能力、能以無限的輕易成就祂所說一切者作證。如此,Daniel 7:14:「他的權柄是永遠的,不能廢去;他的國必不敗壞。」Luke 1:33:「他要作雅各家的王,直到永遠;他的國也沒有窮盡。」Psalm 45:6(比較 Hebrews 1:8 的註釋):「神啊,你的寶座是永永遠遠的。」Hebrews 1:8:「論到子卻說:神啊,你的寶座是永永遠遠的。」Isaiah 9:7:「他的政權與平安必加增無窮,他必在大衛的寶座上治理他的國,以公平公義使國堅定穩固,從今直到永遠。」(2) 可以從這事實論證:那一切要毀滅它的努力已經顯明,這事不能由任何人間的能力作成。一千八百年已經過去——這時期足以試驗它能否被武力與暴力、論辯與嘲弄所毀滅。這試驗已公平地作過;它若可能被外力毀滅,早就毀滅了。不能想像為這目的還會出現比羅馬更可畏的情形。基督的教會已經遭遇我們所能設想的一切反對形式,並全都存活下來。特別是它在以下幾方面經受了考驗:(a) 羅馬的權勢——那曾制伏並碾碎世界的羅馬兵力的全部威力——曾被用來對付基督的國,要碾碎毀滅它,卻全然失敗。不能設想會再興起一個對基督教比羅馬更可畏的權勢。(b) 逼迫的權勢。那已經在各樣方式中試過,並且失敗了。最精巧的酷刑形式曾被設計出來要撲滅這宗教,卻全都失敗。人總是發現,逼迫最終只促成了它原指望壓碎之事業的得勝。(c) 哲學的權勢。古代的哲學家反對它,企圖以論辯毀滅它。塞爾蘇斯和波菲利早期便這樣行;但不久便顯明,古代哲學沒有任何東西能撲滅這初興的宗教,而且不少傑出的哲學家自己也悔改歸信,成了這信仰的辯護者。(d) 科學的權勢。基督教起源於科學進展相對微小的時代、並幾乎無人知曉科學的國家。此後諸科學有了巨大的進展;其中每一門都先後被宗教的仇敵引來,提供反對基督教的論據。天文學、歷史學、埃及的發現、印度人自稱的古遠、地質學,都曾被用來推翻基督教的主張,卻都不得不退出戰場。見懷斯曼博士(Wiseman)《論科學與啟示宗教的關聯》講座中對此的精采論證。(e) 嘲弄的權勢。曾有一個時期,人們持定「嘲弄是真理的試金石」,並把這毫不吝惜地應用於基督教。但這宗教仍然活着;不能設想會再有在譏諷和機鋒上勝過那些曾以此等武器攻擊基督教者的人;不信者在那方面也無可指望。因此可以推斷,再沒有任何「外來的」腐化和衰敗之源,能攔阻它存到永遠。別的王國通常都有;最多幾個世紀之後,內部的腐化——組織的缺陷——便顯明出來,王國便傾覆。在基督的國裏,卻沒有這樣的事發生。它至今已活了一千八百年,經歷了世上工藝、科學、風尚、哲學、政體都在不斷變化的各個時期。其間多少哲學體系被取代,多少王國傾覆,基督教卻在迎接每一個來臨的世代時,一如既往地新鮮而有活力;過去已經證明,福音的仇敵沒有理由指望它會因年久而衰弱、因自身的老朽而傾覆。

五、這國的第五個特性,乃是它必普遍盛行。這由那「變成一座大山、充滿全地」的石頭所象徵 (Daniel 2:35)。這也含於 Daniel 2:44 的陳述——它「必打碎滅絕那一切國」。它們必要止息,這國必佔據它們的位置。無論地上將存在甚麼外在的政體,彌賽亞之國的「原則」必處處盛行。這事必發生,可從以下考量論證:(1) 聖經中記錄的應許。我們面前的這段便是其一。同性質的還有以下各處:Psalm 2:8:「你求我,我就將列國賜你為基業,將地極賜你為田產。」Malachi 1:11:「從日出之地到日落之處,我的名在外邦中必尊為大。在各處,人必奉我的名燒香,獻潔淨的供物。」Isaiah 11:9:「認識耶和華的知識要充滿遍地,好像水充滿洋海一般。」比較 Habakkuk 2:14;Isaiah 45:22;並 Isaiah 60。(2) 世界在其進程中不「失去」任何有價值的東西。真理是永恆的;一經發現,社會便不放它走。它抓住了人性中的偉大元素,世界不容它死。科學的發現、工藝的發明、道德的原則,都是如此。沒有證據表明古人所知任何對人類有永久價值的東西已經失傳;少數確曾「失傳」的東西,也被更好的東西接續。他們科學、哲學、工藝、法學、文學中一切真正有價值的,我們至今仍擁有,世界也必永遠持守。而印刷機、蒸汽機、軋棉機、望遠鏡、吹管、磁力電報,又有甚麼能從人類的記憶中抹去呢?社會一代一代積累發明、道德和工藝中一切真正有價值的東西,並帶着它們前行,直到世界達到可完善性的最高點。這話對基督教——基督的國——也是真實的。那體系中關乎人類幸福和權利的「原則」,不能與社會「分離」;它們進入社會永久的結構之中,「世界不容它們死」。(3) 社會因此不斷「前進」。人類進步中已得的立場,永不至於最終失落。「這樣積累並融入社會的原則成了永久的。每個時代在這方面都給歷代所積累的珍寶增添一些東西;每一個在某些方面都超越其前者,使真理、自由和純正宗教之原則的最終得勝更為確定。」(4) 基督教,即基督的國,是「進取的」。它向世界的邪惡風俗、習慣和法律穩步作戰。擴散自己是合乎它性質的。沒有甚麼能攔阻它的傳播;而按照社會的法則,論及未來,哲學上再沒有甚麼比救贖主宗教的最終盛行更為確定的了。它或許會遭遇暫時而可畏的攔阻。它在某些地方或許會被阻延、被撲滅。但它總體的路程是向前——如大江的急流奔向大洋。未來惟一確定的事,乃是基督教必將傳遍全世界;這其中有足夠的東西,滿足慈善之心最高的願望,也有足夠的動力,激勵人盡最大的努力,以成就這樣可羨慕的目的。

英文原文

Forasmuch as thou sawest that the stone ... - On the meaning of the language employed here, see the notes at Daniel 2:34-35. The word "forasmuch" may be taken either in connection with what precedes, or with what follows. In the former method, there should be a period at the word "gold" in this verse; and then the sense is, "In those days shall the God of heaven set up a kingdom, etc., "forasmuch," or "because" thou sawest a stone," etc., that is, that was a certain indication of it. According to the other method, the meaning is, "Forasmuch as thou sawest the stone cut out and demolish the image, the great God has made known the certainty of it;" that is, that is a certain indication that it will be done. The Vulgate is, "According to what thou sawest, that the stone was cut out without hands, and reduced the clay, etc., the great God has shown to the king what will be hereafter." The difference in the interpretation is not very material.

Cut out of the mountain - This is not inserted in the statement in Daniel 2:34. It seems, however, to be implied there, as there is mention of the stone as "cut out." The representation is evidently that of a stone disengaged from its native bed, the side of a mountain, without any human agency, and then rolling down the side of it and impinging on the image.

The great God hath made known to the king what shall come to pass hereafter - Margin, the same as the Chaldee, "after this." The meaning is simply, in time to come; in some future period. Daniel claims none of the merit of this discovery to himself. but ascribes it all to God.

And the dream is certain, and the interpretation thereof sure - That is, it is no vain and airy phantom; no mere working of the imagination. The dream was all that the monarch had supposed it to be - a representation of coming events, and his solicitude in regard to it was well-founded. Daniel speaks with the utmost assurance also as to its fulfillment. He knew that he had been led to this interpretation by no skill of his own; and his representation of it was such as to satisfy the monarch of its correctness. Two circumstances probably made it appear certain to the monarch, as we learn from the next verse it did: one, that Daniel had recalled the dream to his own recollection, showing that he was under a Divine guidance; and the other, the plausibility - the verisimilitude - the evident truthfulness of the representation. It was such a manifest "explanation" of the dream that Nebuchadnezzar, in the same manner as Pharaoh had done before him when his dreams were explained by Joseph, at once admitted the correctness of the representation.

Having now gone through with the "exposition" of this important passage respecting the stone cut from the mountain, it seems proper to make a few remarks in regard to the nature of the kingdom that would be set up, as represented by the stone which demolished the image, and which so marvelously increased as to fill the earth. That there is reference to the kingdom of the Messiah cannot be reasonably doubted. The points which are established in respect to that kingdom by the passage now under consideration are the following:

I. Its superhuman origin. This is indicated in the representation of the stone cut out of the mountain "without hands;" that is, clearly not by human agency, or in the ordinary course of events. There was to be a superhuman power exerted in detaching it from the mountain, as well as in its future growth. What appeared so marvelous was, that it was cut from its orginal resting place by some invisible power, and moved forward to the consummation of its work without any human agency. That this was designed to be significant of something there can be no reasonable doubt, for the result is made to turn on this. I do not see that any special significancy is to be attached to the idea of its being cut from "a mountain," nor that it is required of us to attempt to refine on that expression, and to ascertain whether the mountain means the Roman kingdom, out of which the gospel church was taken, as many suppose; or the Jewish nation, as Augustine supposed; or that "the origin of Christ was sublime and superior to the whole world," as Calvin supposes; or to the mountainous country of Judea in which the Messiah was born, as many others have maintained; or to the tomb of Joseph, as a rock from which the Messiah sprang to life and victory, as others have imagined.

All this belongs to a system of interpretatation that is trifling in the extreme. The representation of the mountain here is merely for the sake of verisimilitude, like the circumstances in a parable. If a stone was "cut out without hands," it would be natural to speak of it as cut from the mountain or parent-rock to which it was attached. The eye is not here directed to the "mountain" as having anything significant or marvelous about it, but to the "stone" that so mysteriously left its bed, and rolled onward toward the image. The point of interest and of marvel, the mysterious thing that attracted the eye, was that there was no human agency employed; that no hands were seen at work; that none of the ordinary instrumentalities were seen by which great effects are accomplished among men. Now this would properly represent the idea that the kingdom of the Messiah would have a supernatural origin. Its beginnings would be unlike what is usually seen among men. How appropriately this applies to the kingdom of the Messiah, as having its origin not in human power, need not here be stated. Nothing is more apparent; nothing is more frequently dwelt on in the New Testament, than that it had a heavenly origin. It did not owe its beginning to human plans, counsels, or power.

II. Its feebleness in its beginning, compared with its ultimate growth and power. At first it was a stone comparatively small, and that seemed utterly inadequate to the work of demolishing and pulverizing a colossal statue of gold, silver, brass, and iron. Ultimately it grew to be itself of mountain-size, and to fill the land. Now this representation would undoubtedly convey the fair impression that this new power, represented by the stone, would at first be comparatively small and feeble; that there would be comparative weakness in its origin as contrasted with what it would ultimately attain to; and that it would seem to be utterly inadequate to the performance of what it finally accomplished. It is hardly necessary to say that this corresponds entirely with the origin of the Messiah's kingdom. Everywhere it is represented as of feeble beginnings, and, as a system, to human view, entirely inadequate to so great a work as that of bringing other kingdoms to an end, and subduing it to itself. The complete fulfillment of the prophetic statement would be found in such circumstances as the following:

(1) The humble origin of the head of this new power hlmself - the Messiah - the King of Sion. He was, in fact, of a decayed and dilapidated family; was ranked among the poor; was without powerful friends or political connections; possessed no uncommon advantages of learning, and was regarded with contempt and scorn by the great mass of his countrymen. No one would have supposed that the religion originated by one of so humble an origin would have power to change the destiny of the kingdoms of the earth.

(2) The feebleness of the beginning of his kingdom. His few followers - the little band of fishermen; the slow progress at first made; these were circumstances strikingly in accordance with the representation in Daniel.

(3) The absence in that band of all that seemed requisite to accomplish so great a work. They had no arms, no wealth, no political power. They had nothing of what has commonly been employed to overthrow kingdoms, and the band of fishermen sent forth to this work seemed as little adequate to the undertaking as the stone cut from the mountain did to demolish the colossal image.

(4) All this feebleness in the beginning was wonderfully contrasted with the ultimate results, like the stone, when cut from the mountain, contrasted with its magnitude when it filled the earth. The Saviour himself often referred to the contrast between the feeble origin of his religion, and what it would grow to be. At first it was like a grain of mustard-seed, smallest among seeds; then it grew to be a tree so large that the fowls of the air lodged in the branches. At first it was like leaven, hidden in meal; ultimately it would diffuse itself through the mass, so that the whole would be leavened, Matthew 13:31-33.

III. It would supplant all other kingdoms. This was clearly indicated by the fact that the "stone" demolished the image, reducing it to powder, and filled the place which that occupied, and all the land. This has been explained (see the notes at Daniel 2:34-35), as meaning that it would not be by sudden violence, but by a continued process of comminution. There would be such an action on the kingdoms of the earth represented by gold, and silver, and brass, and iron, that they would disappear, and the new power represented by the "stone" would finally take their place. As this new power was to be humble in its origin, and feeble to human view; as it had nothing which, to outward appearance, would seem adequate to the result, the reference would seem to be to the "principles" which would characterize it, and which, as elements of power, would gradually but ultimately secure the changes represented by the demolition of the colossal statue.

The only question then would be, whether the principles in the kingdom of the Messiah had such originality and power as would gradually but certainly change the modes of government that existed in the world, and substitute another kind of reign; or, what is the influence which it will exert on the nations, causing new methods of government, in accordance with its principles, to prevail on the earth. Though apparently feeble, without arms, or wealth, or civil alliances, it has elements of "power" about it which will ultimately subdue all other principles of government, ard take their place. Its work was indeed to be a gradual work, and it is by no means accomplished, yet its effect has been mighty already on the principles that rule among the nations and will still be more mighty until "the laws of the kingdom of the Messiah shall prevail in all the earth." This seems to be the idea which it is designed to express by this prophetic image. If one were asked "in what respects" it is to be anticipated that these changes will be wrought, and "in what respects" we can discern the evidences of such changes already, we might say in such points as the following:

(1) In regard to the methods in which governments are founded. Governments were formerly mostly the result of civil or foreign wars. Nearly all the governments of antiquity were originally founded in the "power" of some military leader, and then held by power. Christianity originated new views about wars and conquests; views that will ultimately prevail. In nothing are the opinions of mankind destined more entirely to be reversed than in regard to "war;" to its glory, its achievements, and the fame of those who have been most celebrated for bloody triumphs.

(2) In regard to the rights of the people. A mighty principle was originated by Christianity in respect to the "rights" of men; the right of conscience; the right to the avails of their own labor; the right to life and liberty.

(3) In regard to oppression. The history of the world has been, to a great extent, a history of oppression. But all this is to be changed by the principles of the true religion; and when the period shall arrive that there shall be no more occasion to use the word "oppression," as descriptive of anything that shall have an actual existenee on earth, this will be a different world. Then the time will have come, appropriately designated by the demolition of the colossal statue - symbolic of all governments of oppression, and the substitution in its place of what was at first insignificant, but which had vital energy to supplant all that went before it.

IV. This kingdom will be perpetual. This is asserted in the unequivocal statements that it "shall never be destroyed," and that "it shall not be left to other people;" that is, shall never pass into other hands. There could not be a more positive declaration that the kingdom here referred to will continue through all coming time. Other kingdoms pass away, but this will not; and amidst all the revolutions of other empires this will remain. The lapse of eighteen hundred years since this kingdom was set up, has done not a little to confirm the truth of this prediction. Many other kingdoms during that time have disappeared from the earth, but this remains in its full vigour, and with extending power. It has, at this day, an extent of dominion which it never had before, and there are clearer indications that it will spread over all the earth than ever existed at any previous time. That this kingdom "will" be perpetual may be argued from the following considerations:

(1) From the promises of God. These are absolute; and they are attested by Him who has all power, and who can, with infinite ease, accomplish all that he has spoken. So in Daniel 7:14, "His dominion is an everlasting dominion, which shall not pass away, and his kingdom that which shall not be destroyed." Luke 1:33, "and he shall reign over the house of Jacob forever: and of his kingdom there shall be no end." Psalm 45:6 (compare the notes at Hebrews 1:8), "Thy throne, O God, is forever and ever." In Hebrews 1:8, it is, "But unto the Son he saith, Thy throne, O God, is forever and ever." Isaiah 9:7, "of the increase of his government and peace there shall be no end, upon the throne of David, and upon his kingdom, to order it, and to establish it with judgment and with justice, from henceforth, even forever."

(2) It may be argued, from the fact that the efforts which have been made to destroy it have shown that this cannot be done by any human power. Eighteen hundred years have now passed away - a period sufficiently long to test the question whether it can be destroyed by force and violence; by argument and ridicule. The experiment has been fairly made, and if it were possible that it should be destroyed by external force, it would have been done. It cannot be imagined that more favorable circumstances for such a purpose will ever occur. The church of Christ has met every form of opposition that we can conceive could be made against it, and has survived them all. Particularly it has survived the trial which has been made in the following respects:

(a) The Roman power, the whole might of the Roman arms, that had subdued and crushed the world, was brought to bear upon the kingdom of Christ to crush and destroy it, but wholly failed. It cannot be supposed that a new power will ever arise that will be more formidable to Christianity than the Roman was.

(b) The power of persecution. That has been tried in every way, and has failed. The most ingenious forms of torture have been devised to extinguish this religion, and have all failed. It has always been found that persecution has only contributed ultimately to the triumph of the cause which it was hoped to crush.

(c) The power of philosophy. The ancient philosophers opposed it, and attempted to destroy it by argument. This was early done by Celsus and Porphyry; but it soon became apparent that the ancient philosophy had nothing that could extinguish the rising religion, and not a few of the prominent philosophers themselves were converted, and became the advocates of the faith.

(d) The power of science. Christianity had its origin in an age when science had made comparatively little progress, and in a country where it was almost unknown. The sciences since have made vast advances; and each one in its turn has been appealed to by the enemies of religion, to furnish an argument against Christianity. Astronomy, history, the discoveries in Egypt, the asserted antiquity of the Hindoos, and geology, have all been employed to overthrow the claims of the Christian religion, and have all been compelled to abandon the field. See this admirably demonstrated in Dr. Wiseman's "Lectures on the Connection between Science and Revealed Religion."

(e) The power of ridicule. At one time it was held that "ridicule is the test of truth," and this has been applied unsparingly to the Christian religion. But the religion still lives, and it cannot be supposed that there will be men endued with the power of sarcasm and wit superior to those who, with these weapons, have made war on Christianity, or that infidelity has any hope from that quarter. It may be inferred, therefore, that there is no "external" source of corruption and decay which will prevent its being perpetual. Other kingdoms usually have; and after a few centuries at most the internal corruption - the defect of the organization - developes itself, and the kingdom falls. But nothing of this kind occurs in the kingdom of Christ. It has lived now through eighteen hundred years, through periods of the world in which there have been constant changes in the arts, in the sciences, in manners, in philosophy, in forms of government. During that time many a system of philosophy has been superseded, and many a kingdom has fallen, but Christianity is as fresh and vigorous, as it meets each coming generation, as it ever was; and the past has demonstrated that the enemies of the gospel have no reason to hope that it will become weak by age, and will fall by its own decrepitude.

V. A fifth characteristic of this kingdom is, that it will universally prevail. This was symbolized by the stone that "became a great mountain, and that filled the whole earth," Daniel 2:35. It is also implied, in the statement in Daniel 2:44, that it "shall break in pieces, and consume all these kingdoms." They will cease, and this will occupy their places. The "principles" of the kingdom of the Messiah, whatever may be the external forms of government that shall exist on the earth, will everywhere prevail. That this will occur may be argued from the following considerations:

(1) The promises recorded in the Bible. Tlle passage before us is one. Of the same nature are the following: Psalm 2:8, "Ask of me, and I shall give thee the pagan for thine inheritance, and the uttermost parts of the earth for thy possession." Malachi 1:11, "for from the rising of the sun even unto the going down of the same, my name shall be great among the Gentiles; and in every place incense shall be offered to my name, and a pure offering." Isaiah 11:9, "the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea." Compare Habakkuk 2:14; Isaiah 45:22, and Isaiah 60.

(2) The world in its progress "loses" nothing that is of value. Truth is eternal, and when once discovered, society will not let it go. It seizes upon great elements in human nature, and the world will not let it die. Thus it is with discoveries in science, inventions in the arts, and principles in morals. There is no evidence that anything that was known to the ancients which was of permanent value to mankind has been lost; and the few things that "were" lost have been succeeded by that which is better. All that was truly valuable in their science, their philosophy, their arts, their jurisprudence, their literature, we possess still, and the world will always retMn it. And what can ever obliterate from the memory oi man the printing-press, the steamengine, the cotton-gin, the telescope, the blow-pipe, the magnetic telegraph? Society accumulates from age to age all that is truly valuable in inventions, morals, and the arts, and travels with them down to the period when the world shall have reached the highest point of perfectability. This remark is true also of Christianity - the kingdom of Christ. There are "principles" in regard to the happiness and rights of man in that system which cannot be "detached" from society, but which go into its permanent structure, and which "the world will not let die."

(3) Society is thus making constant "advances." A position gained in human progress is never ultimately lost. "The principles thus accumulated and incorporated into society become permanent. Each age adds something in this respect to the treasures accumulated by all preceding ages, and each one is, in some respects, an advance on its predecessors, and makes the final triumph of the principles of truth, and liberty, and pure religion more sure."

(4) Christianity, or the kingdom of Christ, is "aggressive." It makes a steady war on the evil customs, habits, and laws of the world. It is in accordance with its nature to diffuse itself. Nothing can prevent its propagation; and, according to the laws of society, nothing is so certain philosophically in regard to the future, as the final prevalence of the religion of the Redeemer. It may meet with temporary and formidable obstructions. It may be retarded, or extinguished, in certain places. But its general course is onward - like the current of the mighty river toward the ocean. The only thing certain in the future is, that the Christian religion will yet spread all over the world; and there is enough in this to gratify the highest wishes of philanthropy, and enough to stimulate to the highest effort to secure so desirable an end.

46

Daniel 2:46

開啟正文

「當時尼布甲尼撒王俯伏在地」——這是東方人表示極度敬重的常用方式。比較 Genesis 17:3;Genesis 50:18;Leviticus 9:24;Numbers 14:5;Joshua 5:14;Judges 13:20;Revelation 11:16。

「向但以理下拜」——此處譯作「下拜」的字(סְגִד(segid)),在聖經的迦勒底文部分一律譯作「敬拜」(Daniel 2:26;Daniel 3:5-7、3:10-12、3:14-15、3:18、3:28)。它不見於別處;而除了我們面前的這一處,每個實例都指對偶像的效忠——其餘的案例都出現在第三章,論尼布甲尼撒所立的像。對應的希伯來字(סָגַד(sâgad))只出現於 Isaiah 44:15、17、19;Isaiah 46:6;每一處都譯作「俯伏」,也是指偶像。因此,此處這字的恰當意念乃是:君王有意向但以理獻上「宗教性」的效忠,或如通常對偶像所獻的崇敬。這由隨即補充的話得到證實:他吩咐人向他獻供物。然而,不必假定但以理「接受」或「認可」王的這宗教性效忠,也不必假定他讓王心中留下他「願意」受神明之敬的印象。王在他面前的俯伏,他當然不能阻止。王行這事時的觀念和情感,他不能阻止。向他「獻供物和香」的命令,他也不能阻止。但推論但以理認可這事、或他作了任何助長它的事、甚至他沒有以恰當的方式責備它,都並不公平;因為 (1) 我們不應假定所說的一切都被記錄了;沒有人能證明但以理沒有表示他對這加給他的宗教性尊榮的不贊同。(2) 但以理事實上已在王面前以最清楚的方式,就在這一點上表達了他的觀點。他再三聲明自己沒有能力揭示這樣的奧祕。他把王的心思引向真神,視為惟一能揭示將來之事的那位 (Daniel 2:28、30、45)。他以最著重的話 (Daniel 2:30) 聲明,這奧祕顯明給他,「並非因我的智慧勝過一切活人」——以此盡了一切可能的防備,攔阻這樣的結果。如今,經過這一切防備和聲明之後,王若仍俯伏在他面前、一時覺得自己是站在一位神面前,但以理對此並無責任,也不應推斷他鼓勵或認可這事。(3) 從敘述本身看來,但以理拒絕了這效忠、並把君王的思想引向真神,不僅是可能的,而且極有可能。在下一節就說:「王對但以理說:你們的神誠然是萬神之神、萬王之主,又是顯明奧祕事的。」「回答」甚麼呢?大概是回答但以理所說的某句話。至少,從這話清楚可見:無論王一時有怎樣的驚奇、感激和崇敬的表示,他的思想很快便轉到敬拜的正當對象——真神——身上。「又吩咐……」這事既被「吩咐」,並不證明它被行了。那命令大概是在他的讚歎和驚奇之中下達的。但不能據此推論但以理受了它,也不能推論那命令未經反思而收回,更不能推論那供物和香不是獻給了真神。

「叫他們奉上供物」——即他的侍從,或許是那些有職分向眾神獻祭的祭司。譯作「供物」的字(מִנְחָה(minchāh))不是指「帶血」的祭,而是指任何種類的禮物或貢物。它在聖經中用來指:(1)「禮物」或「饋贈」(Genesis 32:13、18、20 (14, 19, 21);Genesis 43:11、15、25-26);(2)「貢物」,即以饋贈之名向藩屬國徵收的 (2 Samuel 8:2、6;1 Kings 4:21;1 Kings 5:1);(3) 獻給神的「供物」或祭,尤指無血的供物,與 זֶבַח(zebach)——帶血的祭——相對 (Leviticus 2:1、4-6;Leviticus 6:14 (7);Leviticus 7:9;Psalm 40:6 (7);Jeremiah 17:26)。這字的詳解,見 Isaiah 1:13 的註釋。無疑,尼布甲尼撒的意思是要獻上通常在敬拜偶像中所獻的那類供物。

「和香品」——香在敬拜中是常用的(見 Isaiah 1:13 的註釋);而且在敬拜眾神時伴有別的芬芳之氣,也並非不可能。香品、或「馨香之氣」——由與此處相同的字表達——是希伯來禮儀中規定之敬拜的一部分 (Leviticus 1:9、13、17;Leviticus 2:2、9;Leviticus 3:5;Leviticus 6:21 (14);Numbers 15:7)。

英文原文

Then the king Nebuchadnezzar fell upon his face - This was the common method of signifying profound respect among the Orientals. Compare Genesis 17:3; Genesis 50:18; Leviticus 9:24; Numbers 14:5; Joshua 5:14; Judges 13:20; Revelation 11:16.

And worshipped Daniel - The word rendered "worshipped" here (סגד segid), in the Chaldee portions of the Bible is uniformly rendered "worship," Daniel 2:26; Daniel 3:5-7, Daniel 3:10-12, Daniel 3:14-15, Daniel 3:18, Daniel 3:28. It occurs nowhere else, and in every instance, except in the one before us, is employed with reference to the homage paid to an idol, all the other cases occurring in the third chapter respecting the image that was set up by Nebuchadnezzar. The corresponding Hebrew word (סגד sâgad) occurs only in Isaiah 44:15, Isaiah 44:17, Isaiah 44:19; Isaiah 46:6; and is, in every instance, rendered "fall down," also with reference to idols. The proper idea, therefore, of the word here is, that the monarch meant to render "religious" homage to Daniel, or such adoration as was usually paid to idols. This is confirmed by witat is immediately added, that he commanded that an oblation should be made to him. It is not, however, necessary to suppose that Daniel "received" or "approved" this religious homage of the king, or that he left the impression on his mind that he was "willing" to be honored as a god. The prostration of the king before him, of course, he could not prevent. The views and feelings which the monarch had in doing it he could not prevent. The command to present an "oblation and sweet odors to him" he could not prevent. But it is not a fair inference that Daniel approved this, or that he did anything to countenance it, or even that he did not, in a proper manner, rebuke it: for

(1) We are not to suppose that all that was said was recorded, and no one can prove that Daniel did not express his disapprobation of this religious honor shown to him.

(2) Daniel had in fact, expressed his views, in the clearest manner, on this very point before the monarch. He had, again and again, disclaimed all power to be able to reveal such secrets. He had directed his mind to the true God, as he who alone could disclose coming events, Daniel 2:28, Daniel 2:30, Daniel 2:45. He had taken all possible precaution to prevent any such result, by declaring, in the most emphatic terms Daniel 2:30, that this secret was not revealed to him "on account of any wisdom which he had more than any living." If now, after all this precaution, and these disclaimers, the king should prostrate himself before him, and, for the moment, feel that he was in the presence of a God, Daniel was not responsible for it, and it should not be inferred that he encouraged or approved it.

(3) It would seem, from the narrative itself, more than probable that Daniel did refuse the homage, and direct the thoughts of the monarch to the true God. In the very next verse it is said, "The king answered unto Daniel, and said, Of a truth it is, that your God is a God of gods, and a Lord of kings, and a revealer of secrets." "Answered" what? Perhaps something that was said by Daniel. At all events, it is clear from this that whatever were the momentary expressions of wonder, gratitude, and adoration, on the part of the king, his thoughts soon passed to the proper object of worship - the true God. "And commanded, etc." The fact that this was "commanded" does not prove that it was done. The command was probably given under the excitement of his admiration and wonder. But it does not follow that Daniel received it, or that the command was not recalled on reflection, or that the oblation and odors may not have been presented to the true God.

That they should offer an oblation - That is, his attendants, or perhaps the priests to whom pertained the duty of making offerings to the gods. The word rendered "oblation" (מנחה minchāh) does not refer to a, "bloody" sacrifice, but means a gift or present of any kind. It is applied in the Scriptures to denote

(1) "a gift," or "present," Genesis 32:13, Genesis 32:18, Genesis 32:20 (Genesis 32:14, Genesis 32:19, Genesis 32:21); Genesis 43:11, Genesis 43:15, Genesis 43:25-26;

(2) "a tribute," such as was exacted from a subject nation, under the notion of a present, 2 Samuel 8:2, 2 Samuel 8:6; 1 Kings 4:21 1 Kings 5:1,

(3) "an offering" or sacrifice to God, especially a bloodless offering, in opposition to (זבח zebach) - a bloody sacrifice, Leviticus 2:1, Leviticus 2:4-6; Leviticus 6:14 (7); Leviticus 7:9; Psalm 40:6 (7); Jeremiah 17:26.

See the word fully explained in the notes at Isaiah 1:13. There can be no doubt that Nebuchadnezzar meant that such an offering should be presented as was usually made in idol worship.

And sweet odors - incense was commonly used in worship (see the notes at Isaiah 1:13), and it is not improbable that in the worship of the gods it was accompanied with other fragrant odors. Sweet odors, or "savors," expressed by the same word which is used here, were a part of the prescribed worship in the Hebrew ritual, Leviticus 1:9, Leviticus 1:13, Leviticus 1:17; Leviticus 2:2, Leviticus 2:9; Leviticus 3:5; Leviticus 6:21 (14); Numbers 15:7.

47

Daniel 2:47

開啟正文

「王對但以理說」——所回答的,或是他在夢的講解中所說的話,「或者」是他論到把這效忠獻給他之不當所說的某句話。比較 Daniel 2:46 的註釋。可以確定的是:無論出於甚麼原因,無論他有意向但以理獻上怎樣的效忠,他的思想很快便從但以理轉向真神,承認祂超乎一切。他至少似乎立時想起了但以理自己說過的話 (Daniel 2:30),記起宗教性的效忠當歸的,不是但以理,而是那把奧祕傳給他的神。

「你們的神誠然是」——確實如此。這由這奧祕被揭明的方式顯明了。

「萬神之神」——超乎一切別的神;在萬有之上為至上。比較 Revelation 17:14;1 Timothy 6:15。其意念是:無論有多少居於下位的存有,祂是至上的。

「萬王之主」——在君王之上為至上。他們都低於祂、服在祂的管制之下。

「又是顯明奧祕事的」——神性的一個屬性。見 Daniel 2:28 的註釋。

「因為你能將這奧祕的事顯明出來」——一個國中最有智慧的人曾徒然尋求解明的奧祕。神的一個僕人既能作成這事,這事實便顯明神自己是至上的、配受崇敬的。於是,我們在此看到一個事例:一個驕傲狂妄的異教君王,被帶到承認真神的地步,並被迫向祂獻上效忠。這顯然是整件事——那夢本身;巴比倫的智士不能解它的事實;並至高者公認的僕人得以作出這揭示的事實——所定意達到的結果。這事例有啟發性,它顯明:一顆顯然未受任何真實敬虔影響的心——後來的事件表明,沒有「永久的」效果留在他身上,他仍是個拜偶像的人 (Daniel 3)、仍是個極其驕傲狂妄的人 (Daniel 4)——可以被帶到何等承認神的地步。見 Daniel 7 末尾的評註。

英文原文

The king answered unto Daniel - Answered either what he had said in the interpretation of the dream, or "possibly" something that he had said in regard to the impropriety of offering this homage to him. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:46. It is certain that, for some cause. whatever might have been the homage which he was disposed to render to Daniel, his thoughts were soon turned from him to the true God, and to an acknowledgment of him as superior to all other beings. He seems, at least, instantly to have reflected on what Daniel had himself said Daniel 2:30, and to have remembered that religious homage was due, not to Daniel, but to the God who had communicated the secret to him.

Of a truth it is - It is truly so. This had been shown by the manner in which this secret was disclosed.

That your God is a God of gods - Is superior to all other gods; is supreme over all. Compare Revelation 17:14; 1 Timothy 6:15. The idea is, that whatever subordinate beings there may be, He is supreme.

And a Lord of kings - Supreme over kings. They are all inferior to him, and subject to his control.

And a revealer of secrets - One of the attributes of divinity. See the notes at Daniel 2:28.

Seeing thou couldest reveal this secret - A secret which the wisest men of the realm had sought in vain to disclose. The fact that a professed servant of God had been able to do this showed that God was himself supreme, and worthy of adoration. We have here, then, an instance in which a proud and haughty pagan monarch was brought to an acknowledgment of the true God, and was constrained to render him homage. This was a result which it was evidently intended to reach in the whole transaction; in the dream itself; in the fact that the wise men of Babylon could not interpret it; and in the fact that an acknowledged servant of the Most High had been enabled to make the disclosure. The instance is instructive, as showing to what extent a mind clearly not under the influence of any genuine piety - for subsequent events showed that no "permanent" effects were produced on him, and that he was still an idolater Daniel 3, and a most proud and haughty man Daniel 4 - may be brought to acknowledge God. See the remarks at the end of the Daniel 7.

48

Daniel 2:48

開啟正文

「於是王高擡但以理」——即賜他尊榮的職任;如此尊榮他,使他被人視為偉人。他實在是因神的恩典、並神所賜他的特殊恩寵而成為偉大的;但王對他偉大的評價,由皇家恩寵的表記顯明。「賞賜他許多上等禮物。」這是東方表示敬重的常用方式。人對另一人的重視,由所贈禮物的多樣和貴重顯明。因此,凡有身分的人都指望接近他們的人送禮,以表達他們的敬意和對他們的尊重。比較 Daniel 2:6。

「治理巴比倫全省」——迦勒底文 הַשְּׁלֵטָה(hasheleṭēh)——使他管理、統轄;出自動詞 שָׁלַט(shelaṭ),「統治」,通常用於作君王或居高位而統治的人。「蘇丹」(sultan)和「蘇丹娜」(sultana)等詞便由這字而來。

「作一切哲士的魁首」——這看來是一項不屬於他作巴比倫省省長或在首都主政的職任,而是一項分別的任命,因此是恩寵加倍的標記。「魁首」的說法似乎暗示:巴比倫的術士分為若干等級或班次,各有其首,如學院或大學的院長。但以理被立於全體之上,作院長、首席或校長。尼布甲尼撒的一貫政策,是把全國主要的才智和學問匯聚於首都。比較 Daniel 1:18-20;Daniel 2:2 的註釋。但以理這樣在人生早期——雖是新來的無名異鄉人和俘虜——在這兩個尊榮的職位上,被高舉到臣子所能得的最高尊榮,升到通常被視為須以終身報效國家福祉才能獲得的最高賞賜之顯要職位。

英文原文

There the king made Daniel a great man - That is, he gave him an honorable appointment; he so honored him that he was regarded as a great man. He was really made great by the grace of God, and the extraordinary favor which God had bestowed upon him, but the estimate which the king had of his greatness was shown by the tokens of the royal favor. "And gave him many great gifts." This is a common way of showing esteem in the East. The estimate in which one holds another is evinced by the variety and richness of the presents conferred on him. Hence, all persons of distinction expect gifts of those who approach them as expressive of their regard for them, and of the esteem in which they are held. Compare Daniel 2:6.

And made him ruler over the whole province of Babylon - Chaldee, השׁלטה hasheleṭēh - caused him to preside over, or to rule over, from the verb שׁלט shelaṭ, "to rule," and commonly applied to one who rules as a prince, or in an elevated office. From this word the terms "sultan" and "sultana" are derived.

And chief of the governors over all the wise men of Babylon - This would seem to be an appointment which did not pertain to him as governor of the province of Babylon, or as presiding in the capital, but was a separate appointment, and, therefore, an additional mark of favor. The phrase "chief of the governors" would seem to imply that the magi of Babylon were disposed in certain orders or classes, each of which had its appropriate head, like the head of a college or university. Daniel was placed over the whole as the president, principal, or chancellor. It had been the policy of Nebuchadnezzar to assemble at the capital the principal talent and learning of the realm. Compare the notes at Daniel 1:18-20; Daniel 2:2. Daniel thus, in both these stations of honor at an early period of life, though recently an unknown stranger, and a captive; was exalted to the highest honors which could be conferred on a subject, and raised to posts of distinction which would usually be regarded as the highest rewards which could be obtained by a long life of devotedness to the welfare of the country.

49

Daniel 2:49

開啟正文

「但以理求王」——在他自己非凡的昌達、並加給他的特殊尊榮之中,他沒有忘記他卑微日子裏的同伴。他們是他的同胞;曾與他一同被擄;曾與他一同被選、要侍立在王面前 (Daniel 1:3-4);曾與他同守節制的規矩 (Daniel 1:11-17);都曾在王面前通過了光榮的考驗 (Daniel 1:18-19);曾與他一同求神啟明異象的含義 (Daniel 2:17-18);如今,那如此蒙特殊尊榮的他記念他們,乃是合宜的。

「治理巴比倫省的事務」——他們受僱於哪些具體部門,經文沒有提;但看來凡特別屬於這省的事務,都託付給了他們。但以理有總的監督權,而由職分生出的下屬事務則託付給他們。王允准這請求的事實,顯明但以理在宮廷中的影響力。影響王允准這請求的原因,或許不僅是他對但以理的恩寵,也是加給但以理的職分如今需要助手這一事實、並他對這些少年人站在他面前時所顯美德的記憶。

「但以理常在朝中侍立」——作為王的謀士,這是首席尊榮和尊嚴的職位。東方城市的「城門」既是主要的聚集之地,便是開庭和辦理公務的場所。見 Job 29:7 的註釋。因此,說他「坐在王的門口」,不過是說他佔有與國中首席謀士和顯貴同列的位置。「莊嚴之門」(Sublime Porte)這說法,至今仍用於君士坦丁堡,指蘇丹的政府;因為在奧斯曼統治的早期,在位的君王——如東方某些地區至今仍行的——在他的居所入口處開設法庭和朝會。見《哈珀雜誌》(Harper's Magazine),卷四頁333。但以理的職分,大概與土耳其政府的大維齊爾相去不遠。見默里《地理百科》(Ency. Geog.),卷二頁202。

評註

本章所提示具有實用價值的教訓中,我們可注意以下各項:

(1) 我們在此看到一個事例 (Daniel 2:1-3),說明世界早期的人用甚麼方法探究未來。這位大君王倚靠一個大大攪擾他的夢、並倚靠他以為交付給人的解夢能力。與他那時代、並一切古代盛行之風一致(見 Daniel 2:1 的註釋),他相信夢可被視為未來之事的預兆;相信它們是在神的指示之下;並相信只要把它們恰當解明,它們便可成為關乎將來之事的安全指引。也與一切古時的人、並近代大多數的人一致,這裏所指的王熱切渴望察看未來。人心再沒有比這更強的願望了。我們受造如此,總想揭開遮蔽未來的神祕帷幕;穿透那籠罩未見世界的深沉黑暗。我們最大的利益在那裏。過去已定,如今不能再影響我們——除了藉我們所行之事的後果、並藉從我們自己和別人的觀察所得的寶貴教訓。但未來尚未定局。人既如此急於知道它將如何,卻發現自己在這方面奇特地沒有稟賦。論過去,他有「記憶」的官能;卻沒有與此對應的、屬「未來」的官能。他能珍藏已發生的事,卻不能照樣使未來從心思經過,使他因知道遙遠時代將發生之事而得智慧。無疑,神本可以把另一種官能同樣賜給人心——因為祂自己擁有它——但不這樣行有明顯的理由。人既沒有這能力,人類探究的一大目的,便是要看這缺憾能否補足;能否找到某種東西,對未來實質上成為記憶之於過去那樣的東西。在這題目上的努力和結果——我們面前這章便是其中之一——構成我們人類歷史最具教訓的篇章之一,並顯明神在這方面何等有效地劃定了人類探究的界限。在那些企圖穿透未來、揭開它深奧祕的方法中,可注意以下這些:

(a) 占星術。人們假定眾星能對人的命運發揮影響;而觀察它們的位置、會合和對衝,便可以查明個人和國家的命運如何。這信念在各時代都或多或少顯明出來;而在「瘋癲」(lunacy)一詞中、並在關乎月亮影響健康和植物的普遍觀念中,至今仍可見這信念的痕跡。連培根勳爵也認為「占星術是一門不當『拒絕』、而當改良的科學」;而在世界的早期,天體是否真發揮這樣的影響、若然、能否查明它如此運行的法則,乃是正當的研究題目。這便是所謂的占星術。

(b) 交鬼術。這信念也幾乎盛行於一切古代民族;聖經中常提到它。它所包含的信念乃是:死者必熟悉他們如今所居、對活人如此幽暗的世界;或許能與他們立約結盟,使他們願意透露所知的。人們廣泛地——若非普遍地——相信他們向人顯現;相信他們離開居所、重訪地上並非罕事。因此,他們會否向凡人中較蒙恩者透露他們所知之未見世界的奧祕、並他們所知將臨之事,便是一個並不牽強、也非不公的探究題目。比較 Isaiah 8:19 的註釋。

(c) 占卜的技藝。這些主要建立在科學的研究上。起初,這是一個正當的問題:在科學展現於眼前的諸奇之中,它能否揭開未來的帷幕、揭示將至之事。要查明科學的正當目標是甚麼、可以對它期望甚麼,需要長時間。因此,科學曾致力於這樣的探究:能否找到某種把萬物變為金的物質;能否發現某種止住一切疾病、使人長生不死的靈丹;科學能否揭明某種穿透未來、把未見世界之奧祕敞開的手段。這需要幾個世紀的研究、千次的失敗、並長久忍耐思考的結果,才能查明科學的真目標,並使世界確信:向人啟示未來,並非它的正當目的。

(d) 異教的神諭。神會否以某種方式揭開未來的帷幕、把它的奧祕向人顯明,也是一個早期的探究。這信念似乎自然存在於人心;各時代、各國家的人都以為未來會這樣顯明。因此,異教徒中有一些人自稱受神感動;因此,德爾斐那樣的神廟變得著名;因此,有含糊的答覆被發出,措辭得無論結果如何都能支撐神諭的信譽;因此,有人受派觀察飛鳥、檢視祭牲的內臟、解釋雲中異常的現象、標記流星的方位,並總體上察驗天上或地上任何似乎能提供線索、藉以知道未來的異常現象。這一切無疑大半成了純粹的欺詐,印證了西塞羅的話:他奇怪一個占卜官遇見另一個怎能不笑;但無疑許多人誠實地追求這些探究,而且起初這一切似乎都是正當的研究題目。誰禁止人追求它?誰能說這樣的方式不會尋出神祕未來的奧祕?要顯明這並不可能、要顯明這一切所指的無論是甚麼、都從未被定意成為人藉以認識未見世界之奧祕的途徑,需要長久而忍耐的探究和觀察。

(e) 夢。我們已見到(Daniel 2:1 的註釋),藉着夢,神的旨意得以顯明、未來的奧祕得以揭開,乃是早期的一個信條。這題目的「理論」似乎是:睡眠時心靈的常規法則被懸止;靈魂從可見世界被抽出;它那時的思想必源於更高的存有;在這狀態中,它與未見世界相交,或許蒙准看見許多將要發生的事。比較以賽亞書導論第七節(2)。

(f) 異象。人以為,向某些蒙恩之人可以有關乎未來的呈現——其感官向四圍之物關閉——並且在恍惚或魂遊象外之中,心思可以看見未來的事。巴蘭的異象便是如此;真先知的異象更是如此;而這「可能」發生的信念如此深植於人心,以致異教民族中似乎也有這信念。比較以賽亞書導論第七節(4)。

這些便是人以為可以藉以穿透未來、揭開其奧祕的一些方法。神容讓人試驗這些方法、追求了數千年之久,直到人自己看見它們徒然無效——神這樣預備人類感到直接從祂而來之啟示的必要,並迎接祂將要作出的、關乎將來之事的真啟示。

(2) 我們在我們面前這章 (Daniel 2:4-11) 看到一個事例:一羣最有智慧、一生專務此業的人,「公認的失敗」。這是異教徒一切嘗試的公平例證;它之被容許,無疑正是為了顯明這一切嘗試必歸失敗。術士、占星家和迦勒底人在一件本屬其技藝範圍之內的事上被挫敗;在那時,這類知識的主張者本應能解開君王的難題。把這視為異教徒穿透未來、發現人所渴望知道之偉大真理的一切嘗試的公平例證,便可對它作三點觀察:

一、這試驗是公平的。(a) 有充份的「時間」。從人受造到聖經正典完成並傳遍全世,約有四千年;不能說人還需要更長的時間來試驗他是否需要啟示。(b) 這試驗是公平的,因為它是人可以任意追求的,並且是在最有利的條件下進行的。它不限於任何國家或任何蒙恩的階層。在一切土地上,在氣候、政府、法律的一切優勢之下,人都從事着這大探究;若記得有多少「巨大數目」的心思從事過這些研究,便不能假稱人沒有被容許最充份的自由,來試驗他能否「藉着探索尋見神」、揭明未來。(c) 在所用於這探究的「才智」上,也是如此。可以說,世界所產生「最高」的才智曾從事這些探究;啟示的棄絕者不能指望更高的能力投入其中,也不能指望無助的人智在這方面所能成就的,會多於已經作成的。埃及和迦勒底最深沉的心思從事過這類探究。希臘極盛之日所產生的最高才智,曾用於宗教的問題;用於尋求神、查明人與祂的關係、並斷定人將來的結局。古時異教徒如此,近代異教徒如此——最好的才智曾用於這些問題——基督教地區啟示的棄絕者也是如此。大有智力的人拒絕承認聖經是啟示,寧願退回到自己心智無助的資源。他們得着科學和學問所能作的一切之助,探求一套能向人推薦自己為真實、並合乎其需要的宗教體系;不能假稱人在這方面沒有公平的機會,顯明人的能力所能作的。

(d) 這試驗在研究領域上也是公平的。占星術、交鬼術、深奧的自然科學、神諭、夢、異象、對事件進程的觀察——這一切都向人敞開;在其中每一項上,人都蒙允隨意探究。

二、這嘗試已「全然失敗」。迦勒底人在巴比倫失敗了,正如術士從前在埃及失敗一樣,不能解明那被視為未來預兆的東西;兩次都得求助於一個與天有直接交通的人。在解明未來、揭開人如此渴望知道之未見世界的一切嘗試上,情形都是如此。(a) 對占星術、交鬼術、神諭、夢、並較深奧諸科學之啟示的一切倚靠,都已失敗。占星術不再是科學;人研究星辰,是為別的目的,不是為揭明未來之事。交鬼術不再是科學——如今再沒有人指望能與死人立約、使他們藉以透露未見世界的奧祕。如今再沒有人會為求得可靠的答覆而求問異教的神諭。較深奧的諸科學為別的目的而被追求;再沒有人會倚靠夢來提供一套滿足人需要的真理體系。(b) 在人所倚靠的各種「宗教體系」上,情形也是如此。「異教徒的諸體系」確是如此。它們在最充份的方式中被試過,並顯明不能滿足人的需要。試驗已公平地作過;那體系卻愈來愈壞。它不足以在存在的等級上提拔人;不能除去如今壓在人類身上的禍患;不能指明一條確定的路,使罪人得以預備進入來生。「論罪的贖價」確是如此。如今將近六千年,人一直嘗試尋找某條為罪作出有效祭牲的途徑。血傾在千千的壇上;牲畜被獻上;千千的人身被獻給眾神;但仍沒有證據表明這些血祭被悅納、或已贖了過犯。試驗失敗了。如今再無新的祭可獻;人想為自己的罪作出補償,是無望的。「不信所提出的諸宗教體系」也是如此。它們全是失敗。一個體系接一個體系被放棄;沒有一個是這人類所需要的。不信所能指望產生的最好才智,已在這事業上耗盡;因為它怎能指望產生比沙夫茨伯里、霍布斯、廷德爾、赫伯特、伏爾泰或休謨更配向人類提出宗教體系的人?然而,在近代不信所作的一切之後,一個有智的人寧願把自己的永恆利益託付給蘇格拉底所提出的那樣一套體系,而不是休謨提出的;他在西塞羅或塞內卡的引導之下,會比在伏爾泰或吉本的指導之下感到更安全。

三、神容許這試驗以這樣的方式作出、並有這樣的結果,其「理由」是明顯的。在埃及法老和巴比倫尼布甲尼撒之時所發生的事例中,理由顯然是:當術士的能力被公認失敗之時,神可以親自藉着約瑟和但以理,為自己的名得榮耀。照樣,祂容許這試驗大規模地作出、並容許它處處失敗的理由,大概是這兩個:(1) 以不容置疑的方式向人顯明他需要啟示;(2) 使他珍視這啟示真理的書卷。鑑於列國已作的試驗,我們更當看重它、更堅定地持守它。那啟示若被棄絕,人便無出路;他全然不能穿透未來;他設不出為罪贖價的途徑;他創不出一套能減輕我們所歎之愁苦、或啟示墳墓之外幸福前景的體系。因為聖經若被拿去,我們要退倚甚麼來引導我們?——占星術?交鬼術?異教的神諭和祭祀?夢?異教神廟中女祭司的囈語?或基督教地區不信的玄想?這一切都已徒然試過。聖經是人所能倚靠、引他到天上的惟一引導:它若失敗,一切都失敗,人便在不能穿透的黑夜之中。

(3) 我們可從本章 (Daniel 2:12-19) 學到:在人生中興起的困惑和試煉裏,好人可以求神引導和幫助。當一切人的能力都無法滿足一位嚴酷專斷君王的要求、當他和他的朋友雖然無辜、卻將被捲入那針對巴比倫智士所下之全面處決令時,但以理正是這樣感覺的。那時,除了神的干预,甚麼都不能救他們;除了那能揭明奧祕、從而轉消王怒的天上影響力,甚麼都不能免那一擊。在這急難中,但以理覺得他「可以」呼求神;他也召了他三位與他同蒙其利的友人來服這一事奉。鑑於此,我們可以觀察:

一、「所有」好人都可能遭遇類似的困惑和為難;被置於除了神的干预無人能助的境地。這在以下幾方面是真實的:(a) 關乎真理的認識。心思常在宗教的題目上困惑:理性不能揭示那些渴望知道的真理;黑暗和朦朧似乎籠罩整個題目;那被自覺罪咎壓傷的靈魂,尋求平安之路;那纏在不信之網中的心,掙扎喘息求自由;而沒有人的幫助——在永恆寶座這一邊、可以倚靠而得所需之光的,一無所有。(b) 關乎本分。心思常困惑不知當作甚麼。雖渴望行對的事,卻可能有這麼多互相衝突的見解;對甚麼最好、甚麼最對,可能有這樣的疑難,以致除了神,無人能在這急難中指引。(c) 在危險之中。但以理和他的朋友曾在危險中;如今人也常在這樣的危險中,覺得除了神,無人能救。在病榻上、在擱淺的船上、在燃燒的房屋中,人常覺得人的幫助無能為力,惟有神能施救。照樣,教會在逼迫的黑暗日子裏,常被危險四面圍繞,不能不覺得惟有神能挽回那將臨的毀滅。(d) 在宗教衰落、罪惡滋長的時代。那時教會常被引導覺得需要神的幫助,惟有祂能使它從死般的沉睡中甦醒,擋回罪惡高漲的波浪。

二、在這樣的境況中,求告神、盼望祂干预,乃是好人的特權。(1) 但以理這樣覺得;而這也是聖經所啟示無疑的真理:在這樣的境況中,我們若仰望神,便可以盼望祂的引導和幫助。比較 2 Kings 19:14-15;Job 16:19-21;Psalm 25:9;Psalm 46:1以下;Psalm 55:22;James 1:5-6。但 (2) 在這樣的困惑中,「我們」可以盼望甚麼樣的干预和指引?我回答:(a) 我們可以藉着仔細研讀聖經所立的諸原則,期待神的指引。聖經誠然沒有——也不能——提及個人的名字,或逐一列出每一個需要神指引的案例;但它立下偉大的真理原則,適用於將要發生的一切境況。在這方面,神的話有奇妙的豐富和充盈。有許多豐富的真理礦脈,似乎從未被開採,直到我們被置於某個新的、未經歷的境地。當人陷入困惑的境況;當他被召經歷試煉;當他遇見某種強大的試探形式,他會驚奇地發現,聖經中竟有這麼多從前未曾看見、恰合這些境況的東西。它彷彿是一本新書,正是為這類情形而寫;在這樣的境況中,他查考它的書頁,從不徒然。(b) 我們可以藉着祂的護理期待指引。麻雀若沒有祂的指示,一根也不掉在地上;一切事件都在祂的管制之下;而這些事件發生時,都可視為祂旨意的一個個標示。人一生最有趣、最有益的工作之一,便是研究護理對他自己的標示,努力從每日臨到他的事,學習神對他的旨意。一個謹慎而恆切禱告的觀察者,不會有嚴重出錯的危險。(c) 神藉着祂的靈引導那些困惑中的人。對那渴望被引上路的人的心思,有一種隱祕而無聲的影響力:提示真實的東西,使心思脫離偏見,勝過對真理的抗拒,使心傾向仁愛、和平與愛,催促人盡本分,並漸漸把靈魂提升向神。人若在感到內裏催促禱告時就禱告;在似乎有內裏的聲音呼召時就讀聖經;在內裏的勸戒敦促時就行善;在似乎有內在之物引他向天時,就把眼和心固定於天,他就不會有出錯的大危險。這些乃是「靈魂中敬虔的春天」——靈魂在其中可以在認識真理上迅速長進的時候;而說這樣的心境是由上頭來的影響力產生的,並不是狂熱。

(4) 鑑於本章 (Daniel 2:17-18),我們可觀察到:有能一同禱告的朋友——在患難之時能召來與我們一同禱告的朋友——乃是特權。但以理召朋友禱告時,發現如此;以斯帖當全族處於危險、一切都繫於她向君王求情的成敗時 (Esther 4:16),發現如此;歷代神的朋友們也都發現如此。禱告若蒙垂聽,那麼當許多人聯合祈求時,便有特別的理由使它得勝。比較 Matthew 18:19。因此有家庭敬拜的合宜;因此有禱告會的恰當;因此有在大會眾中獻上禱告的相稱。

(5) 神當因祂統管萬有而受讚美、受承認 (Daniel 2:20-23)。特別地,祂當在以下方面受承認:(a) 在地上發生的一切變化之中;從童年到青年、從青年到成年、到老年的變化;四季美好的更替、並四季所帶來的一切變化;從疾病到健康、從貧窮到富足、從壓迫奴役到自由、從卑微到高升的變化;在帝國的一切革命和王朝的更迭之中。(b) 祂當在祂對地上君王和統治者的至上權中受承認。每一位君王都憑祂的允許作王;每一位都被定意在祂計劃的展開中成就某個重大目的。若能寫出一部完整而正確的世界歷史,必會發現:神藉着祂所召上寶座的每一個人,都有要成就的目標;而且,正如我們如今能看法老、西拿基立、古列和奧古斯都的統治有明確的設計,照樣我們也能找出每個曾經作王者身上某個明確的設計。(c) 祂當被認定為一切知識的源頭。特別是:(1) 祂原初賦予每個心智,給它獲取知識的能力;(2) 祂保全心思的諸官能,使它們保持恰當的平衡;(3) 祂使智力清晰明亮;當它致力於真理的研究時,惟有祂能保守它不被雲翳遮蔽;(4) 祂在智力常規法則的運行之下,把重要的提示賜給心思——那些含有豐富「事物之種子」的暗示,一切知識的真正進步都繫於它們——那些進入靈魂的明亮思想、那些恰當的構想,產生如此幸運的發明、並推動科學、藝術、文學和法律的進步;(5) 祂當被視為那些大大促進人類進步的「發明」的原初源頭。在恰當、最好的時機,當某項新奇妙的發現將要臨到世界時,祂興起那要作出它的人;那發明便作為進步的一個固定點而取得其位置;社會帶着它——作為永不喪失的珍寶——在更高的層面上、以大大加速的步伐向前推進。字母書寫的發明、印刷術、蒸汽應用於製造和航海、望遠鏡和電報,以及總體上一切促進社會進步的重大發明,都是如此。若知道全部的真相,必會看見神的手在這些事中,正如真實地在「向但以理啟示深奧隱祕的事」中一樣。

(6) 我們可從本章學到——正如 Daniel 2:30 的註釋所論——我們在知識和智慧上的一切成就,當把讚美單單歸於神。關乎這一點,我們可以說:一、人有一種強烈的天然傾向,把這類成就的榮耀歸於自己。要使人把他一切卓越、一切成就的讚美歸給造他的主,是世上最難的事之一。這在才智、地位和科學成就上普遍存在;連一顆賦有真宗教的心,也難以全然脫離自誇,彷彿這一切都可追溯於我們自己。二、然而在我們的事例中,正如在但以理的事例中,一切榮耀都當歸於神。因為 (1) 我們心思和身體的一切原有稟賦,無論是甚麼,都欠於祂。在這方面,我們是照祂所樂意造的我們。我們沒有任何天然的稟賦——無論是美貌、力量、天才、學習的敏悟、或科學上出類拔萃的機會——不是祂所賜、也不是祂能像對那些較少蒙恩者那樣輕易收回的。我們為甚麼要以這些自傲呢?巴珊的橡樹要以它展張的枝子和它的力量自傲嗎?黎巴嫩的香柏樹要以它的高度、它的宏偉和秀美自傲嗎?玫瑰要以它的美麗或芬芳自傲嗎?木蘭要以它的香氣誇口嗎?(2) 神把我們所享有的一切教育手段、並我們天然能力得以發展所賴的一切,都賜給了我們。祂保全了我們的理性;祂為我們預備了導師;祂供給了我們所讀的書;祂使我們持續享有我們所曾有過的健康。任何時刻,祂都能把理性趕下寶座;都能奪去我們的健康;都能召我們離去。(3) 我們在人生使命的追求中得了任何成功,也同樣欠於祂。讓那顯然靠自己勤勞積聚巨富的商人設想:他身上的神聖作為和影響全部被收回;那麼無論他付出多少勞力、賦有多少技巧,他必不會遭遇這樣的成功。讓他想想他虧欠海上順風的有多少;虧欠帶來豐收的季節的有多少;虧欠那幾乎像是「機遇」或「運氣」的有多少;他便立時看見,他所得的任何成功,在卓越的意義上,都當追溯於神。這在人類努力其他一切成功的部門,也同樣真實。(4) 這對我們所擁有的一切救恩之路的知識、並我們永生的盼望,也同樣真實。宗教的一大原則是:我們沒有一樣不是領受的;若是領受的,就不當自誇,彷彿不是領受的;因為使我們與人不同的是神(見 1 Corinthians 4:7)。是神原初賜給我們啟示真理的書卷——使我們有別於整個異教世界。是神喚醒我們看見自己的罪和危險——使我們有別於四圍輕浮而無慮的世界。惟有神赦免了我們的罪——使我們有別於世上未蒙赦免的眾人。是神賜給我們所懷每一有根據的盼望、並我們在與祂相交中所有一切的平安和喜樂。因此,這些事上,我們當把一切讚美歸給神;在我們的事例中,正如在但以理的事例中,我們樂意這樣行,乃是我們敬虔的明證之一。

(7) 我們在本章 (Daniel 2:46-47) 看到一個有教訓的事例,說明一個不敬虔的人在尊重神的事上可以走到何等地步。不能假定尼布甲尼撒是個真實敬虔的人。他此前此後的特性和行徑,都是異教徒的;沒有證據表明他真實歸向了神。然而,他向一位至高者的僕人和先知 (Daniel 2:46)、甚至向神自己 (Daniel 2:47),表了最高的敬意。這在較後的時期 (Daniel 4) 以更顯著的方式再次顯明。在此他顯明了一個沒有真實敬虔的人可能走到多遠;這樣的事例既不罕見,花一點時間思考它們,或非不當。

一、這對神的敬意延伸到以下這些:(1) 對祂的欽崇,以祂為偉大、智慧、有大能。祂能力和智慧的證據,可在祂的作為中尋見。心思可以因智慧的東西受感、被浩大的東西壓倒,而沒有真實的宗教;而這一切的欽崇可以終止於神,以對祂、或對祂僕人的敬語表達出來。(2) 這對神的欽崇,可以延伸到宗教中一切「美麗」的東西。自然之工的美——天空、景色、海洋、落日、變幻的雲、田野的花——可以引思想上升至神,並使人對那以如此可愛裝飾世界的一位,產生某種欽崇。有情感的宗教,也有原則的宗教;有終止於「美」的宗教,也有終止於「聖」的宗教。希臘人是天然的美之崇拜者,把這類宗教推到極處;因為他們的宗教,在一切形式上,都以愛美為特徵。基督教中也是如此——正如在神的作為中一樣——有許多美麗的東西;人可能被它迷住,卻從未為罪痛悔、從未愛過純正的宗教本身。一個天然欽崇品格中之可愛的人,可能在救贖主的品格中看見高度的道德美;一個易受同情感動的心,可能因那受傷害之救主的苦難而受感。那會為一個動人的故事、為舞台上悲劇的演出、為一幕真實的苦境流淚的眼睛,也可能為那位被釘十架者的冤屈和苦難流淚;然而其中可能只有情感的宗教——僅出於天然情感的宗教。(3) 世上有許多「詩意」的宗教。想像力可能對神的品格形成這樣一幅圖景,使它看來可愛;而那品格中或許連一個正確的特徵也沒有。世上的宗教不少屬於這一類——人所構想的神,隨心思所好;情感固定於那想像的存有;而靈魂中對真神卻沒有一點愛。照樣,對人、對人的品格和命運,也有詩意的看法;而心的真實品格卻從未被看見。對天堂也有詩意的看法——與古人對至福之地的看法極其相似。但天堂之為聖潔之地,卻從未被想到,也不會被愛。人指望一個地方,那裏有高雅而聰慧的人;可親而可愛的人;有教養而正直的人;詩人、演說家、戰士和哲學家聚集一堂。這正是常常在頌詞、墓誌和談話中顯出的那類宗教——那些從未有過更好宗教、也從未假稱有任何認真敬虔的人,被說成死時上了天堂。在這樣的宗教影響之下,少有人不指望某種天堂;少有人在死時——無論其品格如何,除非他們是公開而徹底墮落的——沒有人表示盼望他們已安然到達更好的世界。我們若可信墓誌、訃告、喪禮頌詞和傳記,那麼詩人、戰士、政治家或哲學家,鮮有我們當為他們在未來世界的幸福擔憂的。

二、但這一切之中,可能沒有真實的宗教。沒有證據表明尼布甲尼撒身上有;如今所論的那些事例中,證據也同樣少。這樣的人或許對神有某種敬畏,以祂為偉大、有能、智慧;或許在觀看祂作為中祂存在和完全的證據時,甚至有某種快樂;或許在宗教的純粹「詩意」中,有一陣愉快的情感激盪;或許受良心攔阻不作許多事;或許建廟築壇、捐資維持宗教、甚至按他們的理解熱心於宗教——而仍沒有對神正確的觀念、沒有絲毫真實的敬虔。(1) 真實敬虔的心思對這一切並非無動於衷;它對神之為偉大榮耀的存有,可以有同樣崇高的觀念;可以同樣深受祂作為中之美的感動。真實的宗教不毀滅對崇高和美的感覺,反而在更高程度上培養它。但 (2) 真實的宗教中還有許多別的東西;沒有它們,這一切都是徒然。(a) 真實的宗教總是出於對神照祂本樣的正確認識;不是出於把祂想成一個想像的存有。(b) 真實的宗教必視神為具有「道德」屬性;為仁愛、公義、真實、聖潔;而不僅是有能力、偉大。(c) 在所提的這一切之中,那些如此欽崇神和祂作為的人,身上不必然有任何道德上的卓越。僅僅欽崇能力,不意味着我們有道德的卓越。欽崇那創造諸世界並使其各安其位的智慧;欽崇詩的美、花的美或景色之美——雖是神所造——不意味着我們有道德的卓越,因此也沒有真實的宗教。欽崇「神」為建築師或畫家,其中的宗教不會多於欽崇克里斯托弗·雷恩爵士或米開朗基羅;僅僅欽崇神的作為,所含的道德卓越不會多於欽崇保羅或彼得。在宗教裏,心不僅欽崇美麗和宏偉;它愛那純潔、公義、良善、聖潔的。它以神為聖潔的存有而喜樂,過於以祂為有能的存有;它在祂的道德品格中找到喜樂,而不僅在祂的偉大中。

(8) 我們可從本章 (Daniel 2:49) 學到:當我們蒙受昌達和尊榮時,不當忽略、也不當以我們早年貧窮無聞時的同伴和同甘共苦者為恥。約瑟被高舉到埃及首相之位時,不以他年邁的父親為恥;他雖曾作卑微的牧人,卻以對年長父親最深的敬意,把他引薦給法老;他也不以他的弟兄們為恥,儘管他們曾深深虧待他。但以理同樣被高舉到世界最宏偉君主國中人所能達到的最尊貴職位時,也不以那些與他同受卑微而嚴酷之奴役的少年朋友為恥。照樣,我們若變得富足;若被提升到尊榮;若以學問或才智著稱;若我們的名聲傳於外邦、或受託高貴的職位,就當不忘我們早年的朋友和同伴。

英文原文

Then Daniel requested of the king ... - In his own remarkable prosperity, and in the extraordinary honors conferred on him, he did not forget the companions of his humbler days. They were his countrymen; they had been captives with him; they had been selected with a view to stand with him before the king Daniel 1:3-4; they had shared with him in his rules of abstinence Daniel 1:11-17; they had all passed an honorable examination before the king Daniel 1:18-19; they had united with him in supplication to God that he would disclose the meaning of the vision Daniel 2:17-18; and now it was proper that they should be remembered by him who had been so signally honored.

Over the affairs of the province of Babylon - In what particular departments of business they were employed is not mentioned; but it would seem that all that especially pertained to this province was entrusted to them. Daniel had the general superintendence, but the subordinate duties growing out of the office were entrusted to them. The fact that the king granted the request shows the influence that Daniel had at the court. The reasons which influenced the king in granting the request may have been, not only the favor with which he regarded Daniel, but the fact that the duties of the office conferred on him now were such as to require assistance, and the remembrance of the virtues ot these youths when they stood before him.

But Daniel sat in the gate of the king - The post of chief honor and dignity as a counselor of the king. The "gate" of a city in the East, being a chief place of concourse, was the place where courts were held, and public business was usually transacted. See the notes at Job 29:7. To say, therefore, that he "sat in the gate of the king," is merely to say that he occupied a place with the chief counselors and dignitaries of the realm. The phrase "Sublime Porte," that is, "the Sublime Gate," is still employed at Constantinople to denote the government of the sultan, for, in the earlier days of Ottoman rule, the reigning sovereign, as is still the case in some parts of the East, held courts of justice and levees at the entrance of his residence. See "Harper's Magazine," vol. iv. p. 333. The office of Daniel was, perhaps, not far different from that of the grand vizier of the Turkish government. See Murray's "Ency. Geog." vol. ii. p. 202.

Remarks

Among the lessons of practical value suggested by this chapter, we may notice the following:

(1) We have an instance Daniel 2:1-3 of the methods which were resorted to in early periods of the world to ascertain what the future would be. This great monarch relied on a dream which greatly disturbed him, and on the power which he supposed was entrusted to men to interpret dreams. In common with the prevailing spirit of his times, and of all ancient times (notes, Daniel 2:1), he believed that dreams might be regarded as prognostics of future events; that they were under Divine direction; and that all that was necessary to make them safe guides in reference to what is to occur, was that they should be properly interpreted. In common, too, with all the people of ancient times, and with most of modern times, the king here referred to had an earnest desire to look into the future. There has been no desire in the human bosom stronger than this. We are so made that we wish to lift the mysterious veil which shrouds the future; to penetrate the deep darkness which rests on the unseen world.

Our great interests are there. The past is fixed, and cannot now affect us, except by the consequences of what we have done, and by teaching us lessons of value derived from our own observation, and that of others. But the future is not yet fixed. Man, so anxious to know what this is to be, finds himself in respect to it peculiarly unendowed. In relation to the past, he is endowed with the faculty of "memory," but with nothing corresponding to this pertaining to "the future." He can treasure up what has occurred, but he cannot in like manner make the future pass before his mind, that he may become wise by knowing what will take place in far distant times. There can be no doubt that God could have endowed the mind with one faculty as well as the other - for he has it himself - but there were obvious reasons why it should not be done. Destitute, then, as man was of this power, one great object of human inquiry has been to see whether the deficiency could be supplied, and whether something might not be found which would be to the future substantially what the memory is to the past. The efforts and results on this subject - one of which we have in the chapter before us - constitute one of the most instructive chapters of the history of our race, and show how effectually God has bounded the limits of human investigation in this respect. Among those methods of attempting to penetrate the future, and of laying open its deep mysteries, may be noticed the following:

(a) Astrology. It was supposed that the stars might exert an influence over the fates of men, and that by observing their positions, conjunctions, and oppositions, it might be ascertained what would be the destiny of individuals and nations. The belief of this has manifested itself more or less in every age; and in such instances as in the word "lunacy," and in the common apprehensions about the influence of the moon on health and on vegetation, may be still seen traces of that belief. Even Lord Bacon held that "astrology was a science not to be "rejected," but reformed;" and in the early periods of the world it was a "fair" subject of investigation whether the heavenly bodies actually exerted such an influence, and whether, if it were so, it was possible to ascertain the laws by which this was done. This was the so-called science of astrology.

(b) Necromancy. The belief of this also prevailed in nearly all ancient nations, and we find frequent reference to it in the Scriptures. This consisted in the belief that the dead must be acquainted with the world where they now dwell, so dark to the living, and that it might be possible to make a covenant or compact with them, by which they would be induced to disclose what they knew. It was extensively, if not universally, believed that they re-appeared to men, and that it was not an uncommon occurrence for them to leave their abodes, and to visit the earth again. It was, therefore, not an unnatural and not an unfair subject of inquiry, whether they would not disclose to the more favored among mortals what they knew of the secrets of the invisible world, and what they knew of events which were to come. Compare the notes at Isaiah 8:19.

(c) The arts of divination. These were founded mainly on the investigations of science. It was at first a fair question whether, amidst the wonders which science was unfolding to the view, it might not contribute to lift the veil from the future, and reveal what was yet to come. It took long to ascertain what were the legitimate aims of science, and what might be hoped for from it. Hence, it was directed to the inquiry whether some substance might not be found which would transmute all things to gold; whether some elixir might not be discovered which would arrest all disease, and give immortality to man; and whether science would not disclose some means by which the future could be penetrated, and the mysteries of the invisible world be laid open to the view. It required centuries of investigation, a thousand failures, and the results of long and patient thought, to ascertain what were the true objects of science, and to convince the world that it was not its legitimate purpose to reveal the future to man.

(d) Pagan oracles. It was an early inquiry whether God would not, in some way, lift the veil from the future and disclose its secrets to man. The belief that this would be done seems to be natural to the mind of man; and in all ages, and in all countries, he has supposed that; the future would be thus disclosed. Hence, among the pagan, certain persons claimed to be divinely inspired; hence, such shrines as that at Delphi became celebrated; hence, ambiguous responses were uttered, so expressed as to support the credit of the oracle, whatever might be the result; hence, men were appointed to observe the flights of birds, to inspect the entrails of animals offered in sacrifice, to interpret any unusual phenomena in the clouds, to mark the direction of meteors, and, in general, to examine any unusual appearances in the heavens or the earth, which would seem to furnish any clew by which the future might be known. Much of all this undoubtedly became mere imposture, and justified the remark of Cicero, that he wondered that one augur could meet another without laughing; but there can be no doubt that by many these inquiries were honestly pursued, and that at first all this seemed to be a legitimate subject of inquiry. What forbade man to pursue it? And who could tell but that in some such ways the secrets of the mysterious future could be found out? It demanded long and patient inquiry and observation to show that this could not be so, and that whatever might be indicated by any of these things, it was never designed that they should be the means by which man could be made acquainted with the mysteries of the invisible world.

(e) Dreams. We have seen (notes, Daniel 2:1) that it was an early article of belief that through the medium of dreams the Divine will might be made known, and the secrets of the future disclosed. The "theory" on this subject seems to have been, that during sleep the ordinary laws of the mind are suspended; that the soul is abstracted from the visible world; that the thoughts which it has then must be originated by higher beings; and that in this state it has converse with an invisible world, and may be permitted to see much of what is yet to occur. Compare Intro. to Isaiah, Section VII. (2).

(f) Visions. Men supposed that there might be representations made to certain favored persons respecting the future, their senses being closed to surrounding objects, and that while in an ecstasy, or trance, the mind might have a view of future events. Such were the visions of Balaam; such, in a remarkable manner, were the visions of the true prophets; and so deeply was the conviction that this "might" occur engrafted in the human mind, that the belief of it seems to have had a place among the pagan nations. Compare Introduction to Isaiah, Section 7. (4).

Such were some of the ways by which it was supposed that the future might be penetrated by man, and its secrets disclosed. By allowing man to make trial of these methods, and to pursue them through a period of several thousand years, until he himself saw that they were fruitless, God was preparing the race to feel the necessity of direct communications from himself, and to welcome the true reve lations which he would make respecting things to come.

(2) We have in the chapter before us Daniel 2:4-11 an instance of "the acknowledged failure" of a class of the wisest of men, whose lives were devoted to this employment, in their attempts to disclose the future. This is a fair illustration of all the attempts of the pagan, and it was doubtless permitted in order that it might be seen that all such attempts must fail. The magicians, astrologers, and Chaldeans were foiled in a case which fairly came within the province of their art, and when pretenders to this kind of knowledge ought to have been able to solve the difficulties of the monarch. Regarding this as a fair illustration of all the attempts of the pagan to penetrate the future, and to discover the great truths which it is desirable for man to know, there are three observations which may be made in regard to it:

I. The trial has been a fair one.

(a) There was "time" enough allowed for it. It was about four thousand years from the creation of man to the time when the canon of Scripture was completed, and promulgated to the whole world, and it could not be said that man required a longer time to test the question whether he needed a revelation.

(b) The trial was a fair one, because it was one which men were at liberty to pursue to any extent, and which was conducted under the best advantages. It was confined to no country or favored class of men. In all lands, and with every advantage of climate, government, and laws, man has been engaged in the great inquiry; and if it be remembered what immense "numbers" of minds have been employed in these investigations, it cannot be pretended that the utmost desirable freedom has not been allowed to man to test the question whether "by searching he can find out God," and disclose the future.

(c) The same thing is true in respect to the "talent" which has been employed in this investigation. It is not too much to say, that the "highest" talent that the world has produced has been engaged in these inquiries, and that the rejecters of revelation cannot hope that higher powers can be brought to bear on it, or that the unaided human intellect can hope to accomplish more in this respect than has been done. The profoundest minds in Egypt and Chaldea were engaged in inquiries of this sort. The very highest talent which Greece produced in its best days was employed on questions of religion; in attempts to find out God, to ascertain the relations of man to him, and to determine what man was to be hereafter. What was true, also, of the ancient pagan, and of the modern pagan, that the best talent has been employed on these questions, is true also of the rejecters of revelation in Christian lands. Men of high powers of intellect have refused to acknowledge the Bible as a revelation, and have chosen to fall back on the unaided resources of their own minds. Aided with all that science and learning can do, they have inquired after a system of religion that would commend itself to man as true, and as adapted to his wants; and it cannot be pretended that man in this respect has not had a fair opportunity to show what the human powers can do.

(d) The trial has been a fair one in regard to the field of investigation. Astrology, necromancy, abstruse natural science, oracles, dreams, visions, the observation of the course of events - all these have been open before man, and in one and all of them he has been allowed to pursue his investigations at pleasure.

II. There has been an entire "failure" in the attempt. The Chaldeans failed in Babylon, as the magicians had done in Egypt, to explain what was regarded as a prognostic of the future, and in both cases it was necessary to call in the aid of one who had a direct communication from heaven. The same has been the case in "all" attempts to explain the future, and to disclose what man was so desirous of knowing about the invisible world.

(a) All reliance on astrology, necromancy, oracles, dreams, and the revelations of the abstruser sciences, has failed. Astrology has ceased to be a science, and the stars are studied for other purposes than to disclose future events; necromancy has ceased to be a science - for no one now hopes to be able to make a compact with the dead, in virtue of which they will disclose the secrets of the invisible world; no one now would consult a pagan oracle with the hope of receiving a response to his inquiries that might be relied on: the abstruser sciences are pursued for other purposes; and no one would repose on dreams to furnish a system of truth which would meet the wants of man.

(b) The same thing has been true in regard to the various "systems of religion" on which men have relied. "It is true of the systems of the pagan." They have been tried in the most ample manner, and have shown that they do not meet the wants of man. The experiment has been fairly made, and the system is becoming worse and worse. It is not adapted to elevate man in the scale of being in regard to the present life; it does not remove the evils which press now upon the race; it does not disclose a certain way by which a sinner may be prepared for the life to come. "It is true in regard to an atonement for sin." The attempt has been made now for nearly six thousand years, to find some way in which an efficacious sacrifice may be made for sin. Blood has been poured on thousands of altars; animals have been offered, and thousands of human beings have been devoted to the gods, but still there has been no evidence that these bloody offerings have been accepted, or that they have availed to expiate transgression. The experiment has failed. There is no new sacrifice that can be offered now, and it is hopeless for man to attempt to make expiation for his own sins. "The same thing is true of the systems of religion, proposed by infidelity." They are all failures. One system after another is abandoned, and no one is such as the race needs. The best talent that infidelity can hope to produce has been exhausted in this undertaking, for how can it hope to produce men better fitted to propose a system of religion to mankind than Shaftesbury, or Hobbes, or Tindal, or Herbert, or Voltaire, or Hume? Yet, after all that has been done by infidelity in modern times, an intelligent man would prefer trusting his eternal interests to such a system as Socrates would propose, to one proposed by Hume; he would feel safer under the guidance of Cicero or Seneca than under the direction of Voltaire or Gibbon.

III. The "reasons why God has permitted this trial to be made, in such a manner, and with such results, are obvious. In the cases which occurred in the time of Pharaoh in Egypt, and of Nebuchadnezzar in Babylon, the reason evidently was, that when there was an acknowledged failure of the power of the magicians, God might himself, through Joseph and Daniel, get honor to his own name. So the reasons why he has permitted this trial to be made on a large scale, and has suffered it everywhere to fail, are probably these two:

(1) to show to man, in such a way as to admit of no doubt, his need of revelation; and

(2) to induce him to prize the volume of revealed truth.

We should value it the more, and adhere to it the more firmly, in view of the experiment which has been made in all lands. If that revelation be rejected, man has no resource; he is wholly unable to penetrate the future; he can devise no way of making atonement for sin; he can originate no system that shall alleviate the sorrows under which we groan, or disclose the prospect of happiness beyond the tomb. For if the Bible is taken away, on what shall we fall back to guide us? - on astrology; on necromancy; on pagan oracles and sacrifices; on dreams; on the ravings of priestesses at pagan shrines, or the speculations of infidelity in Christian lands? All these have been tried in vain. The Bible is the only guide on which man can rely to conduct him to heaven: if that fails, all fails, and man is in the midst of impenetrable night.

(3) We may learn from this chapter Daniel 2:12-19, that in the perplexities and trials which arise in life, a good man may appeal to God for guidance and help. So Daniel felt, when all human power had failed in complying with the demands of a stern and arbitrary monarch. and when he and his friends, though innocent, were about to be involved in the sweeping sentence which had been issued against the wise men of Babylon. Then it was clear that nothing could save them but Divine interposition; nothing could avert the stroke but such a heavenly influence as would disclose the secret, and thus avert the wrath of the king. In this emergency Daniel felt that he "might" call upon God, and to this service he summoned also his three friends, who were equally interested with him in the issue. In view of this we may observe:

I. That "all" good men are liable to meet with similar perplexities and embarrassments; to be placed in circumstances where nothing but the interposition of God can help them. This is true in such respects as the following:

(a) In reference to the knowledge of the truth. The mind is often perplexed on the subject of religion: reason fails to disclose those truths which it is desirable to know; darkness and obscurity seem to envelope the whole subject; the soul, oppressed with a sense of conscious guilt, seeks to find some way of peace; the heart, entangled in the meshes of unbelief, struggles and pants to be free, and there is no human help - nothing this side the eternal throne on which reliance can be placed to impart the light which is needed.

(b) In reference to duty. The mind is often perplexed to know what should be done. Though desirous of doing what is right, yet there may be so many conflicting views; there may be such doubt as to what is best and right, that none but God can direct in such an emergency.

(c) In cases of peril. Daniel and his friends were in danger; and men are often now in such danger that they feel that none but God can save them. On a bed of pain, in a stranded vessel, in a burning house, men often feel that human help is powerless, and that aid can be found in none but God. Thus the church, in the dark days of persecution, has often been so encompassed with dangers, that it could not but feel that none but God could avert the impending destruction.

(d) In times when religion declines, and when iniquity abounds. Then the church often is led to feel that there is need of the aid of God, and that none but he can rouse it from its deathlike slumbers, and put back the swelling waves of iniquity.

II. In such circumstances it is the privilege of a good man to appeal to God, with the hope that he will interpose.

(1) This was felt by Daniel, and it is an undoubted truth, as revealed in the Bible, that in such circumstances, if we will look to God, we may hope for his guidance and help. Compare 2 Kings 19:14-15; Job 16:19-21; Psalm 25:9; Psalm 46:1, following; Psalm 55:22; James 1:5-6. But

(2) what kind of interposition and direction may "we" hope for in such perplexities? I:answer:

(a) We may expect the Divine direction by a careful study of the principles laid down in the Scriptures. The Bible indeed does not, for it could not, mention the names of individuals, or specify every case which would occur in which Divine direction would be needed, but it lays down great principles of truth, applicable to all the circumstances which will ever arise. In this respect there is a wonderful richness and fulness in the Word of God. There is many a rich vein of truth which seems never to have been worked until we are placed in some new and untried situation. When one is thrown into perplexing circumstances; when he is called to pass through trials; when he meets some powerful form of temptation, he is surprised to find how much there is in the Bible adapted to such circumstances that he never saw there before. It seems to be a new book, written to meet just such cases; nor in such circumstances does he ever consult its pages in vain.

(b) We may expect direction by his providence. The sparrow falls not to the ground without his direction, and all events are under his control, and as these events occur they may be regarded as so many indications of his will. One of the most interesting and profitable employments in a man's life is to study the indications of Providence in regard to himself, and to endeavor to learn, from what is daily occurring to him, what is the will of God in regard to him. A careful and prayerful observer of the intimations of the Divine will is not in serious danger of error.

(c) God guides those who are in perplexity by his Spirit. There is a secret and silent influence on the mind of him who is desirous of being led in the way of duty, suggesting what is true, delivering the mind from prejudice, overcoming opposition to the truth, disposing the heart to charity, peace, and love, prompting to the performance of duty, and gradually elevating the soul to God. If a man would pray when he feels an inward prompting to pray; would read the Bible when some inward voice seems to call him to do it; would do good when the inward monitor urges him to do it; would fix the eye and the heart on heaven when something within seems to lead him toward the skies, he would not be in much danger of error. Such are "spring-times of piety in the soul" - times when the soul may make rapid progress in the knowledge of the truth, and it is not enthusiasm to say that such states of mind are produced by an influence from above.

(4) In view of this chapter Daniel 2:17-18, we may observe that it is a privilege to have praying friends - friends on whom we can call to unite with us in prayer in the time of trouble. So Daniel found it when he called on his friends to pray; so Esther found it when her whole people were in danger, and when all depended on her successful application to the sovereign Esther 4:16, and so the friends of God have found it in all ages. If prayer is heard at all, there are special reasons why it should prevail when many are united in the request. Compare Matthew 18:19. Hence, the propriety of worship in the family; hence, the fitness of prayermeetings; and hence, the appropriateness of prayer offered in the great congregation.

(5) God should be praised and acknowledged as having supremacy over all things, Daniel 2:20-23. Particularly he should be acknowledged

(a) in the changes that occur on earth; in the changes from childhood to youth, and from youth to manhood, and to old age; in the beautiful changes of the seasons, and in all the variety which the seasons bring with them; in the changes from sickness to health, from poverty to affluence, from oppression and slavery to freedom, from an humble to an exalted condition; in all the revolutions of empire, and the changes of dynasties.

(b) He should be acknowledged in his supremacy over the kings and rulers of the earth. Every monarch reigns by his permission, and every one is designed to accomplish some great purpose in the development of his plans. If a full and correct history of the world could be written, it would be found that God had some object to accomplish by the instrumentality of everyone whom he has called to a throne, and that as we can now see a distinct design to be accomplished by the reign of Pharaoh, Sennacherib, Cyrus, and Augustus, so we could find some distinct design in reference to every one who has ever reigned.

(c) He should be recognized as the source of all knowledge. Particularly

(1) he originally endowed every mind, and gave it the capacity which it has for acquiring knowledge;

(2) he preserves the faculties of the mind, and gives them their just balance;

(3) he makes the intellect clear and bright, and when it applies itself to the investigation of truth he only can preserve it unclouded;

(4) he makes, under the operation of the regular laws of intellect, important suggestions to the mind - those pregnant hints containing so much "the seeds of things" on which all true progress in knowledge depends - those bright thoughts, those happy conceptions, which come into the soul, and which result in such happy inventions, and such advances in science, art, literature, and law; and

(5) he should be regarded as the original source of those "inventions" which contribute so much to the progress of the race. At the proper time, and the best time, when some new and wonderful discovery is to burst upon the world, he raises up the individual who is to make it, and the discovery takes its place as one of the fixed points of progress, and society, with that as a treasure never to be lost, moves forward on a higher elevation, with greatly accelerated progress. So it was with the invention of alphabetical writing; the art of printing; the application of steam to purposes of manufacture and navigation; the telescope, and the telegraph; and, in general, in respect to all those great inventions which have contributed to the progress of society. If the whole truth were known, it would be seen that the hand of God was in these things as really as in the "revelation of the deep and secret things to Daniel."

(6) We may learn from this chapter, as was remarked in the notes at Daniel 2:30, that for all our attainments in knowledge and wisdom we should ascribe the praise to God alone. In illustration of this we may remark:

I. That there is a strong native tendency in man to ascribe the honor of such attainments to himself. It is one of the most difficult of all things to induce man to attribute the praise of whatever excellence he may have. or whatever attainments he may make, to his Creator. This exists universally in regard to talent, rank, and scientific attainments; and it is even hard for a heart that is endowed with true religion to free itself altogether from self-glorying, as if it were all to be traced to ourselves.

II. Yet in our case, as in the case of Daniel, all the honor should be ascribed to God. For

(1) it is to him we owe all our original endowments of mind and of body, whatever they may be. In this respect we are as he chose to make us. We have no natural endowment - whether of beauty, strength, genius, aptness for learning, or advantages for distinction in science which he did not confer on us, and which he could not as easily have withheld from us as he did from those less favored. And why should we be proud of these things? Shall the oak of Bashan be proud of its far-spreading arms, or its strength? Shall the cedar of Lebanon be proud of its height, and its vastness, and its beauty? Shall the rose be proud of its beauty or its sweetness, or shall the magnolia boast of its fragrance?

(2) God has conferred on us all the means of education which we have enjoyed, and all to which the development ot our natural powers can be traced. He has preserved our reason; he has furnished us instructors; he has provided the books which we have read; he has continued to us the possession of the health which we have enjoyed. At any moment he could have driven reason from the throne; he could have deprived us of health; he could have summoned us away.

(3) It is equally owing to him that we have been favored with any success in the prosecution of our calling in life. Let the merchant who has accumulated great property, apparently by his own industry, suppose that all Divine agency and influence in his case had been withheld, and whatever labor he may have expended, or with whatever skill he may be endowed, he could have met with no such success. Let him reflect how much he owes to favoring gales on the ocean; to the seasons producing abundant harvests, and to what seems almost to be "chance" or "fortune," and he will see at once that whatever success he may have been favored with is to be traced, in an eminent sense, to God. The same thing is true of all the other successful departments of human effort.

(4) This is equally true of all the knowledge which we have of the way of salvation, and all our hopes of eternal life. It is a great principle of religion that we have nothing which we have not received, and that if we have received it, we should not glory as if we had not received it, for it is God who makes us to differ (see 1 Corinthians 4:7). It is God who originally gave us the volume of revealed truth - making us differ from the whole pagan world. It is God who awakened us to see our guilt and danger, making us to differ from the gay and careless world around us. It is God alone who has pardoned our sins, making us to differ from the multitude who are unpardoned in the world. It is God who has given us every hope that we cherish that is well-founded, and all the peace and joy which we have had in com munion with himself. For these things, therefore, we should give all the praise to God; and in our case, as in that of Daniel, it is one of the evidences of our piety when we are disposed to do so.

(7) We have in this chapter Daniel 2:46-47 an instructive instance of the extent to which an irreligious man may go in showing respect for God. It can. not be supposed that Nebuchadnezzar was a truly pious man. His characteristics and actions, both before and after this, were those of a pagan, and there is no evidence that he was truly converted to God. Yet he evinced the highest respect for one who was a servant and prophet of the Most High Daniel 2:46, and even for God himself Daniel 2:47. This was evinced in a still more remarkable manner at a subsequent period Daniel 4 In this he showed how far it is possible for one to go who has no real piety, and as such cases are not uncommon, it may not be improper to consider them for a moment.

I. This respect for God extends to the following things:

(1) An admiration of him, as great, and wise, and powerful. The evidences of his power and wisdom are traced in his works. The mind may be impressed with what is wise, or overpowered with what is vast, without there being any real religion, and all this admiration may terminate on God, and be expressed in language of respect for him, or for his ministers.

(2) This admiration of God may be extended to whatever is "beautiful" in religion. The beauty'of the works of nature, of the sky, of a landscape, of the ocean, of the setting sun, of the changing clouds, of the flowers of the field, may lead the thoughts up to God, and produce a certain admiration of a Being who has clothed the world with so much loveliness. There is a religion of sentiment as well as of principle; a religion that terminates on the "beautiful" as well as a religion that terminates on the "holy." The Greeks, natural admirers of beauty, carried this kind of religion to the highest possible degree, for their religion was, in all its forms, characterized by the love of the beautiful. So also there is much that is beautiful in Christianity, as well as in the works of God, and it is possible to be charmed with that without ever having felt any compunction for sin. or any love for pure religion itself. It is possible for one who has a natural admiration for what is lovely in character, to see a high degree of moral beauty in the character of the Redeemer, for one whose heart is easily moved by sympathy to be affected in view of the sufferings of the injured Saviour. The same eyes that would weep over a welltold tale, or over a tragic representation on the stage, or over a scene of real distress, might weep over the wrongs and woes of Him who was crucified, and yet there might be nothing more than the religion of sentiment - the religion springing from mere natural feeling.

(3) There is much "poetic" religion in the world. It is possible for the imagination to form such a view of the Divine character that it shall seem to be lovely, while perhaps there may be scarcely a feature of that character that shall be correct. Not a little of the religion of the world is of this description - where such a God is conceived of as the mind chooses, and the affections are fixed on that imaginary being, while there is not a particle of love to the true God in the soul. So there is a poetic view of man, of his character, of his destiny, while the real character of the heart has never been seen. So there is a poetic view of heaven - strongly resembling the views which the ancients had of the Elysian fields. But heaven as a place of holiness has never been thought of, and would not be loved. Men look forward to a place where the refined and the intelligent; the amiable and the lovely; the accomplished and the upright; where poets, orators, warriors, and philosophers will be assembled together. This is the kind of religion which is often manifested in eulogies, and epitaphs, and in conversation, where those who never had any better religion, and never pretended to any serious piety, are represented as having gone to heaven when they die. There are few who, under the influence of such a religion, are not looking forward to some kind of a heaven; and few persons die, whatever may be their character, unless they are openly and grossly abandoned, for whom the hope is not expressed that they have gone safe to a better world. If we may credit epitaphs, and obituary notices, and funeral eulogiums, and biographies, there are few poets, warriors, statesmen, or philosophers, about whose happiness in the future world we should have any apprehension.

II. But in all this there may be no real religion. There is no evidence that there was any in the case of Nebuchadnezzar, and as little is there in the instances now referred to. Such persons may have a kind of reverence for God as great, and powerful, and wise; they may have even a kind of pleasure in looking on the evidence of his existence and perfections in his works; they may have a glow of pleasurable emotion in the mere "poetry" of religion; they may be restrained from doing many things by their consciences; they may erect temples, and build altars, and contribute to the support of religion, and even be zealous for religion. as they understand it, and still have no just views of God, and no true piety whatever.

(1) The mind that is truly religious is not insensible to all this, and may have as exalted notions of God as a great and glorious being, and be as much impressed with the beauty evinced in his works as in the cases supposed. True religion does not destroy the sense of the sublime and beautiful, but rather cultivates this in a higher degree. But

(2) There is much besides this that enters into true religion, and without which all these things are vain.

(a) True religion always arises from just views of God as he is; not from him as an imaginary being.

(b) True religion must regard God as having "moral" attributes; as benevolent, and just, and true, and holy, and not merely as powerful and great.

(c) In all these things referred to, there is not. necessarily any moral excellence on the part of those who thus admire God and his works. The mere admiration of power implies in us no moral excellence. The admiration of the wisdom which made the worlds and keeps them in their place; of the beauties of poetry, or of a flower, or landscape, though made by God, implies no moral excellence in us, and, therefore, no true religion. There is no more religion in admiring "God" as an architect or painter, than there is in admiring Sir Christopher Wren, or Michael Angelo; and the mere admiration of the works of God as such, implies no more moral excellence in us than it does to admire Paul's or Peter's. In religion, the heart does not merely admire the beautiful and the grand; it loves what is pure, and just, and good, and holy. It delights in God as a holy being rather than as a powerful being; it finds pleasure in his moral character, and not merely in his greatness.

(8) We may learn from this chapter Daniel 2:49, that when we are favored with prosperity and honor we should not neglect, or be ashamed of, the companions of our earlier days, and the partakers of our fortune when we were poor and unknown. Joseph, when exalted to the premiership of Egypt, was not ashamed of his aged father, but, though he had been an humble shepherd, presented him, with the deepest feelings of respect toward an aged parent, to Pharaoh; nor was he ashamed of his brethren, though they had done him so much wrong. Daniel, when in a similar manner advanced to the most honorable post which one could reach, in the most magnificent monarchy of the world, was not ashamed of the youthful friends with whom he had shared the humble and severe lot of bondage. So we, if we are made rich; if we are raised to honor; if we become distinguished for learning or talent; if our names are known abroad, or we are entrusted with a high and honorable office, should not forget the friends and companions of our earlier years.